WO2025197969A1 - Ionic compound, composition, functional material, silver halide photosensitive material, and diffusion-transfer-type silver halide photosensitive material - Google Patents
Ionic compound, composition, functional material, silver halide photosensitive material, and diffusion-transfer-type silver halide photosensitive materialInfo
- Publication number
- WO2025197969A1 WO2025197969A1 PCT/JP2025/010737 JP2025010737W WO2025197969A1 WO 2025197969 A1 WO2025197969 A1 WO 2025197969A1 JP 2025010737 W JP2025010737 W JP 2025010737W WO 2025197969 A1 WO2025197969 A1 WO 2025197969A1
- Authority
- WO
- WIPO (PCT)
- Prior art keywords
- layer
- silver halide
- formula
- same
- integer
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Pending
Links
Classifications
-
- C—CHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
- C07—ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
- C07F—ACYCLIC, CARBOCYCLIC OR HETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS CONTAINING ELEMENTS OTHER THAN CARBON, HYDROGEN, HALOGEN, OXYGEN, NITROGEN, SULFUR, SELENIUM OR TELLURIUM
- C07F7/00—Compounds containing elements of Groups 4 or 14 of the Periodic Table
- C07F7/02—Silicon compounds
- C07F7/08—Compounds having one or more C—Si linkages
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G03—PHOTOGRAPHY; CINEMATOGRAPHY; ANALOGOUS TECHNIQUES USING WAVES OTHER THAN OPTICAL WAVES; ELECTROGRAPHY; HOLOGRAPHY
- G03C—PHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIALS FOR PHOTOGRAPHIC PURPOSES; PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES, e.g. CINE, X-RAY, COLOUR, STEREO-PHOTOGRAPHIC PROCESSES; AUXILIARY PROCESSES IN PHOTOGRAPHY
- G03C8/00—Diffusion transfer processes or agents therefor; Photosensitive materials for such processes
- G03C8/24—Photosensitive materials characterised by the image-receiving section
Definitions
- This disclosure relates to ionic compounds, compositions, functional materials, silver halide photographic materials, and diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic materials.
- Photosensitive materials generally consist of an electrically insulating support and a photographic emulsion layer. Therefore, electrostatic charges are likely to accumulate during the manufacturing process and use of the materials due to contact with the surfaces of similar or different materials, friction from peeling, and other factors. If electrostatic charges accumulate before development, the photosensitive layer is exposed to light due to the discharge of these charges, resulting in static fogging after development. The accumulated electrostatic charges can also cause problems such as dust adhesion to the photosensitive material.
- Conventional silicon compounds include, for example, the silicon compounds described in Non-Patent Document 1, Non-Patent Document 2, and Patent Document 1.
- Non-patent document 1 Langmuir 2019, 35, 9785-9793
- Non-patent document 2 Phys. Chem. Chem. Phys., 2017, 19, 23869-23877
- Patent Document 1 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-25420
- the problem to be solved by the present disclosure is to provide a novel ionic compound.
- Another problem to be solved by the present disclosure is to provide a composition, a functional material, a silver halide photographic light-sensitive material, or a diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material, each containing the ionic compound.
- Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
- L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
- L A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group;
- b represents 1 or 2;
- R B represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group;
- L B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and multiple L Bs may be the same or different;
- Lc 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and multiple Lc 1s may be the same or different;
- Lc2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- composition comprising an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1 and a binder.
- a functional material having a support and a layer on the support, the layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
- a silver halide photographic material having a support and a layer on the support, the layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
- a diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material having a support and a layer on the support containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
- a novel ionic compound can be provided. Furthermore, according to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a composition, a functional material, a silver halide photographic light-sensitive material, or a diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material, each containing the ionic compound.
- the present disclosure will be described in detail below. The following description of the components may be based on representative embodiments of the present disclosure, but the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments.
- the use of "to" to indicate a range of values means that the values before and after it are included as the lower and upper limits.
- the upper or lower limit value described in one numerical range may be replaced with the upper or lower limit value of another numerical range described in stages.
- the upper or lower limit value of that numerical range may be replaced with a value shown in the examples.
- alkyl group encompasses not only alkyl groups without a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also alkyl groups with a substituent (substituted alkyl groups).
- (meth)acrylic is a term used as a concept that includes both acrylic and methacrylic
- (meth)acryloyl is a term used as a concept that includes both acryloyl and methacryloyl.
- step in this specification includes not only an independent step but also a step that cannot be clearly distinguished from other steps, as long as the intended purpose of the step is achieved.
- mass % and “weight %” are synonymous, and “parts by mass” and “parts by weight” are synonymous.
- a combination of two or more preferred aspects is a more preferred aspect.
- the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure are values measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) unless otherwise specified.
- the GPC measurement was performed using an HLC (registered trademark)-8020GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as the measuring device, three TSKgel (registered trademark) Super Multipore HZ-H columns (4.6 mm ID x 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as the columns, and THF (tetrahydrofuran) as the eluent.
- the measurement conditions were a sample concentration of 0.45% by mass, a flow rate of 0.35 ml/min, a sample injection amount of 10 ⁇ L, and a measurement temperature of 40°C, and the measurement was performed using a refractive index (RI) detector.
- RI refractive index
- the calibration curve is prepared from eight samples of "Standard Sample TSK Standard, Polystyrene” from Tosoh Corporation: "F-40", “F-20”, “F-4", “F-1", “A-5000”, “A-2500”, “A-1000”, and "n-propylbenzene”.
- total solid content refers to the total mass of the components excluding the solvent from the entire composition.
- solid content refers to the components excluding the solvent, and may be, for example, solid or liquid at 25°C. The present disclosure will be described in detail below.
- the ionic compound according to the present disclosure is an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
- the ionic compound according to the present disclosure is a novel compound having a specific branched structure represented by the above formula 1 and an anionic structure having a sulfonate group. Furthermore, when the ionic compound according to the present disclosure is used for forming a film or layer, the coated surface condition is also excellent.
- w is preferably an integer of 1 to 8, more preferably an integer of 1 to 4, even more preferably 1 or 2, and particularly preferably 1, from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
- x in formula 1 is preferably an integer of 2 to 8, more preferably an integer of 2 to 4, even more preferably 2 or 3, and particularly preferably 2.
- the number of Si atoms in Sil 1 in Formula 1 is preferably an integer of 3 to 20, more preferably an integer of 3 to 12, still more preferably an integer of 3 to 10, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 7, from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
- the above Sil 1 is preferably bonded to L 1 via a Si atom.
- the substituent on the Si atom in the above Sil 1 is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant activity, it is preferably a hydrocarbon group or an alkoxy group other than a silyl group or a siloxy group, and more preferably a hydrocarbon group.
- the hydrocarbon group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (also referred to as "number of carbon atoms”), more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, still more preferably a t-butyl group or a methyl group, and particularly preferably a methyl group.
- a plurality of Sil 1 's are the same group.
- the above Sil 1 is preferably a group represented by any one of the following formulae Si-1 to Si-4, and more preferably a group represented by the following formulae Si-3 or Si-4.
- the hydrocarbon group for R 1 to R 4 , R 4a , and R 4b is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, still more preferably a t-butyl group or a methyl group, and particularly preferably a methyl group.
- the plurality of R 1 to R 4 are the same group.
- a plurality of R 4a or R 4b are present, they are preferably the same group.
- y is preferably an integer of 2 to 50, more preferably an integer of 2 to 20, even more preferably an integer of 2 to 10, and particularly preferably 2.
- z in formula Si-3 is preferably 2.
- p is preferably 1 or 2 from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
- q is preferably 1 or 2 from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
- L1 in Formula 1 is preferably an alkylene group or a group in which an alkylene group is bonded to a polyalkyleneoxy group, more preferably an alkylene group or a group in which an alkylene group is bonded to a polyethyleneoxy group, and particularly preferably an alkylene group.
- the alkylene group is more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, even more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
- the number of carbon atoms in R in Formula 1 is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 3 to 15, even more preferably 4 to 10, and particularly preferably 4 to 6, from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
- R in Formula 1 is preferably a group having an oxygen atom, more preferably a group having at least one bond selected from the group consisting of an ester bond and an ether bond, still more preferably a group having two or more of at least one bond selected from the group consisting of an ester bond and an ether bond, and particularly preferably a group having 2 to 12 of at least one bond selected from the group consisting of an ester bond and an ether bond.
- R in formula 1 is preferably a group shown below.
- # represents the bonding position to L1
- ## represents the bonding position to SO 3 — .
- the anion structure represented by the above formula 1 is preferably a structure represented by any of the following formulas a-1, a-2, or a-3, more preferably a structure represented by the following formula a-1 or a-2, and particularly preferably a structure represented by the following formula a-1.
- Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
- L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
- L A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group;
- b represents 1 or 2;
- R B represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group;
- L B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and multiple L Bs may be the same or different;
- Lc 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and multiple Lc 1s may be the same or different;
- Lc2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
- Sil 1 and L 1 in formulae a-1 to a-3 have the same meanings as Sil 1 and L 1 in formula 1, respectively, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
- L 1 A in formula a-1 is preferably a single bond or an alkylene group, more preferably a single bond or a methylene group, and particularly preferably a single bond.
- b is preferably 1 from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
- R 1 B is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
- L 1 B each independently represents preferably a single bond or an alkylene group, more preferably a single bond or a methylene group.
- each L c1 is preferably independently a single bond or an alkylene group, and more preferably a single bond.
- L c2 in formula a-3 is preferably a single bond or an alkylene group, more preferably a single bond.
- the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure have a counter cation.
- the counter cation may be either a metal cation or an organic cation such as ammonium, but is preferably a metal cation, more preferably a divalent or monovalent metal cation, still more preferably a monovalent metal cation, and particularly preferably Na + or K + .
- the counter cation is preferably an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth metal ion, Al 3+ , Fe 2+ , Fe 3+ or a primary to quaternary ammonium cation, more preferably an alkali metal ion or an alkaline earth metal ion, and particularly preferably an alkali metal ion.
- alkali metals include lithium (Li), sodium (Na), potassium (K), and cesium (Cs).
- alkaline earth metals include calcium (Ca), strontium (Sr), and barium (Ba).
- the ionic compound according to the present disclosure is preferably a compound represented by Formula 2.
- M 1 in formula 2 is preferably a monovalent to trivalent metal cation or a primary to quaternary ammonium cation, more preferably a divalent or monovalent metal cation, even more preferably a monovalent metal cation, and particularly preferably Na + or K + .
- n is preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 1.
- anion structure represented by formula 1 examples include the following A1-1 to A1-14, A2-1 to A2-8, A3-1, A3-2, and A4-1, where Me represents a methyl group.
- Suitable specific examples of ionic compounds according to the present disclosure include compounds having any of the anionic structures A1-1 to A1-14, A2-1 to A2-8, A3-1, A3-2, and A4-1 below, and Na + , K + , Cs + , Mg 2+ , Fe 3+ , or tetramethylammonium as a counter cation.
- the sodium salt of A1-1 may be referred to as A1-1Na.
- the ionic compound according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited in its use, but can be suitably used as a leveling agent or surfactant. Furthermore, the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure can be suitably used in known applications that use leveling agents or surfactants. Furthermore, the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure can be suitably used for film formation. In addition, the ionic compound according to the present disclosure can be suitably used in photosensitive materials, surface modifiers, compositions for forming protective layers, compositions for forming conductive layers, compositions for forming undercoat layers, pressure-responsive materials, heat-responsive materials, microcapsules, microgels, and the like. In particular, the ionic compound according to the present disclosure can be suitably used in silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials and diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials.
- composition includes an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1 (ionic compound according to the present disclosure) and a binder.
- composition according to the present disclosure may contain one type of ionic compound according to the present disclosure alone, or may contain two or more types of ionic compounds according to the present disclosure.
- the content of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure in the composition according to the present disclosure may be selected appropriately depending on the application, but is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 20% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, relative to the total solid content of the composition.
- the composition according to the present disclosure includes a binder.
- the binder is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the application. Known binder polymers and known monomers (polymerizable compounds) can be used.
- Binder polymers include, for example, epoxy resin, diallyl phthalate resin, silicone resin, phenolic resin, unsaturated polyester resin, polyimide resin, polyurethane resin, melamine resin, urea resin, ionomer resin, ethylene ethyl acrylate resin, acrylonitrile acrylate styrene copolymer resin, acrylonitrile styrene resin, acrylonitrile chlorinated polyethylene styrene copolymer resin, ethylene vinyl acetate resin, ethylene vinyl alcohol copolymer resin, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene copolymer resin, vinyl chloride resin, chlorinated polyethylene resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, cellulose acetate resin, fluororesin, polyoxymethylene resin, polyamide resin, poly Examples of such resins include arylate resins, thermoplastic polyurethane elastomers, polyether ether ketone resins, polyether sulfone
- Examples of the polymerizable compound (monomer) include (meth)acrylic monomers, epoxy monomers, oxetanyl monomers, and vinyl monomers.
- the (meth)acrylic monomer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known (meth)acrylate compounds, (meth)acrylamide compounds, (meth)acrylic acid, and (meth)acrylonitrile.
- alkyl (meth)acrylates such as methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, n-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, t-butyl (meth)acrylate, hexyl (meth)acrylate, and ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate; hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, hydroxypentyl (meth)acrylate, and hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate; dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, diethylamino Alkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylates such as eth, die
- epoxy group-containing monomers that are epoxy-based monomers include bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol F type epoxy resins, brominated bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol S type epoxy resins, diphenyl ether type epoxy resins, hydroquinone type epoxy resins, naphthalene type epoxy resins, biphenyl type epoxy resins, fluorene type epoxy resins, phenol novolac type epoxy resins, orthocresol novolac type epoxy resins, trishydroxyphenylmethane type epoxy resins, trifunctional type epoxy resins, tetraphenylolethane type epoxy resins, dicyclopentadiene phenol type epoxy resins, hydrogenated bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol A nucleus-containing polyol type epoxy resins, polypropylene glycol type epoxy resins, glycidyl ester type epoxy resins, glycidyl amine type epoxy resins, glyoxal type epoxy resins, alicyclic type epoxy resins,
- the composition according to the present disclosure may contain one type of binder alone, or may contain two or more types of binders.
- the content of the binder in the composition according to the present disclosure may be appropriately selected depending on the application, but is preferably 1% by mass to 99% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 90% by mass, and particularly preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, relative to the total solid content of the composition.
- the binder should be contained in a proportion sufficient to form the desired functional film.
- the binder content is preferably 0.5% by mass to 98% by mass, more preferably 2% by mass to 60% by mass, and may be 2% by mass to 50% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
- the composition according to the present disclosure may also include a polymerization initiator.
- a polymerization initiator when the polymerizable compound is contained, it is preferable to contain a polymerization initiator.
- the polymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator and a thermal polymerization initiator.
- the photopolymerization initiator include a photoradical polymerization initiator and a photocationic polymerization initiator.
- Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, ⁇ -hydroxyketone compounds, and ⁇ -aminoketone compounds.
- Examples of the thermal polymerization initiator include diazo compounds, peroxides, and onium salt compounds.
- the composition according to the present disclosure may contain one type of polymerization initiator alone, or may contain two or more types of polymerization initiators.
- the content of the polymerization initiator in the composition according to the present disclosure may be appropriately selected depending on the application, but is preferably 0.1% by mass to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.5% by mass to 25% by mass, and particularly preferably 1% by mass to 20% by mass, relative to the total solid content of the composition.
- compositions according to the present disclosure may also include a curing agent.
- curing agents for resins having hydroxyl groups include polyisocyanates, partial condensates and polymers of isocyanate compounds, adducts with polyhydric alcohols, low-molecular-weight polyester coatings, blocked polyisocyanate compounds in which the isocyanate group is blocked with a blocking agent such as phenol, melamine resins, urea resins, polybasic acids or their anhydrides, etc.
- curing agents for resins having epoxy groups include aliphatic polyamines, aromatic polyamines, polyamidoamines, modified polyamines, polymercaptans, acid anhydrides, phenol resols, phenol novolacs, etc.
- the composition according to the present disclosure may contain a solvent from the viewpoint of coatability and the like.
- the solvent include water, organic solvents, and mixed solvents of water and organic solvents.
- the organic solvent can be appropriately selected depending on the use or purpose of the liquid composition, etc.
- examples of the organic solvent include esters, ethers, ketones, aromatic hydrocarbons, and alcohols.
- esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, alkyl oxyacetate solvents (e.g., methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (specifically, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc.)), alkyl 3-oxypropionate solvents (e.g., methyl 3-oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate (specifically, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxy
- Examples include methyl propionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate (specifically, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate, etc.), 2-oxy-2-methylpropionic acid alkyl ester solvents (methyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate (specifically, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.)), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate, cyclohexyl acetate, and 1-methyl
- ethers include diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (also referred to as PEGMEA), diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (also referred to as ethyl carbitol acetate), diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate (also referred to as butyl carbitol acetate), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, and propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate.
- ketones include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone
- alcohols include monohydric alcohols (e.g., methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, isobutanol, sec-butanol, t-butanol, pentanol, hexanol, cyclohexanol, and benzyl alcohol), polyhydric alcohols (e.g., ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, butylene glycol, hexanediol, pentanediol, glycerin, hexanetriol, and thiodiglycol), and glycol derivatives (e.g., ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glyco
- the solvent from the viewpoint of further exerting leveling properties or surfactant effects, at least one solvent selected from the group consisting of water and water-soluble solvents is preferred.
- the water-soluble solvent include, in addition to the substances exemplified as the alcohols above, amines (e.g., ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, N-methyldiethanolamine, N-ethyldiethanolamine, morpholine, N-ethylmorpholine, ethylenediamine, diethylenetriamine, triethylenetetramine, polyethyleneimine, tetramethylpropylenediamine), other polar solvents (e.g., formamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, sulfolane, 2-pyrrolidone, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, 2-oxazolidone, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazo
- composition according to the present disclosure may contain one solvent alone, or two or more solvents.
- the content of the solvent in the composition according to the present disclosure may be appropriately selected depending on the intended use.
- composition according to the present disclosure may contain known additives depending on the intended use.
- additives include known additives such as colorants, surfactants other than the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure, leveling agents other than the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure, fillers, anti-fading agents, emulsion stabilizers, penetration enhancers, ultraviolet absorbers, preservatives, antifungal agents, pH adjusters, viscosity adjusters, dispersion stabilizers, rust inhibitors, and chelating agents.
- the functional material according to the present disclosure has a support and a layer on the support, the layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1 (the ionic compound according to the present disclosure):
- the functional material according to the present disclosure may contain one type of ionic compound according to the present disclosure alone, or may contain two or more types of ionic compounds according to the present disclosure.
- the layer containing the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may be a single layer or multiple layers. When the functional material is composed of multiple layers, these layers may be formed sequentially or simultaneously by multilayer coating or the like.
- the content of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure in the layer of the functional material according to the present disclosure may be selected appropriately depending on the application, but is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 20% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, relative to the total mass of the layer.
- the layer may contain known components depending on the intended use.
- the layer may contain the above-mentioned binder or the above-mentioned polymerization initiator, or may contain a colorant, a surfactant other than the ionic compound according to the present disclosure, a leveling agent other than the ionic compound according to the present disclosure, a filler, an anti-fading agent, an emulsion stabilizer, a penetration enhancer, an ultraviolet absorber, an antiseptic, an antifungal agent, a pH adjuster, a viscosity adjuster, a dispersion stabilizer, a rust inhibitor, a chelating agent, or the like.
- the composition may contain various components contained in silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials or diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials, which will be described later.
- the average thickness of the layer is not particularly limited and may be selected depending on the application, but is preferably 0.01 ⁇ m to 1 mm, and more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m to 200 ⁇ m.
- the average thickness is measured as follows. The sample is cut in a plane parallel to the thickness direction, and the thickness is measured at five or more points on the cross section, and the average value of these measurements is taken as the average thickness.
- the ionic compound according to the present disclosure can particularly exhibit the effects of preventing cissing and improving surface condition when the outermost layer of the functional material contains a matting agent having a thickness greater than the average thickness of the layer.
- the ratio (D/d) of the particle size D of the matting agent to the average thickness d is preferably 1.5 to 60, more preferably 5 to 50, and even more preferably 10 to 50.
- the content of the matting agent varies depending on the desired surface shape, but is preferably 10 mg/m 2 to 800 mg/m 2 , more preferably 20 mg/m 2 to 600 mg/m 2 , and even more preferably 30 mg/m 2 to 500 mg/m 2.
- the binder is preferably a water-soluble colloid, such as gelatin, carboxymethyl cellulose, or polyvinyl alcohol.
- the functional material according to the present disclosure can use the silicone surfactants shown below.
- the silicone surfactant refers to a surfactant having a polysiloxane structure, and may have a functional group such as a hydrophilic group, a hydrophilic polymer chain, or the like, at a side chain, end, or the like, such as a polyether-modified group, a polyether-alkyl co-modified group, a polyglycerin-modified group, or a polyglycerin-alkyl co-modified group. More specifically, it is preferable to include a silicone surfactant represented by the following general formula (1):
- m is an integer of 1 or more and 200 or less, preferably an integer of 2 or more and 100 or less, and more preferably an integer of 5 or more and 50 or less
- n is an integer of 1 or more and 100 or less, preferably an integer of 2 or more and 80 or less, and more preferably an integer of 4 or more and 50 or less.
- a is an integer of 0 or more and 40 or less, preferably an integer of 35 or less, more preferably an integer of 25 or less, and even more preferably an integer of 15 or less
- b is an integer of 0 or more and 40 or less, preferably an integer of 2 or more and 35 or less, more preferably an integer of 4 or more and 25 or less, and even more preferably an integer of 6 or more and 20 or less.
- (a+b) is preferably 1 or more and 50 or less, more preferably 2 or more and 40 or less, and even more preferably 5 or more and 30 or less.
- Each of the structural units m, n, a, and b may be a block copolymer or a random copolymer.
- the ratio of m to n (m/n) is preferably 1.5 or more and 20 or less, more preferably 1.8 or more and 15 or less, and even more preferably 2.0 or more and 10 or less.
- the ratio (m/n) is calculated from the ratio of modified Si element to unmodified Si element by proton nuclear magnetic resonance ( 1 H-NMR) spectroscopy.
- the ratio [(a+b)/(m/n)] is preferably 1.6 or more and 6.3 or less, more preferably 1.7 or more and 5.5 or less, and even more preferably 1.8 or more and 5.0 or less.
- R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, even more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a methyl group.
- polyether-modified silicone surfactants represented by general formula (1) include PEG-3 dimethicone, PEG-9 dimethicone, PEG-9PEG-9 dimethicone, PEG-9 methyl ether dimethicone, PEG-10 dimethicone, PEG-11 methyl ether dimethicone, PEG/PPG-20/22 butyl ether dimethicone, PEG-32 methyl ether dimethicone, PEG-9 polydimethylsiloxyethyl dimethicone, lauryl PEG-9 polydimethylsiloxyethyl dimethicone, dimethicone/(PEG-10/15) crosspolymer, and (PEG-15/lauryl polydimethylsiloxyethyl dimethicone) crosspolymer.
- silicone surfactants include, for example, BYK-302, BYK-306, BYK-307, BYK-326, BYK-333, BYK-341, BYK-345, BYK-346, BYK-347, BYK-348, BYK-379, BYK-3451, BYK-3565, BYK-UV3530 (all trade names, manufactured by BYK Japan Co., Ltd.), KF-351A, KF-352A, KF -353, KF-354L, KF-355A, KF-615A, KF-618, KF-642, KF-643, KF-945, KF-640, KF-642, KF-643, KF-6020, X-22- 4515, KF-6011, KF-6012, KF-6013, KF-6015, KF-6017, KF-6028, KF-6038, KF-6043, KP-101, KP-104, KP-105, KP
- the functional material according to the present disclosure has a support.
- the support include a metal plate, a glass plate, a resin plate, a resin film, a paper support, a metal foil, etc.
- the support may also be a laminate having various functional layers.
- the support may also be surface-treated.
- the average thickness of the support is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 0.1 ⁇ m to 10 cm, and more preferably from 1 ⁇ m to 1 mm.
- the functional material according to the present disclosure may have other layers between the support and the above layer, or on the side of the support opposite to the side having the above layer, depending on the application.
- the other layers are not particularly limited, and include known layers for known applications.
- the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure has a support and a layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1 (ionic compound according to the present disclosure).
- the silver halide photographic material is preferably a material that is sensitive to light, laser, or X-ray irradiation, and is suitably selected from, for example, black-and-white reversal film, black-and-white negative film, color reversal film, color negative film, film in which a photosensitive photographic component has been digitally scanned, black-and-white reversal paper, black-and-white paper, color paper, color reversal paper, paper in which a photosensitive photographic component has been exposed by laser irradiation from a digital database, and photosensitive material that has been developed by heat.
- Preferred embodiments of the ionic compound in the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure are the same as the preferred embodiments of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure described above.
- the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may contain one type of ionic compound according to the present disclosure alone, or two or more types.
- the content of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure in the layer of the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may be appropriately selected depending on the application, but is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 20% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, relative to the total mass of the layer.
- the layer may be any layer constituting the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material described below. When a layer is formed by coating, it is preferably the outermost layer during coating. When multiple layers are laminated sequentially, it is preferably used as the outermost layer during each sequential coating. Furthermore, in the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, the layer containing the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may be one layer or two or more layers. The above layer may contain various components contained in silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials, which will be described later.
- the aqueous coating composition containing the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may consist solely of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure and water, or may contain other components as appropriate depending on the purpose.
- the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may be used alone or in combination of two or more. Additionally, a surfactant other than the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may be used together with the ionic compound according to the present disclosure.
- Usable surfactants include various anionic, cationic, and nonionic surfactants, and may be polymeric surfactants or silicone surfactants other than the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure. Among these, anionic or nonionic surfactants are more preferred. Specific examples include compounds that can be used in the functional materials according to the present disclosure.
- nonionic surfactants having an alkylene oxide group are preferred because they cause less sensitivity loss during storage of the photosensitive material and, particularly, cause less mordanting inhibition when used in diffusion transfer silver halide photographic photosensitive materials.
- surfactants that can be used in combination include those described in JP-A-62-215272 (pp. 649-706), Research Disclosure (RD) Item 17643, pp. 26-27 (December 1978), RD Item 18716, p. 650 (November 1979), and RD 307105, p. 875-876 (November 1989).
- a typical example of a material that may be contained in the aqueous coating composition is a polymer compound.
- the polymer compound may be a polymer that is soluble in a water-soluble solvent (a soluble polymer) or an aqueous dispersion of a polymer (a so-called polymer latex).
- the soluble polymer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include gelatin, polyvinyl alcohol, casein, agar, gum arabic, hydroxyethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, and carboxymethyl cellulose.
- polymer latex examples include homopolymers or copolymers of various vinyl monomers (for example, acrylate derivatives, methacrylate derivatives, acrylamide derivatives, methacrylamide derivatives, styrene derivatives, conjugated diene derivatives, N-vinyl compounds, O-vinyl compounds, vinyl nitrile, and other vinyl compounds (for example, ethylene and vinylidene chloride)), and dispersions of condensation polymers (for example, polyesters, polyurethanes, polycarbonates, and polyamides).
- this type of polymer compound can be found, for example, in JP-A-62-215272 (pp. 707-763), Research Disclosure (RD) Item 17643, p. 651 (December 1978), RD Item 18716, p. 650 (November 1979), and RD Item 307105, p. 873-874 (November 1989).
- the solvent in the aqueous coating composition may be water alone, or a mixed solvent of water and an organic solvent other than water (e.g., methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, n-butanol, methyl cellosolve, dimethylformamide, acetone, ethyl acetate, etc.).
- the proportion of water in the solvent in the aqueous coating composition is preferably 50% by mass or more.
- the above-mentioned aqueous coating composition may contain various compounds depending on the layer of the photographic material to be used, and these may be dissolved or dispersed in the medium. Examples of these include various couplers, ultraviolet absorbers, color mixing inhibitors, static inhibitors, scavengers, antifoggants, film hardeners, dyes, and antifungal agents. Furthermore, to obtain effective antistatic properties and coating uniformity when used in photographic materials, it is preferable to use it in the uppermost hydrophilic colloid layer.
- the coating composition for the layer may contain, in addition to the hydrophilic colloid (e.g., gelatin) and the ionic compound according to the present disclosure, other surfactants, matting agents, slipping agents, colloidal silica, plasticizers, etc.
- hydrophilic colloid e.g., gelatin
- ionic compound according to the present disclosure other surfactants, matting agents, slipping agents, colloidal silica, plasticizers, etc.
- the amount of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure used there are no particular restrictions on the amount of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure used, and the amount can be freely changed depending on the structure and use of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure, the type and amount of compounds contained in the aqueous composition, the composition of the solvent, etc.
- the concentration in the coating solution is preferably 0.003% to 0.5% by mass, and preferably 0.03% to 10% by mass relative to the gelatin solids content.
- the composition for producing that layer can contain an ionic compound according to the present disclosure and a hydrophobic binder component together with an organic solvent.
- the preferred embodiments are the same as those for the layer containing the ionic compound according to the present disclosure described above.
- the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may have at least one light-sensitive layer provided on a support.
- a typical example is a silver halide photographic material having at least one light-sensitive layer composed of multiple silver halide emulsion layers with substantially the same color sensitivity but different photosensitivities on a support.
- the light-sensitive layer is a unit light-sensitive layer sensitive to either blue, green, or red light.
- the unit light-sensitive layers are generally arranged in the following order from the support side: red-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer, and blue-sensitive layer. However, depending on the purpose, the above arrangement order may be reversed, or a different light-sensitive layer may be sandwiched between layers of the same color sensitivity.
- Light-insensitive layers may be arranged between the above silver halide light-sensitive layers, as well as in the top and bottom layers. These may contain couplers, DIR compounds, color-mixing inhibitors, etc., as described below.
- the plurality of silver halide emulsion layers constituting each unit photosensitive layer are preferably arranged in two layers, a high-sensitivity emulsion layer and a low-sensitivity emulsion layer, in order of decreasing sensitivity toward the support, as described in DE 1,121,470 or GB 923,045.
- a low-sensitivity emulsion layer may be arranged farther from the support and a high-sensitivity emulsion layer closer to the support, as described in JP-A Nos. 57-112751, 62-200350, 62-206541 and 62-206543.
- the layers may be arranged in the following order: low-sensitivity blue-sensitive layer (BL)/high-sensitivity blue-sensitive layer (BH)/high-sensitivity green-sensitive layer (GH)/low-sensitivity green-sensitive layer (GL)/high-sensitivity red-sensitive layer (RH)/low-sensitivity red-sensitive layer (RL), or in the order BH/BL/GL/GH/RH/RL, or BH/BL/GH/GL/RL/RH.
- BL low-sensitivity blue-sensitive layer
- BH high-sensitivity blue-sensitive layer
- GH high-sensitivity green-sensitive layer
- GL low-sensitivity red-sensitive layer
- RH high-sensitivity red-sensitive layer
- RL low-sensitivity red-sensitive layer
- the layers can be arranged in the order of blue-sensitive layer/GH/RH/GL/RL from the side farthest from the support. Furthermore, as described in JP-A Nos. 56-25738 and 62-63936, the layers can be arranged in the order of blue-sensitive layer/GL/RL/GH/RH from the side farthest from the support.
- Another example is an arrangement composed of three layers with differing photosensitivities, with the photosensitivity decreasing sequentially toward the support, in which the upper layer is a silver halide emulsion layer with the highest photosensitivity, the middle layer is a silver halide emulsion layer with a lower photosensitivity, and the lower layer is a silver halide emulsion layer with an even lower photosensitivity than the middle layer, as described in JP-B No. 49-15495.
- the layers sensitive to the same color may be arranged in the following order from the side farthest from the support: medium-sensitivity emulsion layer, high-sensitivity emulsion layer, and low-sensitivity emulsion layer, as described in JP-A-59-202464.
- the layers may be arranged in the order of high-sensitivity emulsion layer/low-sensitivity emulsion layer/mid-sensitivity emulsion layer, or low-sensitivity emulsion layer/mid-sensitivity emulsion layer/high-sensitivity emulsion layer. Furthermore, even when there are four or more layers, the arrangement may be changed as described above. To improve color reproducibility, it is preferable to arrange a donor layer (CL) with a bilayer effect that has a different spectral sensitivity distribution from the main photosensitive layers such as BL, GL, and RL adjacent to or close to the main photosensitive layer, as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,663,271, 4,705,744, and 4,707,436, and JP-A Nos. 62-160448 and 63-89850.
- a donor layer with a bilayer effect that has a different spectral sensitivity distribution from the main photosensitive layers such as BL, GL, and RL adjacent to or close to the main photosensitive layer, as described in U.
- the preferred silver halide for use in this disclosure is silver iodobromide, silver iodochloride, or silver iodochlorobromide containing about 30 mol% or less of silver iodide. Particularly preferred is silver iodobromide or silver iodochlorobromide containing about 2 mol% to about 10 mol% of silver iodide.
- the silver halide grains in photographic emulsions may have regular crystals such as cubes, octahedrons, or tetradecahedrons; irregular crystal shapes such as spheres or plates; crystal defects such as twin planes; or a combination of these.
- the silver halide grain size may be grains of approximately 0.2 ⁇ m or less, or large grains with a projected area diameter of up to approximately 10 ⁇ m, and the emulsion may be either polydispersed or monodispersed.
- Monodisperse emulsions such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,574,628, 3,655,394, and GB 1,413,748 are also preferred.
- Tabular grains having an aspect ratio of approximately 3 or more can also be used in the present disclosure.
- a ratio of 30 or less is preferred.
- Tabular grains can be easily prepared by the methods described in Gutoff, Photographic Science and Engineering, Vol. 14, pp. 248-257 (1970); U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,434,226, 4,414,310, 4,433,048, 4,439,520, and GB 2,112,157.
- the crystal structure may be uniform, or the interior and exterior may have different halogen compositions, or may have a layered structure.
- Silver halides of different compositions may be joined by epitaxial junction, and may be joined with compounds other than silver halide, such as silver rhodanide or lead oxide.
- a mixture of grains with various crystal forms may also be used.
- the above emulsions may be of the surface latent image type, in which the latent image is formed primarily on the surface, or the internal latent image type, in which the latent image is formed inside the grains, or of the type having latent images both on the surface and inside, but they must be negative-working emulsions.
- the internal latent image types the core/shell internal latent image type emulsions described in JP-A No. 63-264740 may also be used, and the preparation method for this is described in JP-A No. 59-133542.
- the shell thickness of this emulsion varies depending on the development process, etc., but is preferably 3 nm to 40 nm, with 5 nm to 20 nm being particularly preferred.
- Silver halide emulsions are usually used after physical ripening, chemical ripening, and spectral sensitization. Additives used in these processes are described in RD Nos. 17643, 18716, and 307105, and the relevant sections are summarized in the table below.
- the silver halide photographic material according to the present disclosure can use two or more types of emulsions that differ in at least one of the following characteristics in the same layer: grain size, grain size distribution, halogen composition, grain shape, and sensitivity.
- Surface-fogged silver halide grains as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,082,553, internally fogged silver halide grains, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,626,498 and JP-A-59-214852, and colloidal silver are preferably applied to a photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer and/or a substantially light-insensitive hydrophilic colloid layer.
- Internally or surface-fogged silver halide grains refer to silver halide grains that can be developed uniformly (non-imagewise) in both unexposed and exposed areas of the photosensitive material, and their preparation methods are described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,626,498 and JP-A-59-214852.
- the silver halide forming the inner core of the internally fogged core/shell silver halide grains may have a different halogen composition.
- the silver halide used to fog the interior or surface of the grains may be any of silver chloride, silver chlorobromide, silver iodobromide, and silver chloroiodobromide.
- the average grain size of these fogged silver halide grains is preferably 0.01 ⁇ m to 0.75 ⁇ m, and more preferably 0.05 ⁇ m to 0.6 ⁇ m.
- the grain shape may be regular or a polydisperse emulsion, but monodisperse (at least 95% of the silver halide grains by mass or number have a grain size within ⁇ 40% of the average grain size) is preferred.
- Non-photosensitive particulate silver halide refers to silver halide grains that are not exposed to light during imagewise exposure to obtain a dye image and are not substantially developed during the subsequent development process; it is preferable that they are not pre-fogged.
- the particulate silver halide has a silver bromide content of 0 to 100 mol % and may contain silver chloride and/or silver iodide as needed. Preferably, it contains 0.5 to 10 mol % silver iodide.
- the particulate silver halide preferably has an average grain size (average value of the circle-equivalent diameter of the projected area) of 0.01 ⁇ m to 0.5 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.02 ⁇ m to 0.2 ⁇ m.
- Grain-shaped silver halide can be prepared in the same manner as ordinary photosensitive silver halide.
- the surfaces of the silver halide grains do not need to be optically sensitized, and spectral sensitization is also not required.
- a known stabilizer such as a triazole-based, azaindene-based, benzothiazolium-based, or mercapto-based compound, or a zinc compound.
- Colloidal silver can be incorporated into this layer containing grain-shaped silver halide particles.
- the coated silver amount of the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure is preferably 6.0 g/m 2 or less, and more preferably 4.5 g/m 2 or less.
- Photographic additives that can be used in this disclosure are also described in the RD, and the relevant sections are indicated in the table below.
- Couplers In the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, various dye-forming couplers can be used, but the following couplers are particularly preferred.
- Yellow couplers couplers represented by formula (I) or (II) in EP 502,424A; couplers represented by formula (1) or (2) in EP 513,496A (particularly Y-28 on page 18); couplers represented by formula (I) in claim 1 of EP 568,037A couplers represented by formula (I) in lines 45 to 55 of column 1 of U.S. Pat. No. 5,066,576; couplers represented by formula (I) in paragraph 0008 of JP-A No.
- Magenta couplers JP-A No. 3-39737 (L-57 (bottom right on page 11), L-68 (bottom right on page 12), L-77 (bottom right on page 13); A-4-63 (page 134), A-4-73,-75 (page 139) of EP 456,257; M-4,-6 (page 26), M-7 (page 27) of EP 486,965; M-45 (page 19) of EP 571,959A; (M-1) (page 6) of JP-A No. 5-204106; M-22 in paragraph 0237 of JP-A No. 4-362631.
- Cyan couplers CX-1, 3, 4, 5, 11, 12, 14, 15 (pages 14-16) of JP-A No. 4-204843; C-7, 10 (page 35), 34, 35 (page 37), (I-1), (I-17) (pages 42-43) of JP-A No. 4-43345; and couplers represented by formula (Ia) or (Ib) in claim 1 of JP-A No. 6-67385.
- Polymer couplers P-1 and P-5 (page 11) of JP-A No. 2-44345.
- couplers from which color-forming dyes have appropriate diffusibility those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,366,237, British Patent No. 2,125,570, European Patent No. 96,873B and German Patent No. 3,234,533 are preferred.
- Preferred couplers for correcting unwanted absorption of color-forming dyes include yellow-colored cyan couplers represented by formulae (CI), (CII), (CIII), and (CIV) described on page 5 of European Patent Application Publication No. 456,257A1 (particularly YC-86 on page 84), yellow-colored magenta couplers ExM-7 (page 202), EX-1 (page 249), and EX-7 (page 251) described in European Patent Application Publication No. 456,257A1, magenta-colored cyan couplers CC-9 (column 8) and CC-13 (column 10) described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,833,069, (2) (column 8) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,837,136, and colorless masking couplers represented by formula (A) in claim 1 of WO 92/11575 (particularly the exemplified compounds on pages 36 to 45).
- Couplers that release a photographically useful group include the following: Development inhibitor-releasing compounds: Compounds represented by formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV) described on page 11 of European Patent Application Publication No. 378,236A1 (particularly T-101 (page 30), T-104 (page 31), T-113 (page 36), T-131 (page 45), T-144 (page 51), and T-158 (page 58)), compounds represented by formula (I) described on page 7 of European Patent Application Publication No. 436,938A2 (particularly D-49 (page 51)), and compounds represented by formula (II) described on page 11 of European Patent Application Publication No. 436,938A2 (particularly D-49 (page 51)).
- Dispersion medium of oil-soluble organic compound P-3, 5, 16, 19, 25, 30, 42, 49, 54, 55, 66, 81, 85, 86, 93 (pages 140-144) of JP-A-62-215272; Impregnation latex of oil-soluble organic compound: latex described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,199,363; Oxidized developer scavenger: compounds represented by formula (I) in column 2, lines 54-62 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,978,606 (particularly I-, (1), (2), (6), (12) (columns 4-5), U.S. Pat. No. Formulae in columns 2, lines 5 to 10 of European Patent Application Publication No.
- stain inhibitors formulae (I) to (III) in pages 4, lines 30 to 33 of European Patent Application Publication No. 298321A, particularly I-47, 72, III-1, 27 (pages 24 to 48); discoloration inhibitors: A-6, 7, 20, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 30, 37, 40, 42, 48, 63, 90, 92, 94, 164 (pages 69 to 118) of European Patent Application Publication No. 298321A; No. 2,444, columns 25 to 38, II-1 to III-23, especially III-10; European Patent Application Publication No. 471347A, pages 8 to 12, I-1 to III-4, especially II-2; U.S. Patent Application Publication No.
- UV absorbers compounds (18b) to (18r) and 101 to 427 represented by formula (1) in JP 46-3335 A (pages 6 to 9), compounds (3) to (66) represented by formula (I) in EP 520938 A (pages 10 to 44) and compounds HBT-1 to 10 represented by formula (III) in EP 521823 A (columns 2 to 9), and compounds (1) to (31) represented by formula (1) in EP 521823 A (columns 2 to 9).
- This disclosure can be applied to various color photosensitive materials such as black-and-white photographic paper, black-and-white negative film, X-ray film, color negative film for general use or cinema, color reversal film for slides or television, color paper, color positive film, and color reversal paper. It is also suitable for use in the lens-fitted film units described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-32615 and Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 3-39784.
- Suitable supports that can be used in the present disclosure are described, for example, in the above-mentioned RD. No. 17643, page 28; RD. No. 18716, page 647 (right column) to page 648 (left column); and RD. No. 307105, page 879.
- the total thickness of all hydrophilic colloid layers on the emulsion layer side is preferably 28 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 23 ⁇ m or less, even more preferably 18 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 16 ⁇ m or less.
- the film swelling rate T 1/2 is preferably 30 seconds or less, more preferably 20 seconds or less. T 1/2 is defined as the time required for the film thickness to reach half of the saturated film thickness, which is 90% of the maximum swollen film thickness achieved when processed in a color developer at 30°C for 3 minutes and 15 seconds.
- the film thickness refers to the film thickness measured at 25°C and 55% relative humidity (for 2 days).
- T 1/2 can be measured using a swellometer (swellometer) of the type described in A. Green et al., Photogr. Sci. Eng., Vol. 19, pp. 2, 124-129.
- T1 /2 can be adjusted by adding a film hardener to gelatin as a binder or by changing the aging conditions after coating.
- the swelling ratio is preferably 150% to 400%.
- the swelling ratio is calculated from the maximum swollen film thickness under the above conditions as follows: It can be calculated using the formula: (maximum swelling film thickness - film thickness)/film thickness.
- the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure preferably has a hydrophilic colloid layer (referred to as a backing layer) with a total dry film thickness of 2 ⁇ m to 20 ⁇ m on the side opposite the emulsion layer.
- This backing layer preferably contains the above-mentioned light absorbers, filter dyes, ultraviolet absorbers, anti-static agents, film hardeners, binders, plasticizers, lubricants, coating aids, and surfactants.
- the swelling ratio of this backing layer is preferably 150% to 500%.
- the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material disclosed herein can be developed using the conventional methods described in the above-mentioned RD. No. 17643, pages 28-29, RD. No. 18716, paragraph 651, left and right columns, and RD. No. 307105, pages 880-881.
- an antistatic agent is preferably used.
- antistatic agents include polymers containing carboxylic acids and carboxylates, sulfonates, cationic polymers, ionic surfactant compounds, and ⁇ -electron conjugated conductive polymers.
- Preferred antistatic agents are at least one selected from ZnO, TiO 2 , SnO 2 , Al 2 O 3 , In 2 O 3 , SiO 2 , MgO, BaO, MoO 3 , and V 2 O 5 , and having a volume resistivity of 10 7 ⁇ cm or less, more preferably 10 5 ⁇ cm or less, and particles of crystalline metal oxides of these or composite oxides thereof (e.g., Sb, P, B, In, S, Si, and C), with a particle size of 0.001 ⁇ m to 1.0 ⁇ m, or particles of sol-like metal oxides or composite oxides thereof.
- the content of these metal oxides in the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material is preferably 5 mg/m 2 to 500 mg/m 2 , and particularly preferably 10 mg/m 2 to 350 mg/m 2 .
- the ratio of the amount of conductive crystalline oxide or composite oxide thereof to the binder is preferably 1/300 to 100/1, more preferably 1/100 to 100/5.
- ⁇ -electron conjugated conductive polymers include polythiophene compounds, polypyrrole compounds, and polyfuran compounds.
- a latex-like aqueous dispersion containing a polythiophene compound and a polymeric polyanion compound can be used.
- JP-A-2003-330145, JP-A-4244541, JP-A-2016-120650, and JP-A-8-211615 can be used.
- the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure has slipperiness.
- a slip-agent-containing layer is preferably used on both the light-sensitive layer surface and the back surface.
- the preferred slipperiness is a dynamic friction coefficient of 0.01 or more and 0.25 or less. This measurement represents the value when conveyed at 60 cm/min against a 5 mm diameter stainless steel ball (25°C, 60% RH). In this evaluation, even if the light-sensitive layer surface is substituted as the mating material, the value will be roughly the same.
- Slipping agents that can be used in the present disclosure include polyorganosiloxanes, higher fatty acid amides, higher fatty acid metal salts, and esters of higher fatty acids and higher alcohols.
- polyorganosiloxanes that can be used include polydimethylsiloxane, polydiethylsiloxane, polystyrylmethylsiloxane, and polymethylphenylsiloxane.
- the outermost layer or back layer of the emulsion layer is preferred as the additive layer. Polydimethylsiloxane or an ester with a long-chain alkyl group is particularly preferred.
- the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure preferably contains a matting agent.
- the matting agent may be added to either the emulsion side or the back side, but it is particularly preferred to add it to the outermost layer on the emulsion side.
- the particle size is preferably 0.8 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, and a narrow particle size distribution is also preferred, with 90% or more of the total number of particles preferably falling within a range of 0.9 to 1.1 times the average particle size.
- it is also preferable to simultaneously add particles of 0.8 ⁇ m or smaller. Examples include polymethyl methacrylate (0.2 ⁇ m), poly(methyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid 9/1 (molar ratio), 0.3 ⁇ m), polystyrene particles (0.25 ⁇ m), and colloidal silica (0.03 ⁇ m).
- the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may contain other known additives in each layer. Furthermore, even if the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure is not sensitive to X-ray irradiation, the constitution and components of a silver halide photographic light-sensitive material that is sensitive to X-ray irradiation, which will be described later, may be used, if necessary.
- a preferred example of a silver halide photographic material is a silver halide photographic material that is sensitive to X-ray irradiation.
- Photosensitive silver halide grains can be silver chloride, silver chlorobromide, silver bromide, silver iodobromide, or silver iodochlorobromide.
- the average iodine content of the photosensitive silver halide grains is preferably 0 mol % to 0.45 mol %. This iodine content is more preferably 0.05 mol % to 0.40 mol %, and even more preferably 0.10 mol % to 0.30 mol %.
- the "average" iodine content of the photosensitive silver halide grains refers to the average iodine content calculated from the halogen composition of each photosensitive silver halide grain.
- the halogen composition distribution within the photosensitive silver halide grains may be uniform, stepwise, or continuously varying.
- photosensitive silver halide grains having a core/shell structure may also be used.
- Grain Shape Suitable photosensitive silver halide grains include so-called halogen conversion type grains, as described in British Patent No. 635,841 and U.S. Patent No. 3,622,318.
- Halogen conversion is usually achieved by adding an aqueous halide solution having a smaller solubility product with silver than the halogen composition on the grain surface before halogen conversion.
- conversion is achieved by adding an aqueous potassium bromide and/or potassium iodide solution to silver chloride or silver chlorobromide tabular grains, or by adding an aqueous potassium iodide solution to silver bromide or silver iodobromide tabular grains.
- the concentration of these aqueous solutions added is preferably low, preferably 30% or less, and more preferably 10% or less. Furthermore, it is preferred to add the conversion halide solution at a rate of 1 mol% per minute or less per mole of silver halide before halogen conversion. Furthermore, during halogen conversion, a sensitizing dye and/or a silver halide adsorbent may be present in part or in whole, and silver halide grains such as silver bromide, silver iodobromide, or silver iodide may be added instead of the converted halogen aqueous solution. The size of these fine grains is preferably 0.2 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.1 ⁇ m or less, and particularly preferably 0.05 ⁇ m or less.
- the halogen conversion method is not limited to the above-mentioned methods, and can be used in combination as appropriate depending on the purpose.
- Chemical Sensitization Methods those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 10, upper right column, line 13 to lower left column, line 16, JP-A Nos. 5-313282 and 6-110144 can be used.
- known methods such as sulfur sensitization, selenium sensitization, reduction sensitization, and gold sensitization in the presence of a silver halide adsorbent can be used, and these methods can be used alone or in combination.
- gold sensitization is a typical example, which uses gold compounds, mainly gold complex salts.
- Complex salts of noble metals other than gold, such as platinum, palladium, and iridium, may also be used. Specific examples are described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,448,060 and British Patent No. 618,061.
- sulfur sensitizer in addition to the sulfur compounds contained in gelatin, various sulfur compounds such as thiosulfates, thioureas, thiazoles, rhodanines, etc. can be used. Specific examples are described in U.S. Patent Nos. 1,574,944, 2,278,947, 2,410,689, 2,728,668, 5,501,313, and 3,656,955.
- Selenium sensitizers are described in JP-A-6-110144. The combined use of sulfur sensitization with thiosulfate, selenium sensitization, and gold sensitization is useful. As reduction sensitizers, stannous salts, amines, formamine disulfide acid, silane compounds, etc. can be used.
- Antifoggants and stabilizers examples include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 10, lower left column, line 17 to page 11, upper left column, line 7, and page 3, lower left column, line 2 to page 4, lower left column.
- azoles e.g., benzothiazolium salts, etroimidazoles, nitrobenzimidazoles, chlorobenzimidazoles, chromobenzimidazoles, nitroindazoles, benzotriazoles, aminotriazoles, etc.
- mercapto compounds e.g., mercaptothiazoles, mercaptobenzimidazoles, mercaptothiadiazoles, mercaptotetrazoles, mercaptopyrimidazoles, mercaptotriazines, etc.
- thioketo compounds such as oxadrinethione; azaindenes (e.g., triazaindenes, tetraazaindenes (especially 4-hydroxy-substituted (1,3,3a,7)tetraazaindenes), pentaazaindenes, etc.); and compounds known as antifogging agents or stabilizers, such as benz
- nitrones and derivatives thereof described in JP-A Nos. 60-76743 and 60-87322, mercapto compounds described in JP-A No. 60-80839, heterocyclic compounds described in JP-A No. 57-164735, and complex salts of heterocyclic compounds and acids are preferably used.
- purines or nucleic acids, or polymeric compounds described in JP-B No. 61-36213 and JP-A No. 59-90844, etc. can also be used.
- azaindenes, purines, and nucleic acids are particularly preferred.
- the amount of these compounds added is preferably 0.5 to 5.0 millimoles, and more preferably 0.5 to 3.0 millimoles, per mole of silver halide.
- Color Tone Improver examples include those described in JP-A-62-276539, page 2, lower left column, line 7 to page 10, lower left column, line 20, and JP-A-3-94249, page 6, lower left column, line 15 to page 11, upper right column, line 19.
- the covering power of the silver halide photographic emulsion layer is set to 60 or more, and the silver halide photographic emulsion layer and/or other layers can contain a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength between 520 nm and 560 nm and a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength between 570 nm and 700 nm so that the increase in optical density due to the contained dyes in the transmission density of the unexposed area after development processing is 0.03 or less.
- emulsions for making the covering power of the silver halide photographic emulsion layer 60 or more include tabular emulsions, grain emulsions, etc.
- the silver halide photographic emulsion is made up of tabular silver halide grains having a grain thickness of 0.4 ⁇ m or less, or when a mixed emulsion of a high iodine surface photosensitive emulsion and an emulsion made up of grains with internal fogging is used, the effect of improving color tone is significant.
- Dyes that can be used to improve color tone include a combination of a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength preferably between 520 nm and 560 nm, more preferably between 530 nm and 555 nm, and a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength preferably between 570 nm and 700 nm, more preferably between 580 nm and 650 nm.
- the maximum absorption wavelength means the maximum absorption wavelength when the dye is present in a photosensitive material.
- the dye may be selected from anthraquinone dyes, azo dyes, azomethine dyes, indoaniline dyes, oxonol dyes, carbocyanine dyes, styryl dyes, triphenylmethane dyes, etc., and may have a predetermined maximum wavelength. Taking into consideration the stability to development processing, light fastness, and effects on photographic performance such as desensitization, fogging, and staining, preferred dyes are used from anthraquinone dyes, azo dyes, azomethine dyes, and indoaniline dyes. Preferred compounds are described in JP-A No.
- spectral sensitizing dyes include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 4, line 4 in the lower right column to page 8, lower right column. Specifically, cyanine dyes, merocyanine dyes, complex cyanine dyes, complex merocyanine dyes, holopolar cyanine dyes, styryl dyes, hemicyanine dyes, oxonol dyes, hemioxonol dyes, and the like can be used. Sensitizing dyes are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos.
- the amount of sensitizing dye added is preferably 0.5 mmol or more and less than 4 mmol, more preferably 0.5 mmol or more and less than 1.5 mmol, per mole of silver halide.
- Specific examples of sensitizing dyes include II-1 to II-47 described on pages 5 to 8 of JP-A No. 2-68539.
- Antistatic Agent in the present disclosure, surfactants described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 11, upper left column, line 14 to page 12, upper left column, line 9 can be used as coating aids, antistatic agents, or charge adjusting agents.
- the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure may also be used as coating aids, antistatic agents, or charge adjusting agents.
- surfactants that can be used for such purposes include nonionic surfactants such as saponin (steroid-based), alkylene oxide derivatives (e.g., polyethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol/polypropylene glycol condensates, polyethylene glycol alkyl ethers or polyethylene glycol alkylaryl ethers, and silicone polyethylene oxide compounds), and sugar alkyl esters; anionic surfactants such as alkyl sulfonates, alkylbenzene sulfonates, alkylnaphthalene sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, N-acyl-N-alkyltaurines, sulfosuccinates, and sulfoalkylpolyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ethers; amphoteric surfactants such as alkyl betaines and alkyl sulfobetaines; and cationic surfactants such as aliphatic or aromatic quaternary ammonium
- anions such as saponin, dodecylbenzenesulfonate Na salt, di-2-ethylhexyl ⁇ -sulfosuccinate Na salt, p-octylphenoxyethoxyethanesulfonate Na salt, dodecyl sulfate Na salt, triisopropylnaphthalenesulfonate Na salt, and N-methyl-oleoyl taurine Na salt; cations such as dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride, N-oleoyl-N',N',N'-trimethylammoniodiaminopropane bromide and dodecylpyridium chloride; betaines such as N-dodecyl-N,N-dimenalcarboxybetaine and N-oleyl-N,N-dimethylsulfobutylbetaine; and nonions such as poly(average polymerization degree n-10)oxyethylene cetyl
- nonionic surfactants described in JP-A Nos. 60-80848, 61-112144, 62-172343, 62-173459, and the like alkali metal nitrates, conductive tin oxide, zinc oxide, vanadium pentoxide, or composite oxides of these doped with antimony or the like can be preferably used.
- matting agents examples include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 12, upper left column, line 10 to the upper right column, line 10, and page 14, lower left column, line 10 to the lower right column, line 1.
- matting agents examples include fine particles of polymethyl methacrylate homopolymers or copolymers of methyl methacrylate and methacrylic acid, organic compounds such as starch, and inorganic compounds such as silica, titanium dioxide, sulfuric acid, and strontium barium, as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 2,992,101, 2,701,245, 4,142,894, and 4,396,706.
- the particle size is preferably 1.0 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 2 ⁇ m to 5 ⁇ m.
- a lubricant in addition to silicone compounds described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,489,576 and 4,047,958, and colloidal silica described in JP-B-56-23139, paraffin wax, higher fatty acid esters, starch derivatives, and the like can be used.
- polyols such as trimethylolpropane, pentanediol, butanediol, ethylene glycol, glycerin, etc. can be used as a plasticizer.
- a plasticizer such as a polymer or an emulsion can be contained to improve pressure characteristics.
- British Patent No. 738618 discloses a method using a heterocyclic compound
- British Patent No. 738637 discloses an alkyl phthalate
- British Patent No. 738639 discloses an alkyl ester
- Patent No. 2,960,404 discloses a polyhydric alcohol
- U.S. Patent No. 3,121,060 discloses a carboxyl alkyl cellulose
- Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 49-5017 discloses a method using paraffin and a carboxylate
- Japanese Patent Publication No. 53-28086 discloses a method using an alkyl acrylate and an organic acid, and these methods can also be used in the present disclosure.
- Hydrophilic Colloid As a binder or protective colloid that can be used in the emulsion layer, intermediate layer, and surface protective layer of the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, gelatin is advantageously used, but other hydrophilic colloids can also be used. Examples of hydrophilic colloids include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 12, upper right column, line 11 to lower left column, line 16.
- various synthetic hydrophilic polymeric substances can be used, such as gelatin derivatives, graft polymers of gelatin with other polymers, proteins such as albumin and casein; cellulose derivatives such as hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, and cellulose sulfate esters; sugar derivatives such as sodium alginate, dextran, and starch derivatives; and homopolymers or copolymers of polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl alcohol partial acetal (poly-N-vinylpyrrolidone, polyacrylic acid, polymethacrylic acid, polyacrylamide, polyvinylimidazole, polyvinylpyrazole, etc.).
- gelatin lime-processed gelatin, acid-processed gelatin, enzyme-processed gelatin, and gelatin hydrolysates and enzyme-decomposed gelatin can also be used.
- gelatin it is preferable to use gelatin in combination with dextran or polyacrylamide having an average molecular weight of 100,000 or less.
- dextran or polyacrylamide having an average molecular weight of 100,000 or less.
- Hardeners Photographic emulsions and non-light-sensitive hydrophilic colloids may contain inorganic or organic hardeners. Examples of hardeners include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 12, lower left column, line 17 to page 13, upper right column, line 6.
- chromium salts chrome alum, chromium acetate, etc.
- aldehydes formaldehyde, glyoxal, dimethicone aldehyde, etc.
- N-methylol compounds dimethylol urea, methylol dimethyl dantoin, etc.
- dioxane derivatives (2,3-dihydroxydioxane, etc.)
- active vinyl compounds (1,3,5-triacryloyl-hexahydro-s-triazine, bis(vinylsulfonyl)methyl ether, N,N'-methylenebis-( ⁇ -(vinylsulfonyl)propionamide)
- active halogen compounds (2,4-dichloro-6-hydroxy-s-triazine, etc.
- mucohalogen acids mucochloric acid, mucophenoxychloroic acid, etc.
- a polymer hardener can also be effectively used.
- polymeric hardeners include dialdehyde starch, polyacrolein, polymers having an aldehyde group such as the acrolein copolymer described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,396,029, polymers having an epoxy group described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,623,878, polymers having a dichlorotriazine group described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,362,827 and Research Disclosure No. 17333 (1978), polymers having an active ester group described in JP-A No. 56-66841, polymers having an active ester group described in JP-A No. 56-142524, U.S. Pat. No.
- the support examples include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 13, upper right column, lines 7 to 20.
- the support is preferably a polyethylene terephthalate film or a cellulose triacetate film.
- the surface of the support is preferably subjected to a corona discharge treatment, a glow discharge treatment or an ultraviolet irradiation treatment.
- a subbing layer made of a styrene-butadiene latex, a vinylidene chloride latex or the like may be provided, and a gelatin layer may be further provided on top of the subbing layer.
- a subbing layer may be provided using an organic solvent containing a polyethylene swelling agent and gelatin. The adhesion of such a subbing layer to a hydrophilic colloid layer can be further improved by adding a surface treatment to the subbing layer.
- U.S. Pat. No. 4,800,150 discloses a technique in which a dye is present in the form of a microcrystalline dispersion between the support and the emulsion layer, thereby reducing crossover light to 10% or less.
- Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 63-305345 discloses a technique in which an anionic dye is fixed in a specific layer using a cationic polymer latex
- Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 1-166031 discloses a technique in which the dye fixing layer is an undercoat layer of the support. While any of these methods can be used in the photosensitive material of the present disclosure, it is preferred that the dye-colored layer be an undercoat layer, and that the dye be fixed by the method described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No.
- the dye be fixed in the undercoat layer in the form of a microcrystalline dispersion described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,803,150. In the present disclosure, these methods can be combined as appropriate.
- Preferred dyes include those described in the lower left column on page 4 to the upper right column on page 9 of JP-A No. 2-264944.
- As the mordant layer those described in the lower right column to the upper right column of page 14 of JP-A No. 2-264944 can be used.
- polyhydroxybenzenes examples include those described in JP-A No. 3-39948, page 11, upper left column to page 12, lower left column, and European Patent Application Publication No. 452772A. Specific examples thereof include the compound of general formula (III) described in the upper left column of page 11 of JP-A-8-39948, and specific compounds thereof, namely, compounds (III)-1 to -25 described in the lower left column of page 11 to the lower left column of page 12 of the same publication.
- the amount of these polyhydroxybenzene compounds added may be less than 5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 1 mol per mol of silver halide, and preferably 5 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 3 to 1 ⁇ 10 ⁇ 1 mol per mol of silver halide.
- the silver halide photographic material according to the present disclosure is composed of a support, a silver halide emulsion layer (photosensitive layer) containing photosensitive silver halide grains, and at least one non-photosensitive hydrophilic colloid layer, such as an intermediate layer, surface protective layer, back layer, back surface protective layer, antihalation layer, or filter layer.
- a silver halide emulsion layer photosensitive layer
- at least one non-photosensitive hydrophilic colloid layer such as an intermediate layer, surface protective layer, back layer, back surface protective layer, antihalation layer, or filter layer.
- the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure preferably has a surface protective layer and a back protective layer, which contain various chemicals with a hydrophilic colloid such as gelatin as a binder.
- a surface protective layer and a back protective layer which contain various chemicals with a hydrophilic colloid such as gelatin as a binder.
- the layer contains a matting agent, a lubricant, a plasticizer, an antistatic agent, a surfactant, a hardener, a thickener, a dye, a conductive substance, or the like, as needed.
- development processing method for the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material As a development processing method for the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, the methods described in JP-A No. 2-103037, page 16, upper right column, line 7 to page 19, lower left column, line 15, JP-A No. 2-115837, page 3, lower right column, line 5 to page 6, upper column, line 10, and JP-A No. 2000-112078, page 34, left column, line 42 to page 35, left column, line 2 can be used. Furthermore, for thermally developable light-sensitive materials, the methods described in JP-A No. 2001-255617, page 37, left column, line 40 to page 35, left column, line 43 can be used.
- One embodiment of the silver halide photographic material according to this disclosure is a photosensitive heat-developable photographic material.
- the technology for this is described in paragraphs 16 to 189 of Japanese Patent No. 5,623,921.
- the desired effect can be achieved when the surfactants described in paragraphs 181 to 183 of the publication are those described in this application.
- the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure has a support and a layer on the support, the layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1 (the ionic compound according to the present disclosure):
- Preferred embodiments of the ionic compound in the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure are the same as the preferred embodiments of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure described above.
- the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may contain one type of ionic compound according to the present disclosure alone, or two or more types.
- the content of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure in the layer of the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may be appropriately selected depending on the application, but is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 20% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, relative to the total mass of the layer.
- the layer may be any layer constituting the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material described below.
- it is a layer that forms an air-liquid interface during coating, and more preferably, it is the outermost layer of the finally laminated light-sensitive material.
- it is an intermediate layer in a substrate for a light-sensitive sheet, the outermost layer of a substrate, an intermediate layer in a light-sensitive sheet, a protective layer, a temperature compensation layer in a cover sheet, etc.
- the outermost layer of a substrate in a substrate for a light-sensitive sheet, a protective layer in a light-sensitive sheet, and a temperature compensation layer in a cover sheet are particularly preferred.
- the layer containing the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may be one layer or two or more layers.
- the above layer may contain various components contained in the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material described below.
- the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure preferably comprises a light-sensitive sheet, a transparent cover sheet, and an alkaline processing composition-containing material spread between them.
- the alkali processing composition-containing body is uniformly spread on the photosensitive sheet after exposure to light, and has the functions of developing the photosensitive layer and, together with a light-shielding layer provided on the back side of the transparent support of the photosensitive sheet or in the photosensitive sheet, completely shielding the photosensitive layer from external light. Therefore, the alkali processing composition-containing body typically contains, in addition to alkali, a thickener, a light-shielding agent, and a developing agent, a development accelerator for controlling development, a development inhibitor for preventing deterioration of the developing agent, and an antioxidant for preventing deterioration of the developing agent.
- Alkali is not particularly limited as long as it can adjust the pH of the solution to 12 or higher.
- alkalis include alkali metal hydroxides (e.g., sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, and lithium hydroxide), alkali metal phosphates (e.g., potassium phosphate), guanidines, and quaternary amine hydroxides (e.g., tetramethylammonium hydroxide).
- alkali metal hydroxides e.g., sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, and lithium hydroxide
- alkali metal phosphates e.g., potassium phosphate
- guanidines e.g., guanidines
- quaternary amine hydroxides e.g., tetramethylammonium hydroxide
- developing agent Any developing agent may be used as long as it cross-oxidizes the dye image-forming compound and does not substantially produce stains even when oxidized.
- a single developing agent may be used, or two or more developing agents may be used, or they may be used in the form of a precursor.
- developing agents include aminophenols and pyrazolidinones. Of these, pyrazolidinones are particularly preferred because they cause less staining.
- pyrazolidinones include 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidinone, 1-p-tolyl-4,4-dihydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolidinone, 1-(3'-methyl-phenyl)-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolidinone, 1-phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolidinone, and 1-p-tolyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolidinone.
- the developing agent may be incorporated into the alkaline processing composition-containing material, or may be added to an appropriate layer of the photosensitive sheet.
- Light-blocking agent Any material having a light-blocking function can be used as a light-blocking agent without any particular limitation.
- light-blocking agents include carbon black and the decomposable dyes described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,615,966. Of these light-blocking agents, carbon black is preferred. Carbon black is not limited to carbon black obtained by a specific manufacturing method, and may be obtained by any manufacturing method. Examples of methods for manufacturing carbon black include the channel method described in Donnel Voet "Carbon Black" MarcelDekker, Inc. (1976), as well as the thermal method and the furnace method.
- carbon black When using carbon black as a light-blocking agent, it is preferable to prepare the carbon black in an aqueous dispersion beforehand.
- Aqueous dispersions of carbon black are widely used in paints, inks, cosmetics, and photographic materials, as black materials, or light-blocking materials.
- carbon black is added to water containing a suitable dispersant, and the carbon black is coarsely dispersed using a coarse disperser (e.g., a high-speed agitator such as the Dissolver described in Japanese Patent Application No. 54-36045) to achieve an average particle size of approximately 10 ⁇ m to 100 ⁇ m.
- a coarse disperser e.g., a high-speed agitator such as the Dissolver described in Japanese Patent Application No. 54-36045
- the particle size is then further reduced using a fine disperser (e.g., a sand grinder, homogenizer, colloid mill, etc.).
- a fine disperser e.g., a sand grinder, homogenizer, colloid mill, etc.
- This process yields an aqueous dispersion of carbon black with an average particle size of approximately 0.1 ⁇ m to 10 ⁇ m.
- carbon black may be dispersed in an aqueous solution containing an organic solvent, followed by removal of the organic solvent to obtain an aqueous dispersion of carbon black.
- Preferred dispersants include those described on pages 255-257 and 501-539 of "Dispersion Technology Comprehensive Data Collection” (Business Development Center Publishing Division).
- An example of a commercially available dispersant is Demol N (trade name, manufactured by Kao Corporation).
- the type and/or amount of dispersant affects the sodium ion content, which will be described later.
- the type and/or amount of dispersant must be determined so as to satisfy (a) the condition of providing sufficient dispersibility to the light-blocking agent, as well as (b) the condition of sodium ion content. To satisfy both the conditions of dispersibility and sodium ion content, it is preferable to set the amount of dispersant to 2% to 100% by mass relative to the light-blocking agent.
- the optical density of the alkali treatment composition-containing body is preferably 47 or more, more preferably 50 or more, and particularly preferably 55 or more.
- the optical density is 47 or more, sufficient light-shielding properties are obtained and spot fogging is suppressed. It is preferable to determine the amount of the light-shielding agent to be blended so that the optical density is 47 or more. Although it depends on the type of light-shielding agent used, it is preferable to set the amount of the light-shielding agent to about 10% by mass to 40% by mass in order to achieve an optical density of 47 or more.
- the sodium ion content of the alkaline treatment composition-containing material in a spread state is preferably 0.4 g/ m2 or less.
- the sodium ion content is more preferably 0.35 g/ m2 or less, and particularly preferably 0.25 g/ m2 or less.
- the content of sodium ions is mainly determined by the dispersant for the light-blocking agent and the thickener.
- Sodium carboxymethylcellulose is particularly preferred as a thickener.
- Sodium carboxymethylcellulose has sufficient spreadability and stability.
- the sodium ion content can be reduced by using polyvinyl alcohol, hydroxyethyl cellulose, or an alkali metal salt of carboxymethylcellulose other than sodium as a thickener.
- these do not have sufficient spreadability and stability, so their use alone is not appropriate. Therefore, it is preferable to use sodium carboxymethylcellulose primarily as a thickener, and to use polyvinyl alcohol, hydroxyethyl cellulose, or an alkali metal salt of carboxymethylcellulose other than sodium in combination.
- the degree of etherification of sodium carboxymethylcellulose is preferably 0.5 to 2.7, and more preferably 1.0 to 2.4.
- the amount of sodium carboxymethylcellulose added is preferably 1% by mass to 15% by mass, and more preferably 2% by mass to 10% by mass.
- an alkaline processing composition-containing material that satisfies the above-mentioned optical density and sodium ion content exhibits excellent light-blocking properties and dye transfer properties even when spread thinly on a photosensitive sheet.
- "thinly spread” means that the alkaline processing composition-containing material is spread to a thickness of 10 ⁇ m to 80 ⁇ m on the photosensitive sheet.
- a preferred spread thickness is 10 ⁇ m to 70 ⁇ m, and a more preferred spread thickness is 20 ⁇ m to 60 ⁇ m.
- the support of the photosensitive sheet may be any of those commonly used for photographic materials.
- the support of the integrated color diffusion transfer film unit must be transparent.
- the support is preferably smooth. Examples of support materials include cellulose acetate, polystyrene, polyethylene terephthalate, and polycarbonate.
- the support preferably contains a trace amount of dye or pigment such as titanium oxide.
- the thickness of the support of the photosensitive sheet is preferably 25 ⁇ m to 350 ⁇ m, more preferably 50 ⁇ m to 210 ⁇ m, and particularly preferably 70 ⁇ m to 150 ⁇ m.
- a primer layer (undercoat layer) is preferably provided on the front side of the support.
- a curl-balancing layer or an oxygen-blocking layer can be provided on the back side of the support as needed.
- the oxygen-blocking layer can be provided by referring to the description in JP-A-56-78833.
- the image-receiving layer (dye image-receiving layer) of the photosensitive sheet preferably contains a mordant and a hydrophilic colloid.
- the image-receiving layer may be a single layer or may be a laminate of layers having different mordanting powers. Single-layer and multi-layer image-receiving layers can be provided by referring to the description in JP-A-61-252551.
- the mordant is preferably a polymer mordant.
- Polymer mordants include polymers containing secondary and/or tertiary amino groups, polymers having a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic moiety, and polymers containing a quaternary cation, and preferably have a molecular weight of 5,000 or more, particularly preferably 10,000 or more.
- the coating amount of the mordant is preferably 0.5 g/m 2 to 10 g/m 2 , more preferably 1 g/m 2 to 5 g/m 2 , and particularly preferably 2 g/m 2 to 4 g/m 2 .
- Hydrophilic colloids include gelatin, polyvinyl alcohol, polyacrylamide, polyvinylpyrrolidone, etc.
- the preferred hydrophilic colloid is gelatin.
- the image receiving layer may contain a discoloration inhibitor.
- a discoloration inhibitor There are no particular restrictions on the discoloration inhibitor, but those described in, for example, JP-A Nos. 62-30620, 62-30621, and 62-215272 can be used.
- the thickness of the image receiving layer may be the same as that of an ordinary color diffusion transfer film unit.
- the white reflective layer of the photosensitive sheet forms a white background for the color image and usually contains a white pigment and a hydrophilic binder.
- the whiteness of the white reflective layer is determined by the type of pigment, the mixing ratio of the pigment to the binder, and the coating amount of the pigment.
- the white pigment is titanium dioxide
- the content of titanium dioxide is preferably 5 g/m 2 to 40 g/m 2 , more preferably 10 g/m 2 to 25 g/m 2 .
- the light reflectance of the white reflective layer is preferably 70% or higher, and more preferably 78% to 85% for light with a wavelength of 540 nm.
- white pigments examples include barium sulfate, zinc oxide, barium stearate, silver flakes, silicates, alumina, zirconium oxide, sodium zirconium sulfate, kaolin, mica, and titanium dioxide.
- Non-film-forming polymer particles such as polystyrene can also be used as white pigments.
- titanium dioxide is preferred, with rutile titanium dioxide being particularly preferred.
- White pigments may be used alone or in combination of two or more types. Using two or more types of white pigments makes it easier to achieve a desired reflectance value for the white reflective layer.
- White pigments that are surface-treated with alumina, silica, zinc oxide, etc. are preferred, with the amount of surface treatment being 5% or more being more preferred.
- a white reflective layer containing surface-treated white pigment exhibits high reflectivity.
- titanium dioxide examples include DuPont's Ti-pure R931 (trade name) and those described in Research Disclosure (RD) No. 15162.
- Hydrophilic binders include alkali-permeable polymer matrices such as gelatin and polyvinyl alcohol, and cellulose derivatives such as hydroxyethyl cellulose and carboxymethyl cellulose.
- the binder is gelatin
- the mass ratio of the white pigment to the gelatin is preferably 1/1 to 20/1, and more preferably 5/1 to 10/1.
- the white reflective layer preferably contains an anti-fading agent.
- an anti-fading agent there are no particular restrictions on the anti-fading agent, but for example, those described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 62-30620 and 62-30621 can be used.
- the light-shielding layer is provided between the white reflective layer and the photosensitive layer.
- the light-shielding layer preferably contains a light-shielding agent and a hydrophilic binder.
- the light-blocking agent may be one of those listed in (c) Light-blocking agent in [1] Alkaline processing composition-containing substance above.
- the amount of light-blocking agent contained will vary depending on the sensitivity of the photosensitive material to be blocked, but an optical density of about 5 to 10 is generally preferred.
- the binder for the light-shielding layer can be any material that can disperse a light-shielding agent such as carbon black.
- a preferred binder is gelatin.
- the thickness of the light-shielding layer there are no particular restrictions on the thickness of the light-shielding layer, as long as it provides sufficient light-shielding ability and does not make the photosensitive sheet too thick.
- the photosensitive layer is adjacent to the light-shielding layer and preferably contains a dye image-forming compound and a silver halide emulsion.
- the photosensitive layer may be a multilayer consisting of a silver halide emulsion layer and a dye image-forming compound layer, or a single layer containing both a silver halide emulsion and a dye image-forming compound.
- the multilayer case will be explained below, but the same applies to a single layer case.
- Dye image-forming compounds include yellow dye-forming compounds, magenta dye-forming compounds, and cyan dye-forming compounds. Specific examples of yellow dye-forming compounds are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,597,200, 3,309,199, 4,013,633, 4,245,028, 4,156,609, 4,139,383, 4,195,992, 4,148,641, 4,148,643, 4,336,322, JP-A-51-114930, JP-A-56-71072, Research Disclosure 17630 (1978), and Research Disclosure 16475 (1977).
- magenta dye-forming compounds are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,453,107, 3,544,545, 3,932,380, 3,931,144, 3,932,308, 3,954,476, 4,233,237, 4,255,509, 4,250,246, and 4,142,891. These are described in the fine print, U.S. Patent No. 4,207,104, U.S. Patent No. 4,287,292, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 52-106727, 53-23628, 55-36804, 56-73057, 56-71060, 55-134, 7-120901, 8-286343, 8-286344, and 8-292537, among others.
- cyan dye-forming compounds are those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,482,972, 3,929,760, 4,013,635, 4,268,625, 4,171,220, 4,242,435, 4,142,891, 4,195,994, 4,147,544, 4,148,642, and British Patent No. 1,551,111. These are described in Patent Publication No. 38, JP 54-99431 A, JP 52-8827 A, JP 53-47823 A, JP 53-143323 A, JP 54-99431 A, JP 56-71061 A, European Patent (EP) No. 53,037, European Patent (EP) No. 53,040, Research Disclosure No. 17,630 (1978), and Research Disclosure No. 16,475 (1977), among others.
- Dye image-forming compounds that form dyes by coupling can also be used as dye image-forming compounds. Examples of dye image-forming compounds that form dyes by coupling are described in JP-A Nos. 8-286340, 9-152705, 10-186564, and 10-293388, etc.
- Positive dye image-forming compounds can also be used. Examples of positive dye image-forming compounds are described in JP-A Nos. 4-156542, 4-155332, 4-172344, 4-172450, 4-318844, 4-356046, 5-45824, 5-45825, 5-53279, 5-107710, 5-241302, 5-107708, 5-232659, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,192,649, among others. Positive dye image-forming compounds are preferably combined with negative silver halide emulsions, as described below.
- Positive dye image-forming compounds can be dispersed using the method described on pages 144 to 146 of JP-A No. 62-215272.
- the dispersion may also contain compounds described on pages 137 to 144 of JP-A No. 62-215272.
- Specific examples of these dye image-forming compounds include the following compounds.
- Dye represents a dye group, a dye group temporarily short-waved, or a dye precursor group.
- the silver halide emulsion may be a negative type silver halide emulsion in which a latent image is formed mainly on the surface of the silver halide grains, or an internal latent image type direct positive silver halide emulsion in which a latent image is formed inside the silver halide grains.
- Internal latent image type direct positive silver halide emulsions include, for example, so-called “conversion type emulsions” which are made by utilizing the difference in solubility of silver halide, and "core/shell type emulsions” which are made by doping metal ions or chemically sensitizing, or both, silver halide core grains, and at least the photosensitive sites of the core grains are covered with an outer shell of silver halide.
- conversion type emulsions which are made by utilizing the difference in solubility of silver halide
- core/shell type emulsions which are made by doping metal ions or chemically sensitizing, or both, silver halide core grains, and at least the photosensitive sites of the core grains are covered with an outer shell of silver halide.
- nucleating agents include hydrazines described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,563,785 and 2,588,982, hydrazines and hydrazones described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,227,552, heterocyclic quaternary salt compounds described in British Patent No. 1,283,835, JP-A-52-69613, U.S. Pat. Nos.
- acylhydrazine compounds having a heterocyclic group such as a thioamide ring, a triazole ring, or a tetrazole ring
- a heterocyclic group such as a thioamide ring, a triazole ring, or a tetrazole ring
- the metal complexes described in JP-A Nos. 2002-40607 and 2003-107616 it is also preferable to use the metal complexes described in JP-A Nos. 2002-40607 and 2003-107616.
- the method described in JP-A No. 2006-113291 can be preferably used as a preferred method for producing a negative silver halide emulsion.
- Spectral sensitizing dyes can be used in combination with silver halide emulsions. Specific examples are described in JP-A-59-180550, JP-A-60-140335, RD17029, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 1,846,300, 2,078,233, 2,089,129, 2,165,338, 2,231,658, 2,917,516, 3,352,857, 3,411,916, 2,295,276, and U.S. Pat. These are described in the specifications of U.S. Patent Nos.
- the photosensitive sheet preferably has at least three silver halide emulsion layers having different color sensitivities and at least two color-mixing prevention layers each containing a non-diffusible reducing agent and positioned between the silver halide emulsion layers.
- it is effective and preferable to use the above-mentioned spectral sensitizing dyes having different absorption wavelength distributions.
- the spectral sensitivity distributions of the emulsions do not overlap as much as possible, but they do not need to be completely separated.
- the color sensitivities can be considered to be different when the sensitivity of one emulsion layer at a specific wavelength is at least twice that of at least two other silver halide emulsion layers. It is desirable that the sensitivity of one emulsion layer at a specific wavelength be at least five times, more preferably at least ten times, that of at least two other silver halide emulsion layers. There are no particular restrictions on the specific wavelengths required to achieve this relationship, and any of the visible, ultraviolet, and infrared regions may be used. However, it is preferred that the silver halide emulsions in the at least three silver halide emulsion layers be selected from those sensitive to blue, green, red, or infrared.
- the emulsion and dye image-forming compound may be in separate layers, or the emulsion and dye image-forming compound may be contained in a single layer. If the dye image-forming compound, when coated, has absorption in the spectral sensitivity range of the emulsion with which it is combined, a separate layer is preferred.
- the emulsion layer may be composed of emulsions with different sensitivities. Furthermore, any layer may be provided between the emulsion layer and the dye image-forming compound layer.
- the density of the color image can be increased by providing a layer containing a nucleating development accelerator, as described in JP-A-60-173541, or a partition wall layer, as described in JP-B-60-15267.
- the sensitivity of the photosensitive sheet can be increased by providing a reflective layer.
- the reflective layer is a layer containing a white pigment and a hydrophilic binder, with titanium oxide being preferred as the white pigment and gelatin being preferred as the hydrophilic binder.
- the coating amount of titanium oxide is preferably 0.1 g/m 2 to 8 g/m 2 , and more preferably 0.2 g/m 2 to 4 g/m 2. Examples of reflective layers are described in JP-A-60-91354.
- a blue-sensitive emulsion combination unit In the case of a multilayer photosensitive layer, it is preferable to arrange a blue-sensitive emulsion combination unit, a green-sensitive emulsion combination unit, and a red-sensitive emulsion combination unit in that order from the exposed side.
- Optional layers can be provided between each emulsion layer unit as needed.
- Color-mixing prevention layer In order to prevent the undesirable influence of the development effect of one emulsion layer on other emulsion layer units, it is preferable to have a color-mixing prevention layer containing a non-diffusible reducing agent located between emulsion layers. At least one color-mixing prevention layer is required between each emulsion layer, so it is preferable that the photosensitive sheet has at least two color-mixing prevention layers.
- any known compound can be preferably used as the non-diffusible reducing agent used in the color-mixing prevention layer.
- any known compound can be preferably used.
- non-diffusible reducing agents for use in the color-mixing prevention layer are selected from non-diffusible hydroquinone derivatives, sulfonamidophenol derivatives, sulfonamido naphthol derivatives, and lactones.
- Non-diffusible hydroquinone derivatives are particularly preferred, with dialkylhydroquinone derivatives being particularly preferred.
- the alkyl group includes substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups, and the substituents are not particularly limited as long as they do not impair the "non-diffusibility" of the compound. Specific examples include aryl groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, and aryloxycarbonyl groups.
- the total number of carbon atoms in the "dialkyl group” is preferably 12 or more, and more preferably 16 or more.
- the molecular weight of the non-diffusible reducing agent is preferably 350 or more, more preferably 390 or more, and particularly preferably 500 or more.
- the molecular weight is expressed as a number-average molecular weight.
- the upper limit of the molecular weight of the non-diffusible reducing agent is not particularly limited when the non-diffusible reducing agent is a polymer, but when it is a compound other than a polymer, it is preferably about 1,000 or less.
- the optimal amount of non-diffusible reducing agent contained in at least two color-mixing prevention layers disposed between each silver halide emulsion layer varies depending on the coating amount, shape, grain size, and target maximum color density of the silver halide emulsion used.
- too much non-diffusible reducing agent results in a decrease in color density and a delay in image formation time, while too little results in cloudy color hues. Therefore, the amount of non-diffusible reducing agent should be determined taking these factors into consideration.
- the decrease in color density resulting from a reduction in the coated silver amount can be effectively suppressed by setting the coating amount of silver halide to the non-diffusible reducing agent at a specific ratio and using a specific amount of negative-working silver halide emulsion as the silver halide emulsion.
- the total coating molar amount of silver halide is 5 to 10 times the total coating molar amount of the non-diffusible reducing agent used in the color-mixing preventing layer.
- the total coating molar amount of the non-diffusible reducing agent is preferably in the range of 0.5 to 1.5 mmol/ m2 , more preferably in the range of 0.8 to 1.2 mmol/ m2 . Specific examples of non-diffusible reducing agents are given below, but the present disclosure is not limited to these.
- the non-diffusible reducing agent is preferably dissolved in a high-boiling organic solvent and present in the color-mixing prevention layer as fine oil droplets obtained by emulsification and dispersion.
- the high-boiling organic solvent preferably has a dielectric constant in the range of 4.0 to 8.0.
- the high-boiling organic solvent may be a mixture of two or more types. Examples of preferred high-boiling organic solvents include esters such as phthalates and phosphates, organic acid amides, and ketones.
- the dielectric constant was measured using the transformer bridge method (TRS-10T, manufactured by Ando Electric Co., Ltd.) at 25°C and 10 kHz.
- the high-boiling organic solvent preferably has a boiling point of 140°C or higher and a melting point of 100°C or lower, and more preferably a boiling point of 160°C or higher and a melting point of 70°C or lower.
- the high-boiling organic solvent may be solid at room temperature; in this case, the dielectric constant is the value measured in liquid form (supercooled state).
- the amount (mass ratio) of the high-boiling organic solvent to the non-diffusible reducing agent used in the color-mixing prevention layer is preferably 0.3 to 20, more preferably 0.5 to 10, and even more preferably 1 to 8.
- the thickness of the photosensitive layer there are no particular restrictions on the thickness of the photosensitive layer, as long as it provides sufficient color reproduction and does not make the photosensitive sheet too thick.
- the photosensitive sheet may have an anti-irradiation layer, a UV absorber layer, a protective layer, etc., as required.
- the thickness of the photosensitive sheet is not particularly limited as long as it does not make the color diffusion transfer film unit too thick.
- the support for the transparent cover sheet may be any smooth transparent support commonly used in photographic materials.
- Preferred supports include cellulose acetate, polystyrene, polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, etc.
- the support preferably contains a trace amount of dye to prevent light piping. It is also preferred to provide an undercoat layer on the support.
- the layer with neutralizing function is a layer containing an acidic substance in an amount sufficient to neutralize the alkali introduced from the alkaline processing composition-containing body. If necessary, it may have a multilayer structure comprising layers such as a neutralization rate adjusting layer (neutralization timing layer) and an adhesion enhancing layer.
- Preferred acidic substances are substances containing acidic groups with a pKa of 9 or less (or precursor groups that generate acidic groups with a pKa of 9 or less upon hydrolysis), and more preferred acidic substances are higher fatty acids such as oleic acid as described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,983,606; polymers of acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, or maleic acid and their partial esters or acid anhydrides as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,362,819; copolymers of acrylic acid and acrylic acid esters as disclosed in French Patent No. 2,290,699; and latex-type acidic polymers as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,139,383 and RD No. 16102 (1977).
- acidic polymers include copolymers of vinyl monomers such as ethylene, vinyl acetate, and vinyl methyl ether with maleic anhydride and its n-butyl ester, copolymers of butyl acrylate and acrylic acid, cellulose, and acetate hydrogen phthalate.
- Acidic polymers can be used in combination with hydrophilic polymers.
- hydrophilic polymers include polyacrylamide, polymethylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol (including partially saponified products), carboxymethyl cellulose, hydroxymethyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, and polymethyl vinyl ether. Of these, polyvinyl alcohol is preferred. Acidic polymers can also be mixed with polymers other than hydrophilic polymers, such as cellulose acetate.
- the amount of acidic polymer applied is determined by the amount of alkali in the alkaline processing composition.
- the equivalent ratio of acidic polymer to alkali per unit area is preferably 0.9 to 2.0. If the amount of acidic polymer is too small, the hue of the transferred dye will change and staining will occur on the white background. If the amount is too large, problems such as changes in hue or reduced lightfastness will occur. A more preferable equivalent ratio is 1.0 to 1.3. If the amount of hydrophilic polymer mixed is too large or too small, photographic quality will be reduced.
- the mass ratio k of hydrophilic polymer to acidic polymer is preferably 0.01 to 10, more preferably 0.1 to 3.0.
- Additives can be incorporated into the neutralization layer for various purposes.
- common film-hardening agents can be added to the neutralization layer, or polyhydroxyl compounds such as polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, and glycerin can be added to improve the brittleness of the film.
- polyhydroxyl compounds such as polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, and glycerin can be added to improve the brittleness of the film.
- Other additives that can be added as needed include antioxidants, fluorescent brighteners, development inhibitors, and their precursors.
- Neutralization timing layers used in combination with the neutralization layer include, for example, polymers that reduce alkali permeability such as gelatin, polyvinyl alcohol, partially acetalized polyvinyl alcohol, cellulose acetate, and partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate; latex polymers that increase the activation energy of alkali permeation by copolymerizing small amounts of hydrophilic comonomers such as acrylic acid monomers; and polymers with lactone rings.
- timing layers using cellulose acetate are disclosed in JP-A-54-136328, U.S. Pat. No. 4,267,262, U.S. Pat. No. 4,009,030, U.S. Pat. No. 4,029,849, etc.; acrylic resins are disclosed in JP-A-54-128335, JP-A-56-69629, JP-A-57-6843, U.S. Pat. No. 4,056,394, U.S. Pat. No. 4,061,496, U.S. Pat. No. 4,199,362, U.S. Pat. No. 4,250,243, U.S. Pat. No. 4,256,827, U.S. Pat. No. 4,268,604, etc.
- Particularly useful polymers include latex polymers copolymerized with small amounts of hydrophilic comonomers such as acids; polymers containing monoacrylates or monomethacrylates of polyhydric alcohols as disclosed in JP-A-11-2890; polymers containing lactone rings as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,229,516; and polymers disclosed in JP-A-56-25735, JP-A-56-97346, JP-A-57-6842, EP-A-31,957-A1, EP-A-37,724-A1, and EP-A-48,412-A1.
- hydrophilic comonomers such as acids
- polymers containing monoacrylates or monomethacrylates of polyhydric alcohols as disclosed in JP-A-11-2890
- polymers containing lactone rings as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,229,516
- the neutralization timing layer may contain development inhibitors and/or their precursors as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,009,029, West German Patent Application (OLS) No. 2,913,164, West German Patent Application Publication No. 3,014,672, JP-A Nos. 54-155837 and 55-138745, hydroquinone precursors as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,201,578, other photographic additives or their precursors, etc. Furthermore, providing an auxiliary neutralization layer as described in JP-A Nos. 63-168648 and 63-168649 is effective in minimizing changes in transfer density over time after processing.
- the neutralization timing layer may contain multiple of these materials. Multiple materials may be contained in a single layer, or multiple layers may each contain multiple materials.
- the transparent cover sheet may have, in addition to the layer having a neutralizing function, layers having auxiliary functions such as a backing layer, a protective layer, and a filter dye layer.
- the backing layer is provided to adjust curl and provide slippage.
- the backing layer may contain a filter dye.
- the protective layer is mainly used to prevent adhesion to the back surface of the cover sheet and to the protective layer of the photosensitive material when the photosensitive material and the cover sheet are superimposed. If the transparent cover sheet contains a dye, the sensitivity of the photosensitive layer can be adjusted.
- a filter dye may be added to the support of the cover sheet, a layer having a neutralizing function, a backing layer, a protective layer, a capture mordant layer, etc. Alternatively, a layer containing only a filter dye may be provided.
- the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may contain other known additives in each layer.
- a 1000 mL three-neck flask equipped with a stirrer, condenser, nitrogen inlet tube, and thermometer was charged with 499.0 g of ethyl acetate (AcOEt), 24.30 g of ion-exchanged water, and palladium/carbon (Pd/C, 5% palladium, approximately 55% water-wetted) and purged with nitrogen.
- the three-neck flask was placed in an ice bath, and 100.0 g of 1,1,1,3,5,5,5-heptamethyltrisiloxane was added dropwise over 30 minutes. After the dropwise addition, the mixture was returned to room temperature and allowed to react for 3 hours.
- a separate solution was prepared by adding 18.4 g of toluene and 19.3 mL of dichloromethylsilane to a dropping funnel. The prepared solution was added dropwise to the three-neck flask over 30 minutes. After the addition was completed, the reaction solution was returned to room temperature and allowed to react for 3 hours. After the reaction, the precipitated solid was filtered off, and the resulting colorless, transparent liquid was subjected to a separation operation. The separation operation was performed twice using 350 mL of ion-exchanged water, and the organic layer was recovered. Magnesium sulfate was added to the organic layer, and the mixture was dehydrated for 30 minutes or more, followed by vacuum concentration using a rotary evaporator.
- Pulverized silica gel (Wakogel C-200, Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added to the resulting liquid, which was then stirred and filtered under suction to obtain a colorless, transparent liquid. The liquid was confirmed to be intermediate 3 by 1H -NMR.
- Examples 1-A to 1-D and Comparative Examples 1-A to 1-C Evaluation of surface tension in aqueous solution
- a sample for surface tension measurement was prepared by mixing 0.4 parts by mass of the compound synthesized above or the comparative compound, 1,000 parts by mass of ion-exchanged water, and 10 parts by mass of methanol.
- the prepared sample was kept at 40°C, and the surface tension was measured by the Wilhelmy method using an automatic surface tensiometer DY-300 manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd., with a platinum plate as a probe.
- the measurement results are shown in Table 2.
- composition (PA) was prepared containing each component shown in Table 3 per 1,000 g of the finished coating liquid. The remaining component in composition (PA) was water.
- composition (PA) shown in Table 3 was coated so that the gelatin coating amount in Table 3 was 0.29 g/m 2 .
- a substrate was prepared by laminating a backing layer on a polyethylene terephthalate support, followed by laminating a substrate-1 layer and a substrate-2 layer.
- the image-receiving film was stored at 25°C and 55% relative humidity for 7 days to harden.
- the sample thus obtained was designated image-receiving film substrate 101.
- the composition of each layer is shown in Table 4 below.
- the composition (A) intentionally contains coarse particles with a diameter of 6 ⁇ m. The inclusion of foreign matter in the application environment or the peeling of foreign matter from the backing layer can cause cissing during application. The addition of the coarse particles is for the purpose of simulating this.
- compositions (P-B) to (P-K) were prepared by changing only the type of compound in composition (P-A), which is the coating liquid for the substrate-6th layer. Details are shown in Table 5 below.
- Image receiving film substrates 102 to 111 were also prepared in the same manner as image receiving film substrate 101, except that only the type of the coating liquid for the substrate-6th layer was changed. The obtained samples were evaluated as follows.
- Additive (8) Carboxymethyl cellulose (CMC Cellogen 6A, manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd.)
- Additive (10) the following compound
- Matting agent (1) Polymethyl methacrylate spherical latex (average particle size 3 ⁇ m) Matting agent (2): Polymethyl methacrylate spherical latex (average particle size 6 ⁇ m) Hardener (1): the following compound Hardener (2): the following compound Hardener (4): the following compound
- Polymer mordant (1) The following compound
- UV absorber (2) the following compound UV absorber (3): the following compound
- a composition was prepared from the composition formulation of the substrate-sixth layer, with the matting agent and the leveling agent introduced by the matting agent removed, and a similar evaluation was performed. As a result, it was confirmed that a substrate in which the occurrence of cissing was suppressed could be formed using the sample using the ionic compound according to the present disclosure.
- Examples 3-A to 3-D and Comparative Examples 3-A to 3-C Preparation of Compositions, Preparation and Evaluation of Silver Halide Photosensitive Materials
- a back layer was laminated on a polyethylene terephthalate support, and then the substrate-1st layer to the substrate-6th layer were laminated thereon to obtain a laminate substrate (Subs-1).
- the composition of the substrate-sixth layer was the same as that of the composition (A) of Comparative Example 2-A, but not containing the matting agent (2) and the surfactant derived from the matting agent (surfactant (3)).
- this laminate substrate (Subs-1) was stored for 7 days under environmental conditions of 25°C and a relative humidity of 55% RH.
- a composition (QA) containing the components shown in Table 6 per 1,000 g of the finished coating solution was prepared as a coating solution for the 18th layer of the silver halide photosensitive material.
- composition (QA) shown in Table 6 above was coated so that the gelatin coating amount in Table 6 was 0.20 g/m 2 .
- compositions (Q-B) to (Q-G) were prepared by changing the compounds in composition (Q-A) as shown in Table 12 below.
- Silver halide photographic materials 202 to 207 were each prepared in the same manner as silver halide photographic material 201, except that only the type of coating solution for the 18th layer was changed.
- the obtained photosensitive material samples were evaluated as follows:
- Coated Surface Condition The coated surface condition was evaluated based on two criteria: cissing and uniformity.
- the evaluation criteria are as follows: A: Unevenness caused by wind is not noticeable B: Unevenness caused by wind is almost not noticeable C: Unevenness caused by wind is slightly noticeable, but not a problem in practical use D: Streaky unevenness caused by wind is noticeable, and is a problem if the captured image is a uniform gray E: Streaky unevenness caused by wind is noticeable, and is a serious problem even if the captured image is not uniform and includes a pattern
- the silver halide photographic material prepared above is a diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic material, and its processing method involves spreading a thin layer of processing solution between an exposed silver halide photographic material (photosensitive sheet) and a transparent cover sheet for development.
- the transparent cover sheet contains cellulose acetate and an acid polymer.
- the alkali in the processing solution causes hydrolysis of the cellulose acetate and increases the alkali's permeability.
- the processing solution maintains a high pH, allowing development of the silver in the photosensitive material. Thereafter, neutralization by the acid polymer progresses, causing a rapid drop in pH within approximately 15 to 20 minutes, halting development.
- the processing solution was filled into a pressure-destructible container, and the container was destroyed with a roller to spread the processing solution to a thickness of 55 ⁇ m.
- the composition of the transparent cover sheet is shown in Table 10, and the composition of the processing solution is shown in Table 11.
- the evaluation results are shown in Table 12.
- Ultraviolet absorber (1) the following compound
- Hardening agent (3) The following compound
- Hardening agent (5) The following compound
- Additive (3) the following compound Additive (4): the following compound Additives (6) to (8): the following compounds Additive (9): polyvinyl alcohol (PVA-220E manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd., degree of polymerization approximately 2,000, degree of saponification 88%) Additive (11): the following compound Additive (13): the following compound
- Additive (20) the following compound
- Additive (21) the following compound
- High boiling point organic solvent (1) the following compound
- High boiling point organic solvent (2) the following compound
- Yellow dye-releasing compound (1) the following compound Magenta dye-releasing compound (1): the following compound Cyan dye-releasing compound (1): the following compound
- Cyan dye-releasing compound (2) The following compound
- Temperature compensation polymer (1) the following compound
- Temperature compensation polymer (2) the following compound
- Acid polymer (1) The following compound
- Latent direct positive emulsions A-I Prepared in accordance with the emulsion of Sample 101 in JP-A No. 2002-40607.
- Emulsion G for the fourth layer was prepared in accordance with emulsion RM12 described in paragraphs 0052-0053 and 0057-0061.
- Example 4 Composition (R) was prepared by changing the composition formulation of the substrate-sixth layer used in the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material of Example 3-A.
- a substrate (Subs-2) containing an ionic compound according to the present disclosure was prepared in the same manner as in the substrate (Subs-1) with a functional layer, except that the composition of the sixth layer was changed to composition (R).
- the multilayer photosensitive material compositions used in the silver halide photographic photosensitive materials 204 to 207 of Examples 3-A to 3-D were coated onto this substrate, and the same evaluations as in Example 3-A were carried out. As a result, it was found that samples containing an ionic compound according to the present disclosure in both the substrate and the photosensitive material laminated thereon exhibited excellent coated surface condition.
- Composition (R) is an aqueous composition, and the remaining component in composition (R) listed in Table 15 is water.
- Example 5 Photothermographic material
- a sample was prepared in which the fluorine compound (F-29) in Sample 7 in the examples described in JP-A-2006-91780 was replaced with 10.0 mg/ m2 of the compound A1-1Na.
- the resulting sample was visually observed for reflected light under a brightness of 500 lux, and the surface condition was observed according to the following evaluation criteria.
- the evaluation result was A, indicating that the coated surface condition was excellent.
- B The unevenness is barely noticeable.
- C A slight decrease in surface gloss is observed.
- D A level at which a decrease in surface gloss is clearly observed.
- Example 6 Photothermographic material
- the fluorosurfactants F-1 and F-2 (total of 1 part by mass) in the non-photosensitive back protective layer were replaced with a compound A1-1Na (10 parts by mass).
- the fluorosurfactants F-1 and F-2 (total of 1 part by mass) in the second surface protective layer were replaced with a compound A1-1Na (10 parts by mass).
- the surface condition of the prepared sample was evaluated using the same criteria as in Example 5, and the evaluation result was A, indicating that the coated surface condition was excellent.
- Example 7 Industrial X-ray photosensitive material
- a sample was prepared in which the coating aid-4 and coating aid-5 (total of 1 part by mass) in the surface protective layer of Example Sample No. 14 described in JP 2009-86332 A were replaced with a compound A1-1Na (10 parts by mass).
- the surface condition of the obtained sample was evaluated using the same criteria as in Example 5, and the evaluation result was A, indicating that the coated surface condition was excellent.
- Example 8 Thermal recording material
- the N-propyl-N-polyoxyethylene-perfluorooctanesulfonic acid amide sodium butylsulfonate and potassium perfluorooctanesulfonate (total of 1 part by mass) in the BPC layer (back protective layer) were replaced with a combined compound A1-1Na (10 parts by mass).
Landscapes
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Organic Chemistry (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
Abstract
Description
本開示は、イオン性化合物、組成物、機能性材料、ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料、及び、拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料に関する。 This disclosure relates to ionic compounds, compositions, functional materials, silver halide photographic materials, and diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic materials.
ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料においてユーザーベネフィットを高めるために近年著しい高感度化が達成されてきた。またハロゲン化銀写真感光材料はその製造工程、撮影工程、処理工程に関して高速化、自動化が進められており、各種のローラーや機器との接触或いは感光材料同士の接触摩擦などに耐える性能が必要とされる。感光材料は一般に電気絶縁性の支持体及び写真乳剤層から構成されている。そのため感光材料の製造工程中や使用時に同種又は異種物質の表面との接触、剥離摩擦などにより静電電荷が蓄積され易い。
このように現像前に静電電荷が蓄積されると、この電荷の放電による発光により感光層が感光し、現像処理した後に、いわゆるスタチックカブリを生ずる。また蓄積された静電電荷は感光材料へのゴミの付着などの故障を誘起する原因ともなる。
In recent years, significant increases in sensitivity have been achieved in silver halide photographic materials to enhance user benefits. Furthermore, as the manufacturing, exposure, and processing processes of silver halide photographic materials become faster and more automated, they are required to be able to withstand contact with various rollers and equipment, as well as friction between materials. Photosensitive materials generally consist of an electrically insulating support and a photographic emulsion layer. Therefore, electrostatic charges are likely to accumulate during the manufacturing process and use of the materials due to contact with the surfaces of similar or different materials, friction from peeling, and other factors.
If electrostatic charges accumulate before development, the photosensitive layer is exposed to light due to the discharge of these charges, resulting in static fogging after development. The accumulated electrostatic charges can also cause problems such as dust adhesion to the photosensitive material.
従来のケイ素化合物としては、例えば非特許文献1、非特許文献2又は特許文献1に記載のケイ素化合物などが知られている。 Conventional silicon compounds include, for example, the silicon compounds described in Non-Patent Document 1, Non-Patent Document 2, and Patent Document 1.
非特許文献1:Langmuir 2019, 35, 9785~9793
非特許文献2:Phys. Chem. Chem. Phys., 2017, 19, 23869~23877
Non-patent document 1: Langmuir 2019, 35, 9785-9793
Non-patent document 2: Phys. Chem. Chem. Phys., 2017, 19, 23869-23877
特許文献1:特開平6-25420号公報 Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-25420
本開示が解決しようとする課題は、新規なイオン性化合物を提供することである。
また、本開示が解決しようとする他の課題は、上記イオン性化合物を含む組成物、機能性材料、ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料又は拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料を提供することである。
The problem to be solved by the present disclosure is to provide a novel ionic compound.
Another problem to be solved by the present disclosure is to provide a composition, a functional material, a silver halide photographic light-sensitive material, or a diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material, each containing the ionic compound.
上記課題を解決するための手段には、以下の態様が含まれる。
<1> 下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物。
The means for solving the above problems include the following aspects.
<1> An ionic compound having an anion structure represented by the following formula 1:
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
<2> 式2で表される化合物である<1>に記載のイオン性化合物。 <2> The ionic compound according to <1>, which is a compound represented by formula 2.
式2中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表し、
M1は、1価~3価のカチオンを表し、
nはM1の原子価と等しい1~3の整数を表す。
In formula 2,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom;
M1 represents a monovalent to trivalent cation;
n represents an integer of 1 to 3, which is equal to the valence of M1 .
<3> 上記wが1である<1>又は<2>に記載のイオン性化合物。
<4> 上記式1で表されるアニオン構造が、下記式a-1、式a-2又は式a-3いずれかで表される構造である<1>又は<2>に記載のイオン性化合物。
<3> The ionic compound according to <1> or <2>, wherein w is 1.
<4> The ionic compound according to <1> or <2>, wherein the anion structure represented by the formula 1 is a structure represented by any one of the following formulas a-1, a-2, and a-3:
式a-1~式a-3中、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
LAは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、
bは、1又は2を表し、
RBは、水素原子又は炭化水素基を表し、
LBは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、複数のLBは同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Lc1単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、複数のLc1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Lc2は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
In formula a-1 to formula a-3,
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
L A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group;
b represents 1 or 2;
R B represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group;
L B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and multiple L Bs may be the same or different;
Lc 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and multiple Lc 1s may be the same or different;
Lc2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
<5> 上記Sil1が、下記式Si-1~式Si-4のいずれかで表される基である<1>又は<2>に記載のイオン性化合物。 <5> The ionic compound according to <1> or <2>, wherein Sil1 is a group represented by any one of the following formulae Si-1 to Si-4.
式Si-1~式Si-4中、
R1は、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
yは、2以上の整数を表し、
R2は、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR2は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
zは、2又は3を表し、
R3は、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR3は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
p及びqは、p≧1、q≧1かつp+q≧3を満たす整数を表し、
R4、R4a及びR4bは、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR4、R4a及びR4bは同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
*は、L1との結合位置を表す。
In formula Si-1 to formula Si-4,
R 1 represents a hydrocarbon group, and multiple R 1 may be the same or different;
y represents an integer of 2 or more;
R2 represents a hydrocarbon group, and multiple R2s may be the same or different;
z represents 2 or 3;
R3 represents a hydrocarbon group, and multiple R3s may be the same or different;
p and q represent integers satisfying p≧1, q≧1, and p+q≧3;
R 4 , R 4a and R 4b each represent a hydrocarbon group, and a plurality of R 4 s , R 4a and R 4b may be the same or different;
* indicates the bonding position to L1 .
<6> 下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物と、バインダーと、を含む組成物。 <6> A composition comprising an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1 and a binder.
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
<7> 支持体と、上記支持体上に、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物を含む層と、を有する機能性材料。 <7> A functional material having a support and a layer on the support, the layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
<8> 支持体と、上記支持体上に、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物を含む層と、を有するハロゲン化銀写真感光材料。 <8> A silver halide photographic material having a support and a layer on the support, the layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
<9> 支持体と、上記支持体上に、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物を含む層と、を有する拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料。 <9> A diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material having a support and a layer on the support containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
本開示によれば、新規なイオン性化合物を提供することができる。
また、本開示によれば、上記イオン性化合物を含む組成物、機能性材料、ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料又は拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料を提供することができる。
According to the present disclosure, a novel ionic compound can be provided.
Furthermore, according to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a composition, a functional material, a silver halide photographic light-sensitive material, or a diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material, each containing the ionic compound.
以下において、本開示の内容について詳細に説明する。以下に記載する構成要件の説明は、本開示の代表的な実施態様に基づいてなされることがあるが、本開示はそのような実施態様に限定されるものではない。
なお、本明細書において、数値範囲を示す「~」とはその前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用される。
本開示中に段階的に記載されている数値範囲において、一つの数値範囲で記載された上限値又は下限値は、他の段階的な記載の数値範囲の上限値又は下限値に置き換えてもよい。また、本開示中に記載されている数値範囲において、その数値範囲の上限値又は下限値は、実施例に示されている値に置き換えてもよい。
また、本明細書における基(原子団)の表記において、置換及び無置換を記していない表記は、置換基を有さないものと共に置換基を有するものをも包含するものである。例えば「アルキル基」とは、置換基を有さないアルキル基(無置換アルキル基)のみならず、置換基を有するアルキル基(置換アルキル基)をも包含するものである。
本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」は、アクリル及びメタクリルの両方を包含する概念で用いられる語であり、「(メタ)アクリロイル」は、アクリロイル及びメタクリロイルの両方を包含する概念として用いられる語である。
また、本明細書中の「工程」の用語は、独立した工程だけではなく、他の工程と明確に区別できない場合であっても、その工程の所期の目的が達成されれば本用語に含まれる。 また、本開示において、「質量%」と「重量%」とは同義であり、「質量部」と「重量部」とは同義である。
更に、本開示において、2以上の好ましい態様の組み合わせは、より好ましい態様である。
また、本開示における重量平均分子量(Mw)及び数平均分子量(Mn)は、特に断りのない限り、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー(GPC)によって測定される値である。
GPCによる測定は、測定装置として、HLC(登録商標)-8020GPC(東ソー(株)製)を用い、カラムとして、TSKgel(登録商標)Super Multipore HZ-H(4.6mmID×15cm、東ソー(株)製)を3本用い、溶離液として、THF(テトラヒドロフラン)を用いる。また、測定条件としては、試料濃度を0.45質量%、流速を0.35ml/min、サンプル注入量を10μL、及び測定温度を40℃とし、示差屈折率(RI)検出器を用いて行う。
検量線は、東ソー(株)の「標準試料TSK standard,polystyrene」:「F-40」、「F-20」、「F-4」、「F-1」、「A-5000」、「A-2500」、「A-1000」、及び「n-プロピルベンゼン」の8サンプルから作製する。
本開示において「全固形分」とは、組成物の全組成から溶剤を除いた成分の総質量をいう。また、「固形分」とは、上述のように、溶剤を除いた成分であり、例えば、25℃において固体であっても、液体であってもよい。
以下、本開示を詳細に説明する。
The present disclosure will be described in detail below. The following description of the components may be based on representative embodiments of the present disclosure, but the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments.
In this specification, the use of "to" to indicate a range of values means that the values before and after it are included as the lower and upper limits.
In the numerical ranges described in stages in this disclosure, the upper or lower limit value described in one numerical range may be replaced with the upper or lower limit value of another numerical range described in stages. Furthermore, in the numerical ranges described in this disclosure, the upper or lower limit value of that numerical range may be replaced with a value shown in the examples.
Furthermore, in the description of groups (atomic groups) in this specification, when a notation does not specify whether the group is substituted or unsubstituted, it encompasses both unsubstituted and substituted groups. For example, the term "alkyl group" encompasses not only alkyl groups without a substituent (unsubstituted alkyl groups) but also alkyl groups with a substituent (substituted alkyl groups).
In this specification, "(meth)acrylic" is a term used as a concept that includes both acrylic and methacrylic, and "(meth)acryloyl" is a term used as a concept that includes both acryloyl and methacryloyl.
Furthermore, the term "step" in this specification includes not only an independent step but also a step that cannot be clearly distinguished from other steps, as long as the intended purpose of the step is achieved. Furthermore, in this disclosure, "mass %" and "weight %" are synonymous, and "parts by mass" and "parts by weight" are synonymous.
Furthermore, in the present disclosure, a combination of two or more preferred aspects is a more preferred aspect.
Furthermore, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) and number average molecular weight (Mn) in the present disclosure are values measured by gel permeation chromatography (GPC) unless otherwise specified.
The GPC measurement was performed using an HLC (registered trademark)-8020GPC (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as the measuring device, three TSKgel (registered trademark) Super Multipore HZ-H columns (4.6 mm ID x 15 cm, manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) as the columns, and THF (tetrahydrofuran) as the eluent. The measurement conditions were a sample concentration of 0.45% by mass, a flow rate of 0.35 ml/min, a sample injection amount of 10 μL, and a measurement temperature of 40°C, and the measurement was performed using a refractive index (RI) detector.
The calibration curve is prepared from eight samples of "Standard Sample TSK Standard, Polystyrene" from Tosoh Corporation: "F-40", "F-20", "F-4", "F-1", "A-5000", "A-2500", "A-1000", and "n-propylbenzene".
In the present disclosure, the term "total solid content" refers to the total mass of the components excluding the solvent from the entire composition. As described above, the term "solid content" refers to the components excluding the solvent, and may be, for example, solid or liquid at 25°C.
The present disclosure will be described in detail below.
(イオン性化合物)
本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物である。
(ionic compounds)
The ionic compound according to the present disclosure is an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、上記式1で表される特定の分岐構造及びスルホネート基を有するアニオン構造を有しており、新規な化合物である。
また、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を膜又は層形成等に用いた場合、塗布面状にも優れる。
The ionic compound according to the present disclosure is a novel compound having a specific branched structure represented by the above formula 1 and an anionic structure having a sulfonate group.
Furthermore, when the ionic compound according to the present disclosure is used for forming a film or layer, the coated surface condition is also excellent.
式1におけるwは、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、1~8の整数であることが好ましく、1~4の整数であることがより好ましく、1又は2であることが更に好ましく、1であることが特に好ましい。
式1におけるxは、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、2~8の整数であることが好ましく、2~4の整数であることがより好ましく、2又は3であることが更に好ましく、2であることが特に好ましい。
In formula 1, w is preferably an integer of 1 to 8, more preferably an integer of 1 to 4, even more preferably 1 or 2, and particularly preferably 1, from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
In terms of water solubility and surfactant activity, x in formula 1 is preferably an integer of 2 to 8, more preferably an integer of 2 to 4, even more preferably 2 or 3, and particularly preferably 2.
式1におけるSil1のSi原子数は、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、3~20の整数であることが好ましく、3~12の整数であることがより好ましく、3~10の整数であることが更に好ましく、4~7の整数であることが特に好ましい。
上記Sil1は、L1とSi原子により結合していることが好ましい。
上記Sil1におけるSi原子上の置換基は、特に制限はないが、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、シリル基又はシロキシ基以外の基として、炭化水素基、又は、アルコキシ基であることが好ましく、炭化水素基であることがより好ましい。
上記炭化水素基としては、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、炭素数(「炭素原子数」ともいう。)1~6のアルキル基であることが好ましく、メチル基、エチル基又は炭素数3~6の分岐アルキル基であることがより好ましく、t-ブチル基又はメチル基が更に好ましく、メチル基が特に好ましい。
また、複数存在するSil1は、同じ基であることが好ましい。
The number of Si atoms in Sil 1 in Formula 1 is preferably an integer of 3 to 20, more preferably an integer of 3 to 12, still more preferably an integer of 3 to 10, and particularly preferably an integer of 4 to 7, from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
The above Sil 1 is preferably bonded to L 1 via a Si atom.
The substituent on the Si atom in the above Sil 1 is not particularly limited, but from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant activity, it is preferably a hydrocarbon group or an alkoxy group other than a silyl group or a siloxy group, and more preferably a hydrocarbon group.
From the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant activity, the hydrocarbon group is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms (also referred to as "number of carbon atoms"), more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, still more preferably a t-butyl group or a methyl group, and particularly preferably a methyl group.
In addition, it is preferable that a plurality of Sil 1 's are the same group.
上記Sil1は、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、下記式Si-1~式Si-4のいずれかで表される基であることが好ましく、下記式Si-3又は式Si-4のいずれかで表される基であることがより好ましい。 From the viewpoints of water solubility and surface activity, the above Sil 1 is preferably a group represented by any one of the following formulae Si-1 to Si-4, and more preferably a group represented by the following formulae Si-3 or Si-4.
式Si-1~式Si-4中、
R1は、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
yは、2以上の整数を表し、
R2は、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR2は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
zは、2又は3を表し、
R3は、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR3は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
p及びqは、p≧1、q≧1かつp+q≧3を満たす整数を表し、
R4、R4a及びR4bは、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR4、R4a及びR4bは同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
*は、L1との結合位置を表す。
In formula Si-1 to formula Si-4,
R 1 represents a hydrocarbon group, and multiple R 1 may be the same or different;
y represents an integer of 2 or more;
R2 represents a hydrocarbon group, and multiple R2s may be the same or different;
z represents 2 or 3;
R3 represents a hydrocarbon group, and multiple R3s may be the same or different;
p and q represent integers satisfying p≧1, q≧1, and p+q≧3;
R 4 , R 4a and R 4b each represent a hydrocarbon group, and a plurality of R 4 s , R 4a and R 4b may be the same or different;
* indicates the bonding position to L1 .
R1~R4、R4a及びR4bにおける炭化水素基としては、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、炭素数が1~6のアルキル基であることが好ましく、メチル基、エチル基又は炭素数3~6の分岐アルキル基であることがより好ましく、t-ブチル基又はメチル基が更に好ましく、メチル基が特に好ましい。
また、複数存在するR1~R4は、同じ基であることが好ましい。
更に、複数のR4a又はR4bが存在する場合、同じ基であることが好ましい。
式Si-2におけるyは、2~50の整数であることが好ましく、2~20の整数であることがより好ましく、2~10であることが更に好ましく、2であることが特に好ましい。
式Si-3におけるzは、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、2であることが好ましい。
式Si-4におけるpは、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、1又は2であることが好ましい。
式Si-4におけるqは、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、1又は2であることが好ましい。
また、上記p及びqは、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、p+q=3又はp+q=4を満たす整数であることが好ましい。
From the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant activity, the hydrocarbon group for R 1 to R 4 , R 4a , and R 4b is preferably an alkyl group having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, more preferably a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a branched alkyl group having 3 to 6 carbon atoms, still more preferably a t-butyl group or a methyl group, and particularly preferably a methyl group.
Furthermore, it is preferable that the plurality of R 1 to R 4 are the same group.
Furthermore, when a plurality of R 4a or R 4b are present, they are preferably the same group.
In formula Si-2, y is preferably an integer of 2 to 50, more preferably an integer of 2 to 20, even more preferably an integer of 2 to 10, and particularly preferably 2.
In view of water solubility and surfactant activity, z in formula Si-3 is preferably 2.
In the formula Si-4, p is preferably 1 or 2 from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
In the formula Si-4, q is preferably 1 or 2 from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
Moreover, from the viewpoint of water solubility and surfactant activity, the above p and q are preferably integers that satisfy p+q=3 or p+q=4.
式1におけるL1は、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、アルキレン基、又は、アルキレン基とポリアルキレンオキシ基とが結合した基であることが好ましく、アルキレン基、又は、アルキレン基とポリエチレンオキシ基とが結合した基であることがより好ましく、アルキレン基であることが特に好ましい。
上記アルキレン基は、炭素数2~10のアルキレン基であることがより好ましく、炭素数2~4のアルキレン基であることが更に好ましく、炭素数2又は3のアルキレン基であることが特に好ましい。
また、複数存在するL1は、同じ基であることが好ましい。
From the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant activity, L1 in Formula 1 is preferably an alkylene group or a group in which an alkylene group is bonded to a polyalkyleneoxy group, more preferably an alkylene group or a group in which an alkylene group is bonded to a polyethyleneoxy group, and particularly preferably an alkylene group.
The alkylene group is more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 10 carbon atoms, even more preferably an alkylene group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms, and particularly preferably an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms.
In addition, it is preferable that a plurality of L 1s are the same group.
式1におけるRの炭素数は、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、2~20であることが好ましく、3~15であることがより好ましく、4~10であることが更に好ましく、4~6であることが特に好ましい。
また、式1におけるRは、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、酸素原子を有する基であることが好ましく、エステル結合及びエーテル結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の結合を有する基であることがより好ましく、エステル結合及びエーテル結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の結合を2以上有する基であることが更に好ましく、エステル結合及びエーテル結合よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の結合を2以上12以下有する基であることが特に好ましい。
また、式1におけるRとしては、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、下記に示す基であることが好ましい。
The number of carbon atoms in R in Formula 1 is preferably 2 to 20, more preferably 3 to 15, even more preferably 4 to 10, and particularly preferably 4 to 6, from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
Furthermore, from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant activity, R in Formula 1 is preferably a group having an oxygen atom, more preferably a group having at least one bond selected from the group consisting of an ester bond and an ether bond, still more preferably a group having two or more of at least one bond selected from the group consisting of an ester bond and an ether bond, and particularly preferably a group having 2 to 12 of at least one bond selected from the group consisting of an ester bond and an ether bond.
Furthermore, from the viewpoint of water solubility and surfactant activity, R in formula 1 is preferably a group shown below.
上記基において、#はL1との結合位置を表し、##はSO3 -との結合位置を表す。 In the above groups, # represents the bonding position to L1 , and ## represents the bonding position to SO 3 — .
上記式1で表されるアニオン構造は、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、下記式a-1、式a-2又は式a-3いずれかで表される構造であることが好ましく、下記式a-1又は式a-2で表される構造であることがより好ましく、下記式a-1で表される構造であることが特に好ましい。 From the standpoint of water solubility and surfactant activity, the anion structure represented by the above formula 1 is preferably a structure represented by any of the following formulas a-1, a-2, or a-3, more preferably a structure represented by the following formula a-1 or a-2, and particularly preferably a structure represented by the following formula a-1.
式a-1~式a-3中、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
LAは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、
bは、1又は2を表し、
RBは、水素原子又は炭化水素基を表し、
LBは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、複数のLBは同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Lc1は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、複数のLc1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Lc2は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。
In formula a-1 to formula a-3,
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
L A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group;
b represents 1 or 2;
R B represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group;
L B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and multiple L Bs may be the same or different;
Lc 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and multiple Lc 1s may be the same or different;
Lc2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
式a-1~式a-3におけるSil1及びL1は、式1におけるSil1及びL1とそれぞれ同義であり、好ましい態様もそれぞれ同様である。
式a-1におけるLAは、単結合又はアルキレン基であることが好ましく、単結合又はメチレン基であることがより好ましく、単結合であることが特に好ましい。
式a-1におけるbは、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、1であることが好ましい。
式a-2におけるRBは、水素原子又はアルキル基であることが好ましく、水素原子、メチル基又はエチル基であることがより好ましく、水素原子であることが特に好ましい。
式a-2におけるLBはそれぞれ独立に、単結合又はアルキレン基であることが好ましく、単結合又はメチレン基であることがより好ましい。
式a-3におけるLc1はそれぞれ独立に、単結合又はアルキレン基であることが好ましく、単結合であることがより好ましい。
式a-3におけるLc2は、単結合又はアルキレン基であることが好ましく、単結合であることがより好ましい。
Sil 1 and L 1 in formulae a-1 to a-3 have the same meanings as Sil 1 and L 1 in formula 1, respectively, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
L 1 A in formula a-1 is preferably a single bond or an alkylene group, more preferably a single bond or a methylene group, and particularly preferably a single bond.
In the formula a-1, b is preferably 1 from the viewpoints of water solubility and surfactant ability.
In formula a-2, R 1 B is preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a methyl group or an ethyl group, and particularly preferably a hydrogen atom.
In formula a-2, L 1 B each independently represents preferably a single bond or an alkylene group, more preferably a single bond or a methylene group.
In formula a-3, each L c1 is preferably independently a single bond or an alkylene group, and more preferably a single bond.
L c2 in formula a-3 is preferably a single bond or an alkylene group, more preferably a single bond.
本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、対カチオンを有する。
対カチオンとしては、金属カチオン、アンモニウムなどの有機カチオンのいずれでもよいが、金属カチオンが好ましく、2価又は1価の金属カチオンがより好ましく、1価の金属カチオンが更に好ましく、Na+又はK+が特に好ましい。
また、対カチオンとしては、アルカリ金属イオン、アルカリ土類金属イオン、Al3+、Fe2+、Fe3+又は第1級~第4級アンモニウムカチオンであることが好ましく、アルカリ金属イオン又はアルカリ土類金属イオンであることがより好ましく、アルカリ金属イオンであることが特に好ましい。
アルカリ金属としては、リチウム(Li)、ナトリウム(Na)、カリウム(K)、セシウム(Cs)が挙げられる。
アルカリ土類金属としては、カルシウム(Ca)、ストロンチウム(Sr)、バリウム(Ba)が挙げられる。
The ionic compounds according to the present disclosure have a counter cation.
The counter cation may be either a metal cation or an organic cation such as ammonium, but is preferably a metal cation, more preferably a divalent or monovalent metal cation, still more preferably a monovalent metal cation, and particularly preferably Na + or K + .
The counter cation is preferably an alkali metal ion, an alkaline earth metal ion, Al 3+ , Fe 2+ , Fe 3+ or a primary to quaternary ammonium cation, more preferably an alkali metal ion or an alkaline earth metal ion, and particularly preferably an alkali metal ion.
Examples of alkali metals include lithium (Li), sodium (Na), potassium (K), and cesium (Cs).
Examples of alkaline earth metals include calcium (Ca), strontium (Sr), and barium (Ba).
本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、水溶性及び界面活性能の観点から、式2で表される化合物であることが好ましい。 In terms of water solubility and surfactant activity, the ionic compound according to the present disclosure is preferably a compound represented by Formula 2.
式2中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表し、
M1は、1価~3価のカチオンを表し、
nはM1の原子価と等しい1~3の整数を表す。
In formula 2,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom;
M1 represents a monovalent to trivalent cation;
n represents an integer of 1 to 3, which is equal to the valence of M1 .
式2におけるw、x、Sil1、L1及びRは、式1におけるw、x、Sil1、L1及びRとそれぞれ同義であり、好ましい態様もそれぞれ同様である。
式2におけるM1は、1価~3価の金属カチオン又は第1級~第4級アンモニウムカチオンが好ましく、2価又は1価の金属カチオンがより好ましく、1価の金属カチオンが更に好ましく、Na+又はK+が特に好ましい。
式2におけるnは、1又は2が好ましく、1がより好ましい。
In formula 2, w, x, Sil 1 , L 1 and R have the same meanings as w, x, Sil 1 , L 1 and R in formula 1, respectively, and preferred embodiments are also the same.
M 1 in formula 2 is preferably a monovalent to trivalent metal cation or a primary to quaternary ammonium cation, more preferably a divalent or monovalent metal cation, even more preferably a monovalent metal cation, and particularly preferably Na + or K + .
In formula 2, n is preferably 1 or 2, and more preferably 1.
式1で表されるアニオン構造の具体例としては、下記A1-1~A1-14、A2-1~A2-8、A3-1、A3-2及びA4-1が好ましく挙げられる。なお、Meはメチル基を表す。
本開示に係るイオン性化合物の具体例としては、下記A1-1~A1-14、A2-1~A2-8、A3-1、A3-2及びA4-1のうちのいずれかのアニオン構造と、Na+、K+、Cs+、Mg2+、Fe3+又はテトラメチルアンモニウムを対カチオンとして有する化合物が好適に挙げられる。
また、後述において、例えば、A1-1のナトリウム塩等を、A1-1Na等と記載する場合もある。
Preferred specific examples of the anion structure represented by formula 1 include the following A1-1 to A1-14, A2-1 to A2-8, A3-1, A3-2, and A4-1, where Me represents a methyl group.
Suitable specific examples of ionic compounds according to the present disclosure include compounds having any of the anionic structures A1-1 to A1-14, A2-1 to A2-8, A3-1, A3-2, and A4-1 below, and Na + , K + , Cs + , Mg 2+ , Fe 3+ , or tetramethylammonium as a counter cation.
In the following description, for example, the sodium salt of A1-1 may be referred to as A1-1Na.
<用途>
本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、その用途に特に制限はないが、レベリング剤又は界面活性剤として好適に用いることができる。
また、本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、レベリング剤又は界面活性剤を用いる公知の用途に好適に用いることができる。
更に、本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、膜形成に好適に用いることができる。
また、本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、感光材料、表面改質剤、保護層形成用組成物、導電性層形成用組成物、下塗り層形成用組成物、圧力応答性材料、熱応答性材料、マイクロカプセル、ミクロゲル等に好適に用いることができる。
中でも、本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料、及び、拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料に特に好適に用いることができる。
<Application>
The ionic compound according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited in its use, but can be suitably used as a leveling agent or surfactant.
Furthermore, the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure can be suitably used in known applications that use leveling agents or surfactants.
Furthermore, the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure can be suitably used for film formation.
In addition, the ionic compound according to the present disclosure can be suitably used in photosensitive materials, surface modifiers, compositions for forming protective layers, compositions for forming conductive layers, compositions for forming undercoat layers, pressure-responsive materials, heat-responsive materials, microcapsules, microgels, and the like.
In particular, the ionic compound according to the present disclosure can be suitably used in silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials and diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials.
(組成物)
本開示に係る組成物は、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物(本開示に係るイオン性化合物)と、バインダーと、を含む。
(composition)
The composition according to the present disclosure includes an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1 (ionic compound according to the present disclosure) and a binder.
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
本開示に係る組成物における上記イオン性化合物の好ましい態様は、上述した本開示に係るイオン性化合物の好ましい態様と同様である。
本開示に係る組成物において、本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、1種単独で含有していても、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
本開示に係る組成物における本開示に係るイオン性化合物の含有量は、その用途に応じて適宜選択すればよいが、組成物の全固形分に対し、0.0001質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~10質量%であることが特に好ましい。
Preferred aspects of the ionic compound in the composition according to the present disclosure are the same as the preferred aspects of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure described above.
The composition according to the present disclosure may contain one type of ionic compound according to the present disclosure alone, or may contain two or more types of ionic compounds according to the present disclosure.
The content of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure in the composition according to the present disclosure may be selected appropriately depending on the application, but is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 20% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, relative to the total solid content of the composition.
<バインダー>
本開示に係る組成物は、バインダーを含む。
バインダーとしては、特に制限はなく、用途に応じて適宜選択すればよく、また、公知のバインダーポリマー及び公知のモノマー(重合性化合物)等を用いることができる。
<Binder>
The composition according to the present disclosure includes a binder.
The binder is not particularly limited and may be appropriately selected depending on the application. Known binder polymers and known monomers (polymerizable compounds) can be used.
バインダーポリマーとしては、例えば、エポキシ樹脂、ジアリルフタレート樹脂、シリコーン樹脂、フェノール樹脂、不飽和ポリエステル樹脂、ポリイミド樹脂、ポリウレタン樹脂、メラミン樹脂、ユリア樹脂、アイオノマー樹脂、エチレンエチルアクリレート樹脂、アクリロニトリルアクリレートスチレン共重合樹脂、アクリロニトリルスチレン樹脂、アクリロニトリル塩化ポリエチレンスチレン共重合樹脂、エチレン酢ビ樹脂、エチレンビニルアルコール共重合樹脂、アクリロニトリルブタジエンスチレン共重合樹脂、塩化ビニル樹脂、塩素化ポリエチレン樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニリデン樹脂、酢酸セルロース樹脂、フッ素樹脂、ポリオキシメチレン樹脂、ポリアミド樹脂、ポリアリレート樹脂、熱可塑性ポリウレタンエラストマー、ポリエーテルエーテルケトン樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン樹脂、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリカーボネート樹脂、ポリスチレン、ポリスチレンマレイン酸共重合樹脂、ポリスチレンアクリル酸共重合樹脂、ポリフェニレンエーテル樹脂、ポリフェニレンサルファイド樹脂、ポリブタジエン樹脂、ポリブチレンテレフタレート樹脂、アクリル樹脂、メタクリル樹脂、メチルペンテン樹脂、ポリ乳酸、ポリブチレンサクシネート樹脂、ブチラール樹脂、ホルマール樹脂、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルピロリドン、エチルセルロース、カルボキシメチルセルロース、ゼラチン、及び、これらの共重合樹脂が挙げられる。 Binder polymers include, for example, epoxy resin, diallyl phthalate resin, silicone resin, phenolic resin, unsaturated polyester resin, polyimide resin, polyurethane resin, melamine resin, urea resin, ionomer resin, ethylene ethyl acrylate resin, acrylonitrile acrylate styrene copolymer resin, acrylonitrile styrene resin, acrylonitrile chlorinated polyethylene styrene copolymer resin, ethylene vinyl acetate resin, ethylene vinyl alcohol copolymer resin, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene copolymer resin, vinyl chloride resin, chlorinated polyethylene resin, polyvinylidene chloride resin, cellulose acetate resin, fluororesin, polyoxymethylene resin, polyamide resin, poly Examples of such resins include arylate resins, thermoplastic polyurethane elastomers, polyether ether ketone resins, polyether sulfone resins, polyethylene, polypropylene, polycarbonate resins, polystyrene, polystyrene-maleic acid copolymer resins, polystyrene-acrylic acid copolymer resins, polyphenylene ether resins, polyphenylene sulfide resins, polybutadiene resins, polybutylene terephthalate resins, acrylic resins, methacrylic resins, methylpentene resins, polylactic acid, polybutylene succinate resins, butyral resins, formal resins, polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinylpyrrolidone, ethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, gelatin, and copolymer resins thereof.
重合性化合物(モノマー)としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル系モノマー、エポキシ系モノマー、オキセタニル系モノマー、ビニル系モノマー等が挙げられる。
(メタ)アクリル系モノマーとしては、特に制限はなく、公知の(メタ)アクリレート化合物、(メタ)アクリルアミド化合物、(メタ)アクリル酸、(メタ)アクリロニトリル等が挙げられる。
具体的には、例えば、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、エチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、n-プロピル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、t-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート等のアルキル(メタ)アクリレート;ヒドロキシメチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、4-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヒドロキシペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ヒドロキシヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート等のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート;ジメチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ジエチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート、t-ブチルアミノエチル(メタ)アクリレート等のアルキルアミノアルキル(メタ)アクリレート;ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等の芳香環含有(メタ)アクリレート;スチレン、α-メチルスチレン、クロロスチレン等のスチレン類、シクロプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロブチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘプチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロオクチル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロノニル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロデシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、ノルボルニル(メタ)アクリレート、アダマンチル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンテニルオキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート等の脂環式(メタ)アクリレート;N-ヒドロキシメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、Nーヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリルアミド等のN-ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリルアミド;N-メトキシメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-エトキシメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(n-,イソ)ブトキシメチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-メトキシエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-エトキシエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、N-(n-、イソ)ブトキシエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド等のN-アルコキシアルキル(メタ)アクリルアミド、(メタ)アクリロニトリル、トリシクロデカンジメタノールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリシクロデカンジメナノールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,9-ノナンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンPO(プロピレンオキサイド)変性トリアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパンEO(エチレンオキサイド)変性トリアクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリメタクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラアクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールテトラメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールペンタメタクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサアクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサメタクリレート等が挙げられる。
Examples of the polymerizable compound (monomer) include (meth)acrylic monomers, epoxy monomers, oxetanyl monomers, and vinyl monomers.
The (meth)acrylic monomer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include known (meth)acrylate compounds, (meth)acrylamide compounds, (meth)acrylic acid, and (meth)acrylonitrile.
Specific examples include alkyl (meth)acrylates such as methyl (meth)acrylate, ethyl (meth)acrylate, isopropyl (meth)acrylate, n-propyl (meth)acrylate, n-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, t-butyl (meth)acrylate, hexyl (meth)acrylate, and ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate; hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, hydroxypentyl (meth)acrylate, and hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate; dimethylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate, diethylamino Alkylaminoalkyl (meth)acrylates such as ethyl (meth)acrylate and t-butylaminoethyl (meth)acrylate; aromatic ring-containing (meth)acrylates such as benzyl (meth)acrylate and phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate; styrenes such as styrene, α-methylstyrene and chlorostyrene, cyclopropyl (meth)acrylate, cyclobutyl (meth)acrylate, cyclopentyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, cycloheptyl (meth)acrylate, cyclooctyl (meth)acrylate, cyclononyl (meth)acrylate, cyclodecyl (meth)acrylate, isobornyl (meth)acrylate, norbornyl (meth)acrylate, adamantyl (meth)acrylate, dicyclopentanyl Alicyclic (meth)acrylates such as (meth)acrylate and dicyclopentenyloxyethyl (meth)acrylate; N-hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylamides such as N-hydroxymethyl (meth)acrylamide, N-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylamide and N-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylamide; N-alkoxyalkyl (meth)acrylamides such as N-methoxymethyl (meth)acrylamide, N-ethoxymethyl (meth)acrylamide, N-(n-,iso)butoxymethyl (meth)acrylamide, N-methoxyethyl (meth)acrylamide, N-ethoxyethyl (meth)acrylamide and N-(n-,iso)butoxyethyl (meth)acrylamide; (meth)acrylonitrile, tricyclodecane dimethanol di(meth)acrylamide; acrylate, tricyclodecane dimenanol di(meth)acrylate, 1,9-nonanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane triacrylate, trimethylolpropane PO (propylene oxide)-modified triacrylate, trimethylolpropane EO (ethylene oxide)-modified triacrylate, trimethylolpropane trimethacrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol tetraacrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, dipentaerythritol pentamethacrylate, dipentaerythritol hexaacrylate, and dipentaerythritol hexamethacrylate.
エポキシ系モノマーであるエポキシ基含有モノマーとしては、例えば、ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールF型エポキシ樹脂、臭素化ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールS型エポキシ樹脂、ジフェニルエーテル型エポキシ樹脂、ハイドロキノン型エポキシ樹脂、ナフタレン型エポキシ樹脂、ビフェニル型エポキシ樹脂、フルオレン型エポキシ樹脂、フェノールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、オルソクレゾールノボラック型エポキシ樹脂、トリスヒドロキシフェニルメタン型エポキシ樹脂、3官能型エポキシ樹脂、テトラフェニロールエタン型エポキシ樹脂、ジシクロペンタジエンフェノール型エポキシ樹脂、水添ビスフェノールA型エポキシ樹脂、ビスフェノールA含核ポリオール型エポキシ樹脂、ポリプロピレングリコール型エポキシ樹脂、グリシジルエステル型エポキシ樹脂、グリシジルアミン型エポキシ樹脂、グリオキザール型エポキシ樹脂、脂環型エポキシ樹脂、複素環型エポキシ樹脂等が挙げられる。 Examples of epoxy group-containing monomers that are epoxy-based monomers include bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol F type epoxy resins, brominated bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol S type epoxy resins, diphenyl ether type epoxy resins, hydroquinone type epoxy resins, naphthalene type epoxy resins, biphenyl type epoxy resins, fluorene type epoxy resins, phenol novolac type epoxy resins, orthocresol novolac type epoxy resins, trishydroxyphenylmethane type epoxy resins, trifunctional type epoxy resins, tetraphenylolethane type epoxy resins, dicyclopentadiene phenol type epoxy resins, hydrogenated bisphenol A type epoxy resins, bisphenol A nucleus-containing polyol type epoxy resins, polypropylene glycol type epoxy resins, glycidyl ester type epoxy resins, glycidyl amine type epoxy resins, glyoxal type epoxy resins, alicyclic type epoxy resins, and heterocyclic type epoxy resins.
本開示に係る組成物において、バインダーを、1種単独で含有していてもよいし、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
本開示に係る組成物におけるバインダーの含有量は、その用途に応じて適宜選択すればよいが、組成物の全固形分に対し、1質量%~99質量%であることが好ましく、5質量%~90質量%であることがより好ましく、10質量%~80質量%であることが特に好ましい。
また、本開示に係る組成物中にバインダー以外に後述する他の添加剤などを含む場合には、所望の機能性フィルムが形成されるために十分な比率のバインダーを含めばよい。その場合にはバインダーの含有率は、組成物の全固形分に対し、0.5質量%~98質量%であることが好ましく、2質量%~60質量%であることがより好ましく、2質量%~50質量%であってもよい。
The composition according to the present disclosure may contain one type of binder alone, or may contain two or more types of binders.
The content of the binder in the composition according to the present disclosure may be appropriately selected depending on the application, but is preferably 1% by mass to 99% by mass, more preferably 5% by mass to 90% by mass, and particularly preferably 10% by mass to 80% by mass, relative to the total solid content of the composition.
Furthermore, when the composition according to the present disclosure contains other additives other than the binder, as described below, the binder should be contained in a proportion sufficient to form the desired functional film. In this case, the binder content is preferably 0.5% by mass to 98% by mass, more preferably 2% by mass to 60% by mass, and may be 2% by mass to 50% by mass, based on the total solid content of the composition.
<重合開始剤>
本開示に係る組成物は、重合開始剤を含んでいてもよい。
中でも、上記重合性化合物を含む場合、重合開始剤を含むことが好ましい。
重合開始剤としては、光重合開始剤、熱重合開始剤が挙げられる。
光重合開始剤としては、光ラジカル重合開始剤、光カチオン重合開始剤が挙げられる。
<Polymerization initiator>
The composition according to the present disclosure may also include a polymerization initiator.
In particular, when the polymerizable compound is contained, it is preferable to contain a polymerization initiator.
Examples of the polymerization initiator include a photopolymerization initiator and a thermal polymerization initiator.
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include a photoradical polymerization initiator and a photocationic polymerization initiator.
光重合開始剤としては、例えば、ハロゲン化炭化水素誘導体(例えば、トリアジン骨格を有する化合物、オキサジアゾール骨格を有する化合物など)、アシルホスフィン化合物、ヘキサアリールビイミダゾール、オキシム化合物、有機過酸化物、チオ化合物、ケトン化合物、芳香族オニウム塩、α-ヒドロキシケトン化合物、α-アミノケトン化合物等が挙げられる。
熱重合開始剤としては、例えば、ジアゾ化合物、過酸化物及びオニウム塩化合物等が挙げられる。
Examples of the photopolymerization initiator include halogenated hydrocarbon derivatives (e.g., compounds having a triazine skeleton, compounds having an oxadiazole skeleton, etc.), acylphosphine compounds, hexaarylbiimidazole, oxime compounds, organic peroxides, thio compounds, ketone compounds, aromatic onium salts, α-hydroxyketone compounds, and α-aminoketone compounds.
Examples of the thermal polymerization initiator include diazo compounds, peroxides, and onium salt compounds.
本開示に係る組成物において、重合開始剤を、1種単独で含有していてもよいし、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
本開示に係る組成物における重合開始剤の含有量は、その用途に応じて適宜選択すればよいが、組成物の全固形分に対し、0.1質量%~30質量%であることが好ましく、0.5質量%~25質量%であることがより好ましく、1質量%~20質量%であることが特に好ましい。
The composition according to the present disclosure may contain one type of polymerization initiator alone, or may contain two or more types of polymerization initiators.
The content of the polymerization initiator in the composition according to the present disclosure may be appropriately selected depending on the application, but is preferably 0.1% by mass to 30% by mass, more preferably 0.5% by mass to 25% by mass, and particularly preferably 1% by mass to 20% by mass, relative to the total solid content of the composition.
<硬化剤>
本開示に係る組成物は、硬化剤を含んでいてもよい。
例えば水酸基を有する樹脂に対する硬化剤としては、ポリイソシアネート類、イソシアネート化合物の部分縮合物、多量体や、多価アルコール、低分子量ポリエステル皮膜などとの付加物、イソシアネート基をフェノールなどのブロック化剤でブロックしたブロックポリイソシアネート化合物、メラミン樹脂、尿素樹脂、多塩基酸又はその無水物、などを挙げることができる。また、例えばエポキシ基を有する樹脂に対する硬化剤としては、脂肪族ポリアミン、芳香族ポリアミン、ポリアミドアミン、変性ポリアミン、ポリメルカプタン、酸無水物、フェノールレゾール、フェノールノボラック等が挙げられる。
<Curing agent>
The compositions according to the present disclosure may also include a curing agent.
For example, curing agents for resins having hydroxyl groups include polyisocyanates, partial condensates and polymers of isocyanate compounds, adducts with polyhydric alcohols, low-molecular-weight polyester coatings, blocked polyisocyanate compounds in which the isocyanate group is blocked with a blocking agent such as phenol, melamine resins, urea resins, polybasic acids or their anhydrides, etc. Furthermore, for example, curing agents for resins having epoxy groups include aliphatic polyamines, aromatic polyamines, polyamidoamines, modified polyamines, polymercaptans, acid anhydrides, phenol resols, phenol novolacs, etc.
<溶剤>
本開示に係る組成物は、塗布性等の観点から、溶剤を含んでいてもよい。
溶剤としては、水、有機溶剤、及び水と有機溶剤との混合溶剤等が挙げられる。
<Solvent>
The composition according to the present disclosure may contain a solvent from the viewpoint of coatability and the like.
Examples of the solvent include water, organic solvents, and mixed solvents of water and organic solvents.
水としては、蒸留水、イオン交換水等を使用できる。
有機溶剤は、液体組成物の用途又は目的等に応じて適宜選択することができる。有機溶剤としては、エステル、エーテル、ケトン、芳香族炭化水素、アルコール等が挙げられる。
As the water, distilled water, ion-exchanged water, etc. can be used.
The organic solvent can be appropriately selected depending on the use or purpose of the liquid composition, etc. Examples of the organic solvent include esters, ethers, ketones, aromatic hydrocarbons, and alcohols.
エステルとしては、例えば、酢酸エチル、酢酸-n-ブチル、酢酸イソブチル、ギ酸アミル、酢酸イソアミル、酢酸イソブチル、プロピオン酸ブチル、酪酸イソプロピル、酪酸エチル、酪酸ブチル、乳酸メチル、乳酸エチル、オキシ酢酸アルキルエステル系溶剤(例:オキシ酢酸メチル、オキシ酢酸エチル、オキシ酢酸ブチル(具体的には、メトキシ酢酸メチル、メトキシ酢酸エチル、メトキシ酢酸ブチル、エトキシ酢酸メチル、エトキシ酢酸エチル等が挙げられる。))、3-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル系溶剤(例:3-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-オキシプロピオン酸エチル等(具体的には、3-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、3-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等が挙げられる。))、2-オキシプロピオン酸アルキルエステル系溶剤(例:2-オキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-オキシプロピオン酸プロピル等(具体的には、2-メトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸エチル、2-メトキシプロピオン酸プロピル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシプロピオン酸エチル等が挙げられる。))、2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸アルキルエステル系溶剤(2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-オキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル(具体的には、2-メトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸メチル、2-エトキシ-2-メチルプロピオン酸エチル等が挙げられる。))、ピルビン酸メチル、ピルビン酸エチル、ピルビン酸プロピル、アセト酢酸メチル、アセト酢酸エチル、2-オキソブタン酸メチル、2-オキソブタン酸エチル、酢酸シクロヘキシル、プロピオン酸1-メチル-2-メトキシエチル等が挙げられる。 Examples of esters include ethyl acetate, n-butyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, amyl formate, isoamyl acetate, isobutyl acetate, butyl propionate, isopropyl butyrate, ethyl butyrate, butyl butyrate, methyl lactate, ethyl lactate, alkyl oxyacetate solvents (e.g., methyl oxyacetate, ethyl oxyacetate, butyl oxyacetate (specifically, methyl methoxyacetate, ethyl methoxyacetate, butyl methoxyacetate, methyl ethoxyacetate, ethyl ethoxyacetate, etc.)), alkyl 3-oxypropionate solvents (e.g., methyl 3-oxypropionate, ethyl 3-oxypropionate (specifically, methyl 3-methoxypropionate, ethyl 3-methoxypropionate, methyl 3-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 3-ethoxypropionate, etc.)), and alkyl 2-oxypropionate solvents (e.g., 2-oxypropionate). Examples include methyl propionate, ethyl 2-oxypropionate, propyl 2-oxypropionate (specifically, methyl 2-methoxypropionate, ethyl 2-methoxypropionate, propyl 2-methoxypropionate, methyl 2-ethoxypropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxypropionate, etc.), 2-oxy-2-methylpropionic acid alkyl ester solvents (methyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-oxy-2-methylpropionate (specifically, methyl 2-methoxy-2-methylpropionate, ethyl 2-ethoxy-2-methylpropionate, etc.)), methyl pyruvate, ethyl pyruvate, propyl pyruvate, methyl acetoacetate, ethyl acetoacetate, methyl 2-oxobutanoate, ethyl 2-oxobutanoate, cyclohexyl acetate, and 1-methyl-2-methoxyethyl propionate.
エーテルとしては、例えば、ジエチレングリコールジメチルエーテル、テトラヒドロフラン、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、メチルセロソルブアセテート、エチルセロソルブアセテート、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート(PEGMEAともいう。)、ジエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート(エチルカルビトールアセテートともいう。)、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテルアセテート(ブチルカルビトールアセテートともいう。)、プロピレングリコールモノエチルエーテルアセテート、プロピレングリコールモノプロピルエーテルアセテート等が挙げられる。
ケトンとしては、例えば、アセトン、メチルエチルケトン、シクロヘキサノン、2-ヘプタノン、3-ヘプタノン等が挙げられる。
芳香族炭化水素としては、例えば、トルエン、キシレン等が挙げられる。
Examples of ethers include diethylene glycol dimethyl ether, tetrahydrofuran, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, methyl cellosolve acetate, ethyl cellosolve acetate, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monoethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (also referred to as PEGMEA), diethylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate (also referred to as ethyl carbitol acetate), diethylene glycol monobutyl ether acetate (also referred to as butyl carbitol acetate), propylene glycol monoethyl ether acetate, and propylene glycol monopropyl ether acetate.
Examples of ketones include acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, cyclohexanone, 2-heptanone, and 3-heptanone.
Examples of aromatic hydrocarbons include toluene and xylene.
アルコールとしては、1価のアルコール(例えば、メタノール、エタノール、プロパノール、イソプロパノール、ブタノール、イソブタノール、sec-ブタノール、t-ブタノール、ペンタノール、ヘキサノール、シクロヘキサノール、ベンジルアルコール)、多価アルコール類(例えば、エチレングリコール、ジエチレングリコール、トリエチレングリコール、ポリエチレングリコール、プロピレングリコール、ジプロピレングリコール、ポリプロピレングリコール、ブチレングリコール、ヘキサンジオール、ペンタンジオール、グリセリン、ヘキサントリオール、チオジグリコール)、グリコール誘導体(例えば、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、プロピレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、ジプロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、トリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、エチレングリコールジアセテート、エチレングリコールモノメチルエーテルアセテート、トリエチレングリコールモノメチルエーテル、トリエチレングリコールモノエチルエーテル、トリエチレングリコールモノブチルエーテル、エチレングリコールモノフェニルエーテル)等が挙げられる。 Examples of alcohols include monohydric alcohols (e.g., methanol, ethanol, propanol, isopropanol, butanol, isobutanol, sec-butanol, t-butanol, pentanol, hexanol, cyclohexanol, and benzyl alcohol), polyhydric alcohols (e.g., ethylene glycol, diethylene glycol, triethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, propylene glycol, dipropylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, butylene glycol, hexanediol, pentanediol, glycerin, hexanetriol, and thiodiglycol), and glycol derivatives (e.g., ethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol monoethyl ether, ethylene glycol monobutyl ether, diethylene glycol monomethyl ether, diethylene glycol monobutyl ether, propylene glycol monomethyl ether, propylene glycol monobutyl ether, dipropylene glycol monomethyl ether, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, ethylene glycol diacetate, ethylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate, triethylene glycol monomethyl ether, triethylene glycol monoethyl ether, triethylene glycol monobutyl ether, and ethylene glycol monophenyl ether).
また、溶剤としては、レベリング性又は界面活性効果をより発揮する観点から、水、及び、水溶性溶剤よりなる群から選ばれた少なくとも1種の溶剤が好ましく挙げられる。
水溶性溶剤としては、上記のアルコール類に例示された物質に加え、アミン(例えば、エタノールアミン、ジエタノールアミン、トリエタノールアミン、N-メチルジエタノールアミン、N-エチルジエタノールアミン、モルホリン、N-エチルモルホリン、エチレンジアミン、ジエチレントリアミン、トリエチレンテトラミン、ポリエチレンイミン、テトラメチルプロピレンジアミン)、その他の極性溶剤(例えば、ホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド、N,N-ジメチルアセトアミド、ジメチルスルホキシド、スルホラン、2-ピロリドン、N-メチル-2-ピロリドン、N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン、2-オキサゾリドン、1,3-ジメチル-2-イミダゾリジノン、アセトニトリル、アセトン)等が挙げられる。
As the solvent, from the viewpoint of further exerting leveling properties or surfactant effects, at least one solvent selected from the group consisting of water and water-soluble solvents is preferred.
Examples of the water-soluble solvent include, in addition to the substances exemplified as the alcohols above, amines (e.g., ethanolamine, diethanolamine, triethanolamine, N-methyldiethanolamine, N-ethyldiethanolamine, morpholine, N-ethylmorpholine, ethylenediamine, diethylenetriamine, triethylenetetramine, polyethyleneimine, tetramethylpropylenediamine), other polar solvents (e.g., formamide, N,N-dimethylformamide, N,N-dimethylacetamide, dimethyl sulfoxide, sulfolane, 2-pyrrolidone, N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, 2-oxazolidone, 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, acetonitrile, acetone), and the like.
本開示に係る組成物において、溶剤を、1種単独で含有していてもよいし、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
本開示に係る組成物における溶剤の含有量は、その用途に応じて適宜選択すればよい。
The composition according to the present disclosure may contain one solvent alone, or two or more solvents.
The content of the solvent in the composition according to the present disclosure may be appropriately selected depending on the intended use.
<その他の添加剤>
本開示に係る組成物は、上述した各成分に加え、その用途に応じて、公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
その他の添加剤としては、例えば、着色剤、本開示に係るイオン性化合物以外の界面活性剤、本開示に係るイオン性化合物以外のレベリング剤、フィラー、褪色防止剤、乳化安定剤、浸透促進剤、紫外線吸収剤、防腐剤、防黴剤、pH調整剤、粘度調整剤、分散安定剤、防錆剤、キレート剤等の公知の添加剤が挙げられる。
<Other additives>
In addition to the components described above, the composition according to the present disclosure may contain known additives depending on the intended use.
Examples of other additives include known additives such as colorants, surfactants other than the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure, leveling agents other than the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure, fillers, anti-fading agents, emulsion stabilizers, penetration enhancers, ultraviolet absorbers, preservatives, antifungal agents, pH adjusters, viscosity adjusters, dispersion stabilizers, rust inhibitors, and chelating agents.
(機能性材料)
本開示に係る機能性材料は、支持体と、上記支持体上に、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物(本開示に係るイオン性化合物)を含む層と、を有する。
(Functional material)
The functional material according to the present disclosure has a support and a layer on the support, the layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1 (the ionic compound according to the present disclosure):
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
本開示に係る機能性材料としては、支持体上に本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含む層を有するものであれば、特に制限はないが、感光材料、保護層を有する材料、導電性層を有する材料、下塗り層を有する材料、圧力応答性材料、熱応答性材料等を好適に挙げることができる。
中でも、後述するハロゲン化銀写真感光材料、及び、拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料が特に好適に挙げられる。
The functional material according to the present disclosure is not particularly limited as long as it has a layer containing an ionic compound according to the present disclosure on a support, but suitable examples include photosensitive materials, materials having a protective layer, materials having a conductive layer, materials having an undercoat layer, pressure-responsive materials, and heat-responsive materials.
Among these, silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials and diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials, which will be described later, are particularly suitable.
<本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含む層>
本開示に係る機能性材料における上記イオン性化合物の好ましい態様は、上述した本開示に係るイオン性化合物の好ましい態様と同様である。
本開示に係る機能性材料において、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を、1種単独で含有していてもよいし、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含む層は、単独でも複数でもよい。機能材料が複数の層からなる場合には、これらの層は逐次に形成してもよいし、同時に重層塗布などにより形成してもよい。
本開示に係る機能性材料の上記層における本開示に係るイオン性化合物の含有量は、その用途に応じて適宜選択すればよいが、上記層の全質量に対し、0.0001質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~10質量%であることが特に好ましい。
<Layer containing an ionic compound according to the present disclosure>
Preferred aspects of the ionic compound in the functional material according to the present disclosure are the same as the preferred aspects of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure described above.
The functional material according to the present disclosure may contain one type of ionic compound according to the present disclosure alone, or may contain two or more types of ionic compounds according to the present disclosure.
The layer containing the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may be a single layer or multiple layers. When the functional material is composed of multiple layers, these layers may be formed sequentially or simultaneously by multilayer coating or the like.
The content of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure in the layer of the functional material according to the present disclosure may be selected appropriately depending on the application, but is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 20% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, relative to the total mass of the layer.
上記層は、その用途に応じ、公知の成分を含んでいてもよい。例えば、上述したバインダー、上述した重合開始剤を含んでいてもよいし、着色剤、本開示に係るイオン性化合物以外の界面活性剤、本開示に係るイオン性化合物以外のレベリング剤、フィラー、褪色防止剤、乳化安定剤、浸透促進剤、紫外線吸収剤、防腐剤、防黴剤、pH調整剤、粘度調整剤、分散安定剤、防錆剤、キレート剤等を含んでいてもよい。
また、後述するハロゲン化銀写真感光材料又は拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料に含まれる各種成分を含んでいてもよい。
The layer may contain known components depending on the intended use. For example, the layer may contain the above-mentioned binder or the above-mentioned polymerization initiator, or may contain a colorant, a surfactant other than the ionic compound according to the present disclosure, a leveling agent other than the ionic compound according to the present disclosure, a filler, an anti-fading agent, an emulsion stabilizer, a penetration enhancer, an ultraviolet absorber, an antiseptic, an antifungal agent, a pH adjuster, a viscosity adjuster, a dispersion stabilizer, a rust inhibitor, a chelating agent, or the like.
Furthermore, the composition may contain various components contained in silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials or diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials, which will be described later.
上記層の平均厚みは、特に制限はなく、用途に応じて選択すればよいが、0.01μm~1mmであることが好ましく、0.1μm~200μmであることがより好ましい。
なお、本開示において、平均厚みの測定方法は、以下のとおりである。
試料を、厚さ方向に平行な面で切断し、その断面において、5点以上厚みを測定し、それらの平均値を平均厚みとする。
本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、機能材料の最表層に層の平均膜厚より大きいマット剤を有する場合に特にハジキ防止や面状改良の効果を発現することができる。具体的には、マット剤の粒子サイズDと平均膜厚dの比率(D/d)は、好ましくは1.5~60であり、より好ましくは5~50であり、更に好ましくは10~50である。マット剤の含有量は、所望する表面の形状によって異なるが、10mg/m2~800mg/m2が好ましく、20mg/m2~600mg/m2がより好ましく、30mg/m2~500mg/m2が更に好ましい。このときバインダーは水溶性コロイドであることが好ましく、例えばゼラチン、カルボキシメチルセルロース、ポリビニルアルコールなどが挙げられる。
The average thickness of the layer is not particularly limited and may be selected depending on the application, but is preferably 0.01 μm to 1 mm, and more preferably 0.1 μm to 200 μm.
In the present disclosure, the average thickness is measured as follows.
The sample is cut in a plane parallel to the thickness direction, and the thickness is measured at five or more points on the cross section, and the average value of these measurements is taken as the average thickness.
The ionic compound according to the present disclosure can particularly exhibit the effects of preventing cissing and improving surface condition when the outermost layer of the functional material contains a matting agent having a thickness greater than the average thickness of the layer. Specifically, the ratio (D/d) of the particle size D of the matting agent to the average thickness d is preferably 1.5 to 60, more preferably 5 to 50, and even more preferably 10 to 50. The content of the matting agent varies depending on the desired surface shape, but is preferably 10 mg/m 2 to 800 mg/m 2 , more preferably 20 mg/m 2 to 600 mg/m 2 , and even more preferably 30 mg/m 2 to 500 mg/m 2. In this case, the binder is preferably a water-soluble colloid, such as gelatin, carboxymethyl cellulose, or polyvinyl alcohol.
<使用可能なシリコーン系界面活性剤>
本開示に係る機能性材料は、以下に示すシリコーン系界面活性剤を用いることができる。シリコーン系界面活性剤は、ポリシロキサン構造を有する界面活性剤を意味し、側鎖、末端等に、ポリエーテル変性基、ポリエーテル・アルキル共変性基、ポリグリセリン変性基、及びポリグリセリン・アルキル共変性基など、親水性基等の官能基、親水性ポリマー鎖等を有していてもよい。より具体的には、下記一般式(1)で表されるシリコーン系界面活性剤を含むことが好ましい。
<Usable silicone surfactants>
The functional material according to the present disclosure can use the silicone surfactants shown below. The silicone surfactant refers to a surfactant having a polysiloxane structure, and may have a functional group such as a hydrophilic group, a hydrophilic polymer chain, or the like, at a side chain, end, or the like, such as a polyether-modified group, a polyether-alkyl co-modified group, a polyglycerin-modified group, or a polyglycerin-alkyl co-modified group. More specifically, it is preferable to include a silicone surfactant represented by the following general formula (1):
式(1)中、mは1以上200以下であり、好ましくは2以上100以下、より好ましくは5以上50以下の整数であり、nは1以上100以下であり、好ましくは2以上80以下、より好ましくは4以上50以下の整数である。式(1)中、aは0以上40以下であり、好ましくは35以下、より好ましくは25以下、更に好ましくは15以下の整数であり、bは0以上40以下であり、好ましくは2以上35以下、より好ましくは4以上25以下、更に好ましくは6以上20以下の整数である。
(a+b)は、好ましくは1以上50以下、より好ましくは2以上40以下、更に好ましくは5以上30以下である。なお、m、n、a及びbの各構造単位はブロック共重合体でもランダム共重合体でもよい。
In formula (1), m is an integer of 1 or more and 200 or less, preferably an integer of 2 or more and 100 or less, and more preferably an integer of 5 or more and 50 or less, and n is an integer of 1 or more and 100 or less, preferably an integer of 2 or more and 80 or less, and more preferably an integer of 4 or more and 50 or less. In formula (1), a is an integer of 0 or more and 40 or less, preferably an integer of 35 or less, more preferably an integer of 25 or less, and even more preferably an integer of 15 or less, and b is an integer of 0 or more and 40 or less, preferably an integer of 2 or more and 35 or less, more preferably an integer of 4 or more and 25 or less, and even more preferably an integer of 6 or more and 20 or less.
(a+b) is preferably 1 or more and 50 or less, more preferably 2 or more and 40 or less, and even more preferably 5 or more and 30 or less. Each of the structural units m, n, a, and b may be a block copolymer or a random copolymer.
m及びnの比(m/n)は、塗布組成物の乾燥性の観点から、好ましくは1.5以上20以下、より好ましくは1.8以上15以下、更に好ましくは2.0以上10以下である。当該比(m/n)は、プロトン核磁気共鳴(1H-NMR)分光法により、変性されたSi元素と未変性のSi元素の比率から算出される。
[(a+b)/(m/n)]比は、塗布組成物の濡れ拡がり性を向上させる観点から、好ましくは1.6以上6.3以下、より好ましくは1.7以上5.5以下、更に好ましくは1.8以上5.0以下である。
From the viewpoint of drying properties of the coating composition, the ratio of m to n (m/n) is preferably 1.5 or more and 20 or less, more preferably 1.8 or more and 15 or less, and even more preferably 2.0 or more and 10 or less. The ratio (m/n) is calculated from the ratio of modified Si element to unmodified Si element by proton nuclear magnetic resonance ( 1 H-NMR) spectroscopy.
From the viewpoint of improving the wetting and spreading properties of the coating composition, the ratio [(a+b)/(m/n)] is preferably 1.6 or more and 6.3 or less, more preferably 1.7 or more and 5.5 or less, and even more preferably 1.8 or more and 5.0 or less.
一般式(1)中のRは、Rは水素原子又はアルキル基を示し、好ましくは水素原子又は炭素数1~15のアルキル基、より好ましくは水素原子又は炭素数1~8のアルキル基、更に好ましくは水素原子又は炭素数1~3のアルキル基、より更に好ましくはメチル基である。 In general formula (1), R represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group, preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 15 carbon atoms, more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 8 carbon atoms, even more preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and even more preferably a methyl group.
一般式(1)で表されるポリエーテル変性シリコーン系界面活性剤としては、PEG-3ジメチコン、PEG-9ジメチコン、PEG-9PEG-9ジメチコン、PEG-9メチルエーテルジメチコン、PEG-10ジメチコン、PEG-11メチルエーテルジメチコン、PEG/PPG-20/22ブチルエーテルジメチコン、PEG-32メチルエーテルジメチコン、PEG-9ポリジメチルシロキシエチルジメチコン、ラウリルPEG-9ポリジメチルシロキシエチルジメチコン、ジメチコン/(PEG-10/15))クロスポリマー、(PEG-15/ラウリルポリジメチルシロキシエチルジメチコン)クロスポリマー等が挙げられる。 Examples of polyether-modified silicone surfactants represented by general formula (1) include PEG-3 dimethicone, PEG-9 dimethicone, PEG-9PEG-9 dimethicone, PEG-9 methyl ether dimethicone, PEG-10 dimethicone, PEG-11 methyl ether dimethicone, PEG/PPG-20/22 butyl ether dimethicone, PEG-32 methyl ether dimethicone, PEG-9 polydimethylsiloxyethyl dimethicone, lauryl PEG-9 polydimethylsiloxyethyl dimethicone, dimethicone/(PEG-10/15) crosspolymer, and (PEG-15/lauryl polydimethylsiloxyethyl dimethicone) crosspolymer.
シリコーン系界面活性剤の市販品としては、例えば、BYK-302、BYK-306、BYK-307、BYK-326、BYK-333、 BYK-341、BYK-345、BYK-346、BYK-347、BYK-348、BYK-379、BYK-3451、BYK-3565、BYK-UV3530(以上商品名、ビックケミー・ジャパン株式会社製)、KF-351A、KF-352A、KF-353、KF-354L、KF-355A、KF-615A、KF-618、KF-642、KF-643、KF-945、KF-640、KF- 642、KF-643、KF-6020、X-22-4515、KF-6011、KF- 6012、KF-6013、KF-6015、KF-6017、KF-6028、KF-6038、KF-6043、KP-101,KP-104,KP-105,KP-106,KP-109、KP-110、KP-112、KP-118、KP-120、KP-121、KP-124、KP-125、KP-341(以上商品名、信越化学工業株式会社製)、SAG503A、SAG014(以上商品名、日信化学工業株式会社製)、TEGO WET240、TEGO WET270(以上商品名、エボニック社製)、EMALEX-SS-5602、SS-1906EX(以上商品名、日本エマルジョン株式会社)、FZ-2105、FZ-2118、FZ-2154、FZ-2161、FZ-2162、FZ-2163、FZ-2164(以上商品名、東レ・ダウコーニング・シリコーン株式会社)、BYK-33、BYK-387(以上商品名、ビックケミー株式会社)、TSF4440、TSF4452、TSF4453(以上商品名、東芝シリコン株式会社)等が挙げられる。 Commercially available silicone surfactants include, for example, BYK-302, BYK-306, BYK-307, BYK-326, BYK-333, BYK-341, BYK-345, BYK-346, BYK-347, BYK-348, BYK-379, BYK-3451, BYK-3565, BYK-UV3530 (all trade names, manufactured by BYK Japan Co., Ltd.), KF-351A, KF-352A, KF -353, KF-354L, KF-355A, KF-615A, KF-618, KF-642, KF-643, KF-945, KF-640, KF-642, KF-643, KF-6020, X-22- 4515, KF-6011, KF-6012, KF-6013, KF-6015, KF-6017, KF-6028, KF-6038, KF-6043, KP-101, KP-104, KP-105, KP -106, KP-109, KP-110, KP-112, KP-118, KP-120, KP-121, KP-124, KP-125, KP-341 (all trade names, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.), SAG503A, SAG014 (all trade names, manufactured by Nissin Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.), TEGO WET240, TEGO WET270 (all trade names, manufactured by Evonik), EMALEX-SS-5602, SS-1906EX ( Examples include FZ-2105, FZ-2118, FZ-2154, FZ-2161, FZ-2162, FZ-2163, FZ-2164 (all trade names, Toray Dow Corning Silicone Co., Ltd.), BYK-33, BYK-387 (all trade names, BYK-Chemie Co., Ltd.), TSF4440, TSF4452, TSF4453 (all trade names, Toshiba Silicon Co., Ltd.), etc.
<支持体>
本開示に係る機能性材料は、支持体を有する。
支持体としては、例えば、金属板、ガラス板、樹脂板、樹脂フィルム、紙支持体又は金属箔等が挙げられる。また、種々の機能層を有する積層体であってもよい。
また、支持体は、表面処理されていてもよい。
支持体の平均厚みは、特に制限はないが、0.1μm以上10cm以下であることが好ましく、1μm以上1mm以下であることがより好ましい。
<Support>
The functional material according to the present disclosure has a support.
Examples of the support include a metal plate, a glass plate, a resin plate, a resin film, a paper support, a metal foil, etc. The support may also be a laminate having various functional layers.
The support may also be surface-treated.
The average thickness of the support is not particularly limited, but is preferably from 0.1 μm to 10 cm, and more preferably from 1 μm to 1 mm.
<その他の層>
本開示に係る機能性材料は、支持体と上記層との間、又は、支持体の上記層を有する側とは反対側に、用途に応じて、その他の層を有していてもよい。
その他の層としては、特に制限はなく、公知の用途における公知の層が挙げられる。
<Other demographics>
The functional material according to the present disclosure may have other layers between the support and the above layer, or on the side of the support opposite to the side having the above layer, depending on the application.
The other layers are not particularly limited, and include known layers for known applications.
(ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料)
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、支持体と、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物(本開示に係るイオン性化合物)を含む層と、を有する。
(Silver halide photographic materials)
The silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure has a support and a layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1 (ionic compound according to the present disclosure).
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、光、レーザー又はX線照射に感光性のある材料であることが好ましく、例えば、白黒リバーサルフィルム、白黒ネガフィルム、カラーリバーサルフィルム、カラーネガフィルム、感光性写真成分がデジタルスキャンされたフィルム、白黒反転紙、白黒紙、カラー紙、反転カラー紙、感光性写真成分がデジタルデータベースからレーザー照射により感光された紙、熱により現像処理された感光材料から好適に選択される。 The silver halide photographic material is preferably a material that is sensitive to light, laser, or X-ray irradiation, and is suitably selected from, for example, black-and-white reversal film, black-and-white negative film, color reversal film, color negative film, film in which a photosensitive photographic component has been digitally scanned, black-and-white reversal paper, black-and-white paper, color paper, color reversal paper, paper in which a photosensitive photographic component has been exposed by laser irradiation from a digital database, and photosensitive material that has been developed by heat.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料における上記イオン性化合物の好ましい態様は、上述した本開示に係るイオン性化合物の好ましい態様と同様である。
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料において、本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、1種単独で含有していても、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の上記層における本開示に係るイオン性化合物の含有量は、その用途に応じて適宜選択すればよいが、上記層の全質量に対し、0.0001質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~10質量%であることが特に好ましい。
Preferred embodiments of the ionic compound in the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure are the same as the preferred embodiments of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure described above.
The silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may contain one type of ionic compound according to the present disclosure alone, or two or more types.
The content of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure in the layer of the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may be appropriately selected depending on the application, but is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 20% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, relative to the total mass of the layer.
上記層は、後述するハロゲン化銀写真感光材料を構成するいずれの層であってもよい。塗布によって層を形成する場合には、塗布時の最表層であることが好ましい。逐次に複数の層を積層する場合には、逐次の塗布においてそれぞれの最表層に用いることが好ましい。
また、本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料において、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含む層は、1層であっても、2層以上であってもよい。
上記層は、後述するハロゲン化銀写真感光材料に含まれる各種成分を含んでいてもよい。
The layer may be any layer constituting the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material described below. When a layer is formed by coating, it is preferably the outermost layer during coating. When multiple layers are laminated sequentially, it is preferably used as the outermost layer during each sequential coating.
Furthermore, in the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, the layer containing the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may be one layer or two or more layers.
The above layer may contain various components contained in silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials, which will be described later.
本開示において、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を写真感光材料の層に用いる場合、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含む水性塗布組成物は、本開示に係るイオン性化合物及び水のみからなっていてもよいし、目的に応じてその他の成分を適宜含んでいてもよい。 In the present disclosure, when an ionic compound according to the present disclosure is used in a layer of a photographic light-sensitive material, the aqueous coating composition containing the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may consist solely of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure and water, or may contain other components as appropriate depending on the purpose.
上記の水性塗布組成物において、本開示に係るイオン性化合物は1種類のみを用いてもよいし、また2種以上を混合して用いてもよい。
また、本開示に係るイオン性化合物とともに本開示に係るイオン性化合物以外の界面活性剤を用いてもよい。
使用可能な界面活性剤としては、アニオン系、カチオン系、ノニオン系の各種界面活性剤を挙げることができ、高分子界面活性剤であってもよく、本開示に係るイオン性化合物以外のシリコーン系界面活性剤であってもよい。このうち、アニオン系又はノニオン系活性剤がより好ましい。具体的には上述した本開示に係る機能性材料において用いることのできる化合物を挙げることができる。また、感光材料を対象とした際は、特にシリコーン系界面活性剤のうちアルキレンオキサイド基を有するノニオン系の界面活性剤は、感光材料の保存時の感度低下が少なく、特に拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料に用いたときに媒染阻害が少なく好ましい。
併用可能な界面活性剤の例としては、例えば特開昭62-215272(649~706頁)やリサーチ・ディスクロージャ(RD)Item17643,26~27頁(1978年12月)、同18716,650頁(1979年11月),同307105,875~876頁(1989年11月)等を挙げることができる。
In the aqueous coating composition, the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
Additionally, a surfactant other than the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may be used together with the ionic compound according to the present disclosure.
Usable surfactants include various anionic, cationic, and nonionic surfactants, and may be polymeric surfactants or silicone surfactants other than the ionic compounds according to the present disclosure. Among these, anionic or nonionic surfactants are more preferred. Specific examples include compounds that can be used in the functional materials according to the present disclosure. Furthermore, when targeting photosensitive materials, nonionic surfactants having an alkylene oxide group, among silicone surfactants, are preferred because they cause less sensitivity loss during storage of the photosensitive material and, particularly, cause less mordanting inhibition when used in diffusion transfer silver halide photographic photosensitive materials.
Examples of surfactants that can be used in combination include those described in JP-A-62-215272 (pp. 649-706), Research Disclosure (RD) Item 17643, pp. 26-27 (December 1978), RD Item 18716, p. 650 (November 1979), and RD 307105, p. 875-876 (November 1989).
上記水性塗布組成物中に含まれていてもよいものとして代表的なものはポリマー化合物である。ポリマー化合物は水溶性溶剤に可溶なポリマー(可溶性ポリマー)であってもよいし、ポリマーの水分散物(いわゆるポリマーラテックス)であってもよい。
可溶性ポリマーとしては特に制限はないが、例えばゼラチン、ポリビニルアルコール、カゼイン、寒天、アラビアゴム、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、メチルセルロース、カルボキシメチルセルロース等を挙げることができ、ポリマーラテックスとしては、種々のビニルモノマー(例えば、アクリレート誘導体、メタクリレート誘導体、アクリルアミド誘導体、メタクリルアミド誘導体、スチレン誘導体、共役ジエン誘導体、N-ビニル化合物、O-ビニル化合物、ビニルニトリル、その他のビニル化合物(例えばエチレン、塩化ビニリデン))の単独又は共重合体、縮合系ポリマーの分散物(例えばポリエステル、ポリウレタン、ポリカーボネート、ポリアミド)を挙げることができる。この種のポリマー化合物の詳細例については、例えば特開昭62-215272(707~763頁)やリサーチ・ディスクロージャ(RD)Item17643,651頁(1978年12月)、同18716,650頁(1979年11月),同307105,873~874頁(1989年11月)等を挙げることができる。
A typical example of a material that may be contained in the aqueous coating composition is a polymer compound. The polymer compound may be a polymer that is soluble in a water-soluble solvent (a soluble polymer) or an aqueous dispersion of a polymer (a so-called polymer latex).
The soluble polymer is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include gelatin, polyvinyl alcohol, casein, agar, gum arabic, hydroxyethyl cellulose, methyl cellulose, and carboxymethyl cellulose. Examples of the polymer latex include homopolymers or copolymers of various vinyl monomers (for example, acrylate derivatives, methacrylate derivatives, acrylamide derivatives, methacrylamide derivatives, styrene derivatives, conjugated diene derivatives, N-vinyl compounds, O-vinyl compounds, vinyl nitrile, and other vinyl compounds (for example, ethylene and vinylidene chloride)), and dispersions of condensation polymers (for example, polyesters, polyurethanes, polycarbonates, and polyamides). Detailed examples of this type of polymer compound can be found, for example, in JP-A-62-215272 (pp. 707-763), Research Disclosure (RD) Item 17643, p. 651 (December 1978), RD Item 18716, p. 650 (November 1979), and RD Item 307105, p. 873-874 (November 1989).
上記水性塗布組成物における溶剤としては、水単独であってもよいし、水以外の有機溶剤(例えば、メタノール、エタノール、イソプロピルアルコール、n-ブタノール、メチルセロソルブ、ジメチルホルムアミド、アセトン、酢酸エチル等)と水との混合溶剤であってもよい。水性塗布組成物中の溶剤における水の割合は、50質量%以上であることが好ましい。 The solvent in the aqueous coating composition may be water alone, or a mixed solvent of water and an organic solvent other than water (e.g., methanol, ethanol, isopropyl alcohol, n-butanol, methyl cellosolve, dimethylformamide, acetone, ethyl acetate, etc.). The proportion of water in the solvent in the aqueous coating composition is preferably 50% by mass or more.
上記水性塗布組成物中には、用いる写真感光材料の層に応じて種々の化合物を含んでいても良く、またそれらは媒体に溶解していてもよく、分散されていてもよい。それらの例としては、種々のカプラー、紫外線吸収剤、混色防止剤、スタチック防止剤、スカベンジャー、かぶり防止剤、硬膜剤、染料、防黴剤等を挙げることができる。また、写真感光材料に用いて、効果的な帯電防止能と塗布の均一性を得るためには、最上層の親水性コロイド層に用いるのが好ましい。 The above-mentioned aqueous coating composition may contain various compounds depending on the layer of the photographic material to be used, and these may be dissolved or dispersed in the medium. Examples of these include various couplers, ultraviolet absorbers, color mixing inhibitors, static inhibitors, scavengers, antifoggants, film hardeners, dyes, and antifungal agents. Furthermore, to obtain effective antistatic properties and coating uniformity when used in photographic materials, it is preferable to use it in the uppermost hydrophilic colloid layer.
この場合、上記層の塗布組成物中には、親水性コロイド(例えばゼラチン)及び本開示に係るイオン性化合物以外に、他の界面活性剤、マット剤、滑り剤、コロイダルシリカ、可塑剤等を含有することができる。 In this case, the coating composition for the layer may contain, in addition to the hydrophilic colloid (e.g., gelatin) and the ionic compound according to the present disclosure, other surfactants, matting agents, slipping agents, colloidal silica, plasticizers, etc.
本開示に係るイオン性化合物の使用量に特に制限はなく、また本開示に係るイオン性化合物の構造やその用途、水性組成物中に含まれる化合物の種類や量、溶剤の構成等によって、その使用量を任意に変えることができる。例えば、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を、本開示における好ましい態様である写真感光材料の最上層の親水性コロイド(ゼラチン)層用塗布液として用いる場合、塗布溶液中の濃度として0.003質量%~0.5質量%であることが好ましく、またゼラチン固形分に対しては0.03質量%~10質量%であることが好ましい。 There are no particular restrictions on the amount of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure used, and the amount can be freely changed depending on the structure and use of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure, the type and amount of compounds contained in the aqueous composition, the composition of the solvent, etc. For example, when the ionic compound according to the present disclosure is used as a coating solution for the hydrophilic colloid (gelatin) layer, which is the uppermost layer of a photographic light-sensitive material, which is a preferred embodiment of the present disclosure, the concentration in the coating solution is preferably 0.003% to 0.5% by mass, and preferably 0.03% to 10% by mass relative to the gelatin solids content.
本開示において、疎水性バインダー成分からなる層を写真感光材料が有する場合には、その層を作製するための組成物には本開示に係るイオン性化合物と疎水性バインダー成分とを有機溶剤とともに用いることができる。その場合の好ましい態様は、上述した本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含む層の好ましい態様と同様である。 In the present disclosure, when a photographic material has a layer comprising a hydrophobic binder component, the composition for producing that layer can contain an ionic compound according to the present disclosure and a hydrophobic binder component together with an organic solvent. In this case, the preferred embodiments are the same as those for the layer containing the ionic compound according to the present disclosure described above.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、支持体上に少なくとも1層の感光性層が設けられていればよい。
典型的な例としては、支持体上に、実質的に感色性は同じであるが感光度の異なる複数のハロゲン化銀乳剤層から成る感光性層を少なくとも1つ有するハロゲン化銀写真感光材料である。該感光性層は青色光、緑色光及び赤色光の何れかに感色性を有する単位感光性層であり、多層ハロゲン化銀カラー写真感光材料においては、一般に単位感光性層の配列が、支持体側から順に赤感色性層、緑感色性層、青感色性の順に設置される。しかし、目的に応じて上記設置順が逆であっても、また同一感色性層中に異なる感光性層が挟まれたような設置順をもとり得る。上記のハロゲン化銀感光性層の間及び最上層、最下層には非感光性層を設けてもよい。これらには、後述のカプラー、DIR化合物、混色防止剤等が含まれていてもよい。各単位感光性層を構成する複数のハロゲン化銀乳剤層は、DE1,121,470あるいはGB923,045に記載されているように高感度乳剤層、低感度乳剤層の2層を、支持体に向かって順次感光度が低くなる様に配列することが好ましい。また、特開昭57-112751号公報、同62-200350号公報、同62-206541号公報、同62-206543号公報に記載されているように支持体より離れた側に低感度乳剤層、支持体に近い側に高感度乳剤層を設置してもよい。
The silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may have at least one light-sensitive layer provided on a support.
A typical example is a silver halide photographic material having at least one light-sensitive layer composed of multiple silver halide emulsion layers with substantially the same color sensitivity but different photosensitivities on a support. The light-sensitive layer is a unit light-sensitive layer sensitive to either blue, green, or red light. In a multilayer silver halide color photographic material, the unit light-sensitive layers are generally arranged in the following order from the support side: red-sensitive layer, green-sensitive layer, and blue-sensitive layer. However, depending on the purpose, the above arrangement order may be reversed, or a different light-sensitive layer may be sandwiched between layers of the same color sensitivity. Light-insensitive layers may be arranged between the above silver halide light-sensitive layers, as well as in the top and bottom layers. These may contain couplers, DIR compounds, color-mixing inhibitors, etc., as described below. The plurality of silver halide emulsion layers constituting each unit photosensitive layer are preferably arranged in two layers, a high-sensitivity emulsion layer and a low-sensitivity emulsion layer, in order of decreasing sensitivity toward the support, as described in DE 1,121,470 or GB 923,045. Alternatively, a low-sensitivity emulsion layer may be arranged farther from the support and a high-sensitivity emulsion layer closer to the support, as described in JP-A Nos. 57-112751, 62-200350, 62-206541 and 62-206543.
具体例として支持体から最も遠い側から、低感度青感光性層(BL)/高感度青感光性層(BH)/高感度緑感光性層(GH)/低感度緑感光性層(GL)/高感度赤感光性層(RH)/低感度赤感光性層(RL)の順、BH/BL/GL/GH/RH/RLの順、又は、BH/BL/GH/GL/RL/RHの順等に設置することができる。 Specific examples include, from the side furthest from the support, the layers may be arranged in the following order: low-sensitivity blue-sensitive layer (BL)/high-sensitivity blue-sensitive layer (BH)/high-sensitivity green-sensitive layer (GH)/low-sensitivity green-sensitive layer (GL)/high-sensitivity red-sensitive layer (RH)/low-sensitivity red-sensitive layer (RL), or in the order BH/BL/GL/GH/RH/RL, or BH/BL/GH/GL/RL/RH.
また、特公昭55-34932号公報に記載されているように、支持体から最も遠い側から青感光性層/GH/RH/GL/RLの順に配列することもできる。また特開昭56-25738号公報、同62-63936号公報に記載されているように、支持体から最も遠い側から青感光性層/GL/RL/GH/RHの順に配列することもできる。また特公昭49-15495号公報に記載されているように上層を最も感光度の高いハロゲン化銀乳剤層、中層をそれよりも低い感光度のハロゲン化銀乳剤層、下層を中層よりも更に感光度の低いハロゲン化銀乳剤層を配置し、支持体に向かって感光度が順次低められた感光度の異なる3層から構成される配列が挙げられる。このような感光度の異なる3層から構成される場合でも、特開昭59-202464号公報に記載されているように、同一感色性層中において支持体より離れた側から中感度乳剤層/高感度乳剤層/低感度乳剤層の順に配置されてもよい。 Furthermore, as described in JP-B No. 55-34932, the layers can be arranged in the order of blue-sensitive layer/GH/RH/GL/RL from the side farthest from the support. Furthermore, as described in JP-A Nos. 56-25738 and 62-63936, the layers can be arranged in the order of blue-sensitive layer/GL/RL/GH/RH from the side farthest from the support. Another example is an arrangement composed of three layers with differing photosensitivities, with the photosensitivity decreasing sequentially toward the support, in which the upper layer is a silver halide emulsion layer with the highest photosensitivity, the middle layer is a silver halide emulsion layer with a lower photosensitivity, and the lower layer is a silver halide emulsion layer with an even lower photosensitivity than the middle layer, as described in JP-B No. 49-15495. Even when composed of three layers with different photosensitivities, the layers sensitive to the same color may be arranged in the following order from the side farthest from the support: medium-sensitivity emulsion layer, high-sensitivity emulsion layer, and low-sensitivity emulsion layer, as described in JP-A-59-202464.
その他、高感度乳剤層/低感度乳剤層/中感度乳剤層、あるいは低感度乳剤層/中感度乳剤層/高感度乳剤層の順に配置されていてもよい。また、4層以上の場合にも、上記の如く配列を変えてよい。色再現性を改良するために、米国特許第4,663,271号明細書、同4,705,744号明細書、同4,707,436号明細書、特開昭62-160448号公報、同63-89850号公報に記載の、BL,GL,RLなどの主感光層と分光感度分布が異なる重層効果のドナー層(CL)を主感光層に隣接又は近接して配置することが好ましい。 Alternatively, the layers may be arranged in the order of high-sensitivity emulsion layer/low-sensitivity emulsion layer/mid-sensitivity emulsion layer, or low-sensitivity emulsion layer/mid-sensitivity emulsion layer/high-sensitivity emulsion layer. Furthermore, even when there are four or more layers, the arrangement may be changed as described above. To improve color reproducibility, it is preferable to arrange a donor layer (CL) with a bilayer effect that has a different spectral sensitivity distribution from the main photosensitive layers such as BL, GL, and RL adjacent to or close to the main photosensitive layer, as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,663,271, 4,705,744, and 4,707,436, and JP-A Nos. 62-160448 and 63-89850.
本開示に用いられる好ましいハロゲン化銀は約30モル%以下のヨウ化銀を含む、ヨウ臭化銀、ヨウ塩化銀又はヨウ塩臭化銀である。特に好ましいのは約2モル%~約10モル%のヨウ化銀を含むヨウ臭化銀又はヨウ塩臭化銀である。 The preferred silver halide for use in this disclosure is silver iodobromide, silver iodochloride, or silver iodochlorobromide containing about 30 mol% or less of silver iodide. Particularly preferred is silver iodobromide or silver iodochlorobromide containing about 2 mol% to about 10 mol% of silver iodide.
写真乳剤中のハロゲン化銀粒子は、立方体、八面体、十四面体のような規則的な結晶を有するもの、球状、板状のような変則的な結晶形を有するもの、双晶面などの結晶欠陥を有するもの、あるいはそれらの複合形でもよい。ハロゲン化銀の粒径は、約0.2μm以下の粒子でも投影面積直径が約10μmに至るまでの大サイズ粒子でもよく、多分散乳剤でも単分散乳剤でもよい。 The silver halide grains in photographic emulsions may have regular crystals such as cubes, octahedrons, or tetradecahedrons; irregular crystal shapes such as spheres or plates; crystal defects such as twin planes; or a combination of these. The silver halide grain size may be grains of approximately 0.2 μm or less, or large grains with a projected area diameter of up to approximately 10 μm, and the emulsion may be either polydispersed or monodispersed.
本開示に使用できるハロゲン化銀写真乳剤は、例えばリサーチ・ディスクロージャ(以下、RDと略す)No.17643(1978年12月),22頁~23頁,“I.乳剤製造(Emulsion preparation and types)”、及び、同No.18716(1979年11月),648頁、同No.307105(1989年11月),863頁~865頁、グラフキデ著「写真の物理と化学」,ポールモンテル社刊(P.Glafkides,Chimie et Phisique Photographiques,Paul Montel,1967)、ダフィン著「写真乳剤化学」,フォーカルプレス社刊(G.F.Duffin,Photographic Emulsion Chemistry,Focal Press,1966)、ゼリクマンら著「写真乳剤の製造と塗布」、フォーカルプレス社刊(V.L.Zelikman, et al.,Making and Coating Photographic Emulsion,Focal Press,1964)などに記載された方法を用いて調製することができる。 Silver halide photographic emulsions that can be used in this disclosure are described, for example, in Research Disclosure (hereinafter abbreviated as RD) No. 17643 (December 1978), pp. 22-23, "I. Emulsion preparation and types," and in Research Disclosure No. 18716 (November 1979), p. 648, "I. Emulsion preparation and types." 307105 (November 1989), pp. 863-865, "Physics and Chemistry of Photography" by Glafkides, published by Paul Montel (P. Glafkides, Chimie et Physique Photographiques, Paul Montel, 1967), "Chemistry of Photographic Emulsions" by G.F. Duffin, published by Focal Press (G.F. Duffin, Photographic Emulsion Chemistry) They can be prepared using methods such as those described in "Photographic Emulsion Chemistry" by V.L. Zelikman et al., "Making and Coating Photographic Emulsions," Focal Press, 1964.
米国特許第3,574,628号明細書、同3,655,394号明細書、GB1,413,748に記載された単分散乳剤も好ましい。また、アスペクト比が約3以上であるような平板状粒子も本開示に使用できる。特に、経時保存性改良のために好ましくは、全投影面積の50%以上がアスペクト比8以上のハロゲン化銀平板粒子で占められる乳剤を用いることができる。アスペクト比の上限に特に制限はないが、30以下が好ましい。平板状粒子は、ガトフ著、フォトグラフィック・サイエンス・アンド・エンジニアリング(Gutoff, Photographic Science and Engineering)、第14巻248~257頁(1970年);米国特許第4,434,226号明細書、同4,414,310号明細書、同4,433,048号明細書、同4,439,520号明細書及びGB2,112,157に記載の方法により簡単に調製することができる。 Monodisperse emulsions such as those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,574,628, 3,655,394, and GB 1,413,748 are also preferred. Tabular grains having an aspect ratio of approximately 3 or more can also be used in the present disclosure. In particular, to improve storage stability, it is preferable to use emulsions in which 50% or more of the total projected area is accounted for by silver halide tabular grains having an aspect ratio of 8 or more. There is no particular upper limit to the aspect ratio, but a ratio of 30 or less is preferred. Tabular grains can be easily prepared by the methods described in Gutoff, Photographic Science and Engineering, Vol. 14, pp. 248-257 (1970); U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,434,226, 4,414,310, 4,433,048, 4,439,520, and GB 2,112,157.
結晶構造は一様なものでも、内部と外部とが異質なハロゲン組成からなるものでもよく、層状構造をなしていてもよい。エピタキシャル接合によって組成の異なるハロゲン化銀が接合されていてもよく、例えばロダン銀、酸化鉛などのハロゲン化銀以外の化合物と接合されていてもよい。また種々の結晶形の粒子の混合物を用いてもよい。 The crystal structure may be uniform, or the interior and exterior may have different halogen compositions, or may have a layered structure. Silver halides of different compositions may be joined by epitaxial junction, and may be joined with compounds other than silver halide, such as silver rhodanide or lead oxide. A mixture of grains with various crystal forms may also be used.
上記の乳剤は潜像を主として表面に形成する表面潜像型でも、粒子内部に形成する内部潜像型でも表面と内部のいずれにも潜像を有する型のいずれでもよいが、ネガ型の乳剤であることが必要である。内部潜像型のうち、特開昭63-264740号公報に記載のコア/シェル型内部潜像型乳剤であってもよく、この調製方法は特開昭59-133542号公報に記載されている。この乳剤のシェルの厚みは現像処理等によって異なるが、3nm~40nmが好ましく、5nm~20nmが特に好ましい。 The above emulsions may be of the surface latent image type, in which the latent image is formed primarily on the surface, or the internal latent image type, in which the latent image is formed inside the grains, or of the type having latent images both on the surface and inside, but they must be negative-working emulsions. Among the internal latent image types, the core/shell internal latent image type emulsions described in JP-A No. 63-264740 may also be used, and the preparation method for this is described in JP-A No. 59-133542. The shell thickness of this emulsion varies depending on the development process, etc., but is preferably 3 nm to 40 nm, with 5 nm to 20 nm being particularly preferred.
ハロゲン化銀乳剤は、通常、物理熟成、化学熟成及び分光増感を行ったものを使用する。このような工程で使用される添加剤はRDNo.17643、同No.18716及び同No.307105に記載されており、その該当箇所を後掲の表にまとめた。 Silver halide emulsions are usually used after physical ripening, chemical ripening, and spectral sensitization. Additives used in these processes are described in RD Nos. 17643, 18716, and 307105, and the relevant sections are summarized in the table below.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料には、感光性ハロゲン化銀乳剤の粒子サイズ、粒子サイズ分布、ハロゲン組成、粒子の形状、感度の少なくとも1つの特性の異なる2種類以上の乳剤を、同一層中に混合して使用することができる。米国特許第4,082,553号明細書に記載の粒子表面をかぶらせたハロゲン化銀粒子、米国特許第4,626,498号明細書、特開昭59-214852号公報に記載の粒子内部をかぶらせたハロゲン化銀粒子、コロイド銀を感光性ハロゲン化銀乳剤層及び/又は実質的に非感光性の親水性コロイド層に適用することが好ましい。粒子内部又は表面をかぶらせたハロゲン化銀粒子とは、感光材料の未露光部及び露光部を問わず、一様に(非像様に)現像が可能となるハロゲン化銀粒子のことをいい、その調製法は、米国特許第4,626,498号明細書、特開昭59-214852号公報に記載されている。粒子内部がかぶらされたコア/シェル型ハロゲン化銀粒子の内部核を形成するハロゲン化銀は、ハロゲン組成が異なっていてもよい。粒子内部又は表面をかぶらせたハロゲン化銀としては、塩化銀、塩臭化銀、沃臭化銀、塩沃臭化銀のいずれをも用いることができる。これらのかぶらされたハロゲン化銀粒子の平均粒子サイズとしては0.01μm~0.75μm、特に0.05μm~0.6μmが好ましい。また、粒子形状は規則的な粒子でもよく、多分散乳剤でもよいが、単分散性(ハロゲン化銀粒子の質量又は粒子数の少なくとも95%が平均粒子径の±40%以内の粒子径を有するもの)であることが好ましい。 The silver halide photographic material according to the present disclosure can use two or more types of emulsions that differ in at least one of the following characteristics in the same layer: grain size, grain size distribution, halogen composition, grain shape, and sensitivity. Surface-fogged silver halide grains, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,082,553, internally fogged silver halide grains, as described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,626,498 and JP-A-59-214852, and colloidal silver are preferably applied to a photosensitive silver halide emulsion layer and/or a substantially light-insensitive hydrophilic colloid layer. Internally or surface-fogged silver halide grains refer to silver halide grains that can be developed uniformly (non-imagewise) in both unexposed and exposed areas of the photosensitive material, and their preparation methods are described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,626,498 and JP-A-59-214852. The silver halide forming the inner core of the internally fogged core/shell silver halide grains may have a different halogen composition. The silver halide used to fog the interior or surface of the grains may be any of silver chloride, silver chlorobromide, silver iodobromide, and silver chloroiodobromide. The average grain size of these fogged silver halide grains is preferably 0.01 μm to 0.75 μm, and more preferably 0.05 μm to 0.6 μm. The grain shape may be regular or a polydisperse emulsion, but monodisperse (at least 95% of the silver halide grains by mass or number have a grain size within ±40% of the average grain size) is preferred.
本開示には、非感光性粒子状ハロゲン化銀を使用することが好ましい。非感光性粒子ハロゲン化銀とは、色素画像を得るための像様露光時においては感光せずに、その現像処理において実質的に現像されないハロゲン化銀粒子であり、あらかじめカブラされていないほうが好ましい。粒子状ハロゲン化銀は、臭化銀の含有率が0~100モル%であり、必要に応じて塩化銀及び/又は沃化銀を含有してもよい。好ましくは沃化銀を0.5~10モル%含有するものである。粒子状ハロゲン化銀は、平均粒径(投影面積の円相当直径の平均値)が0.01μm~0.5μmが好ましく、0.02μm~0.2μmがより好ましい。 In the present disclosure, it is preferable to use non-photosensitive particulate silver halide. Non-photosensitive particulate silver halide refers to silver halide grains that are not exposed to light during imagewise exposure to obtain a dye image and are not substantially developed during the subsequent development process; it is preferable that they are not pre-fogged. The particulate silver halide has a silver bromide content of 0 to 100 mol % and may contain silver chloride and/or silver iodide as needed. Preferably, it contains 0.5 to 10 mol % silver iodide. The particulate silver halide preferably has an average grain size (average value of the circle-equivalent diameter of the projected area) of 0.01 μm to 0.5 μm, more preferably 0.02 μm to 0.2 μm.
粒子状ハロゲン化銀は、通常の感光性ハロゲン化銀と同様の方法で調製できる。ハロゲン化銀粒子の表面は、光学的に増感される必要はなく、また分光増感も不要である。ただし、これを塗布液に添加するのに先立ち、あらかじめトリアゾール系、アザインデン系、ベンゾチアゾリウム系又はメルカプト系化合物または亜鉛化合物などの公知の安定剤を添加しておくことが好ましい。この粒子状ハロゲン化銀粒子含有層に、コロイド銀を含有させることができる。 Grain-shaped silver halide can be prepared in the same manner as ordinary photosensitive silver halide. The surfaces of the silver halide grains do not need to be optically sensitized, and spectral sensitization is also not required. However, prior to adding this to the coating solution, it is preferable to add a known stabilizer such as a triazole-based, azaindene-based, benzothiazolium-based, or mercapto-based compound, or a zinc compound. Colloidal silver can be incorporated into this layer containing grain-shaped silver halide particles.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の塗布銀量は、6.0g/m2以下が好ましく、4.5g/m2以下がより好ましい。 The coated silver amount of the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure is preferably 6.0 g/m 2 or less, and more preferably 4.5 g/m 2 or less.
本開示に使用できる写真用添加剤もRDに記載されており、下記の表に関連する記載箇所を示した。 Photographic additives that can be used in this disclosure are also described in the RD, and the relevant sections are indicated in the table below.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料には、種々の色素形成カプラーを使用することができるが、以下のカプラーが特に好ましい。
イエローカプラー:EP502,424A の式(I),(II)で表されるカプラー;EP513,496Aの式(1),(2)で表されるカプラー(特に18頁のY-28);EP568,037Aのクレーム1の式(I) で表されるカプラー;米国特許第5,066,576号明細書のカラム1の45~55行の一般式(I)で表されるカプラー;特開平4-274425号公報の段落0008の一般式(I)で表されるカプラー;EP498,381A1の40頁のクレーム1に記載のカプラー(特に18頁のD-35);EP447,969A1の4頁の式(Y)で表されるカプラー(特にY-1(17頁),Y-54(41頁));米国特許第4,476,219号明細書のカラム7の36~58行の式(II)~(IV)で表されるカプラー(特にII-17,19(カラム17),II-24(カラム19))。
In the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, various dye-forming couplers can be used, but the following couplers are particularly preferred.
Yellow couplers: couplers represented by formula (I) or (II) in EP 502,424A; couplers represented by formula (1) or (2) in EP 513,496A (particularly Y-28 on page 18); couplers represented by formula (I) in claim 1 of EP 568,037A couplers represented by formula (I) in lines 45 to 55 of column 1 of U.S. Pat. No. 5,066,576; couplers represented by formula (I) in paragraph 0008 of JP-A No. 4-274425; couplers described in claim 1 on page 40 of EP 498,381 A1 (particularly D-35 on page 18); couplers represented by formula (Y) on page 4 of EP 447,969 A1 (particularly Y-1 (page 17) and Y-54 (page 41)); and couplers represented by formulas (II) to (IV) in lines 36 to 58 of column 7 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,476,219 (particularly II-17, II-19 (column 17) and II-24 (column 19)).
マゼンタカプラー;特開平3-39737号公報(L-57(11頁右下),L-68(12頁右下),L-77(13頁右下);EP456,257のA-4-63(134頁),A-4-73,-75(139頁);EP486,965のM-4,-6(26頁),M-7(27頁);EP571,959AのM-45(19頁);特開平5-204106号公報の(M-1)(6頁);特開平4-362631号公報の段落0237のM-22。 Magenta couplers: JP-A No. 3-39737 (L-57 (bottom right on page 11), L-68 (bottom right on page 12), L-77 (bottom right on page 13); A-4-63 (page 134), A-4-73,-75 (page 139) of EP 456,257; M-4,-6 (page 26), M-7 (page 27) of EP 486,965; M-45 (page 19) of EP 571,959A; (M-1) (page 6) of JP-A No. 5-204106; M-22 in paragraph 0237 of JP-A No. 4-362631.
シアンカプラー:特開平4-204843号公報のCX-1,3,4,5,11,12,14,15(14頁~16頁);特開平4-43345号公報のC-7,10(35頁),34,35(37頁),(I-1),(I-17)(42頁~43頁);特開平6-67385号公報の請求項1の一般式(Ia)又は(Ib)で表されるカプラー。 Cyan couplers: CX-1, 3, 4, 5, 11, 12, 14, 15 (pages 14-16) of JP-A No. 4-204843; C-7, 10 (page 35), 34, 35 (page 37), (I-1), (I-17) (pages 42-43) of JP-A No. 4-43345; and couplers represented by formula (Ia) or (Ib) in claim 1 of JP-A No. 6-67385.
ポリマーカプラー:特開平2-44345号公報のP-1,P-5(11頁)。
発色色素が適度な拡散性を有するカプラーとしては、米国特許第4,366,237号明細書、英国特許第2,125,570号明細書、欧州特許第96,873B号明細書、独国特許第3,234,533号明細書に記載のものが好ましい。
Polymer couplers: P-1 and P-5 (page 11) of JP-A No. 2-44345.
As couplers from which color-forming dyes have appropriate diffusibility, those described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,366,237, British Patent No. 2,125,570, European Patent No. 96,873B and German Patent No. 3,234,533 are preferred.
発色色素の不要吸収を補正するためのカプラーは、欧州特許出願公開第456,257A1号明細書の5頁に記載の式(CI),(CII),(CIII),(CIV)で表されるイエローカラードシアンカプラー(特に84頁のYC-86)、欧州特許出願公開第456,257A1号明細書に記載のイエローカラードマゼンタカプラーExM-7(202頁)、EX-1(249頁)、EX-7(251頁)、米国特許第4,833,069号明細書に記載のマゼンタカラードシアンカプラーCC-9(カラム8)、CC-13(カラム10)、米国特許第4,837,136号明細書の(2)(カラム8)、国際公開第92/11575号のクレーム1の式(A)で表される無色のマスキングカプラー(特に36~45頁の例示化合物)が好ましい。 Preferred couplers for correcting unwanted absorption of color-forming dyes include yellow-colored cyan couplers represented by formulae (CI), (CII), (CIII), and (CIV) described on page 5 of European Patent Application Publication No. 456,257A1 (particularly YC-86 on page 84), yellow-colored magenta couplers ExM-7 (page 202), EX-1 (page 249), and EX-7 (page 251) described in European Patent Application Publication No. 456,257A1, magenta-colored cyan couplers CC-9 (column 8) and CC-13 (column 10) described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,833,069, (2) (column 8) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,837,136, and colorless masking couplers represented by formula (A) in claim 1 of WO 92/11575 (particularly the exemplified compounds on pages 36 to 45).
写真性有用基を放出するカプラーとしては、以下のものが挙げられる。現像抑制剤放出化合物:欧州特許出願公開第378,236A1号明細書の11頁に記載の式(I),(II),(III),(IV)で表される化合物(特にT-101(30頁),T-104(31頁),T-113(36頁),T-131(45頁),T-144(51頁),T-158(58頁)),欧州特許出願公開第436,938A2号明細書の7頁に記載の式(I)で表される化合物(特にD-49(51頁))、欧州特許出願公開第568,037A号明細書の式(1)で表される化合物(特に(23)(11頁))、欧州特許出願公開第440,195A2号明細書の5頁~6頁に記載の式(I),(II),(III)で表される化合物(特に29頁のI-(1));漂白促進剤放出化合物:欧州特許出願公開第310,125A2号明細書の5頁の式(I),(I’)で表される化合物(特に61頁の(60),(61))及び特開平6-59411号公報の請求項1の式(I)で表される化合物(特に(7)(7頁);リガンド放出化合物:米国特許第4,555,478号明細書のクレーム1に記載のLIG-Xで表される化合物(特にカラム12の21~41行目の化合物);ロイコ色素放出化合物:米国特許第4,749,641号明細書のカラム3~8の化合物1~6;蛍光色素放出化合物:米国特許第4,774,181号明細書のクレーム1のCOUP-DYEで表される化合物(特にカラム7~10の化合物1~11);現像促進剤又はカブラセ剤放出化合物:米国特許第4,656,123号明細書のカラム3の式(1)、(2)、(3)で表される化合物(特にカラム25の(I-22))及びEP450,637A2の75頁36~38行目のExZK-2;離脱して初めて色素となる基を放出する化合物:米国特許第4,857,447号明細書のクレーム1の式(I)で表される化合物(特にカラム25~36のY-1~Y-19)。 Couplers that release a photographically useful group include the following: Development inhibitor-releasing compounds: Compounds represented by formulas (I), (II), (III), and (IV) described on page 11 of European Patent Application Publication No. 378,236A1 (particularly T-101 (page 30), T-104 (page 31), T-113 (page 36), T-131 (page 45), T-144 (page 51), and T-158 (page 58)), compounds represented by formula (I) described on page 7 of European Patent Application Publication No. 436,938A2 (particularly D-49 (page 51)), and compounds represented by formula (II) described on page 11 of European Patent Application Publication No. 436,938A2 (particularly D-49 (page 51)). Compounds represented by formula (1) in JP-A-568,037A (particularly (23) (page 11)), compounds represented by formulas (I), (II), (III) described on pages 5 to 6 in EP-A-440,195A2 (particularly I-(1) on page 29); bleach accelerator-releasing compounds: compounds represented by formulas (I) and (I') on page 5 in EP-A-310,125A2 (particularly (60) and (61) on page 61) and compounds according to claim 1 in JP-A-6-59411. Compounds represented by formula (I) (particularly (7) (page 7)); ligand-releasing compounds: compounds represented by LIG-X described in claim 1 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,555,478 (particularly the compounds in columns 21 to 41 of column 12); leuco dye-releasing compounds: compounds 1 to 6 in columns 3 to 8 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,749,641; fluorescent dye-releasing compounds: compounds represented by COUP-DYE described in claim 1 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,774,181 (particularly columns 7 to 10) Compounds 1 to 11); development accelerator or fogging agent-releasing compounds: compounds represented by formulas (1), (2), and (3) in column 3 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,656,123 (particularly (I-22) in column 25) and ExZK-2 on page 75, lines 36 to 38 of EP 450,637 A2; compounds that release a group that becomes a dye only upon release: compounds represented by formula (I) in claim 1 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,857,447 (particularly Y-1 to Y-19 in columns 25 to 36).
カプラー以外の添加剤としては、以下のものが好ましい。油溶性有機化合物の分散媒: 特開昭62-215272号公報のP-3,5,16,19,25,30,42,49,54,55,66,81,85,86,93(140頁~144頁);油溶性有機化合物の含浸用ラテックス:米国特許第4,199,363号明細書に記載のラテックス;現像主薬酸化体スカベンジャー:米国特許第4,978,606号明細所のカラム2の54~62行の式(I)で表される化合物(特にI-,(1),(2),(6),(12)(カラム4~5)、米国特許第4,923,787号明細書のカラム2の5~10行の式(特に化合物1(カラム3);ステイン防止剤:欧州特許出願公開第298321A号明細書の4頁30~33行の式(I)~(III),特にI-47,72,III-1,27(24頁~48頁);褪色防止剤:欧州特許出願公開第298321A号明細書のA-6,7,20,21,23,24,25,26,30,37,40,42,48,63,90,92,94,164(69頁~118頁),米国特許第5,122,444号明細書のカラム25~38のII-1~III-23,特にIII-10,欧州特許出願公開第471347A号明細書の8頁~12頁のI-1~III-4,特にII-2,米国特許第5,139,931号明細書のカラム32~40のA-1~48,特にA-39,42;発色増強剤又は混色防止剤の使用量を低減させる素材:欧州特許出願公開第411324A号明細書の5頁~24頁のI-1~II-15,特にI-46;ホルマリンスカベンジャー:欧州特許出願公開第477932A号明細書の24頁~29頁のSCV-1~28,特にSCV-8;硬膜剤:特開平1-214845号公報の17頁のH-1,4,6,8,14,米国特許第4,618,573号明細書のカラム13~23の式(VII)~(XII)で表される化合物(H-1~54),特開平2-214852号公報の8頁右下の式(6)で表される化合物(H-1~76),特にH-14,米国特許第3,325,287号明細書のクレーム1に記載の化合物;現像抑制剤プレカーサー:特開昭62-168139号公報のP-24,37,39(6頁~7頁);米国特許第5,019,492号明細書のクレーム1に記載の化合物,特にカラム7の28,29;防腐剤、防黴剤:米国特許第4,923,790号明細書のカラム3~15のI-1~III-43,特にII-1,9,10,18,III-25;安定剤、かぶり防止剤:米国特許第4,923,793号明細書のカラム6~16のI-1~(14),特にI-1,60,(2),(13),米国特許第4,952,483号明細書のカラム25~32の化合物1~65,特に36:化学増感剤:トリフェニルホスフィンセレニド,特開平5-40324号公報の化合物50;染料:特開平3-156450号公報の15頁~18頁のa-1~b-20,特にa-1,12,18,27,35,36,b-5,27頁~29頁のV-1~23,特にV-1,欧州特許出願公開第445627A号明細書の33頁~55頁のF-I-1~F-II-43,特にF-I-11,F-II-8,欧州特許出願公開第457153A号明細書の17頁~28頁のIII-1~36,特にIII-1,3,国際公開第88/04794号の8~26のDye-1~124の微結晶分散体,EP319999A号明細書の6頁~11頁の化合物1~22,特に化合物1,欧州特許出願公開第519306Aの式(1)ないし(3)で表される化合物D-1~87(3頁~28頁),米国特許第4,268,622号明細書の式(I)で表される化合物1~22(カラム3~10),米国特許第4,923,788号明細書の式(I)で表される化合物(1)~(31)(カラム2~9);UV吸収剤:特開昭46-3335号公報の式(1)で表される化合物(18b)~(18r),101~427(6頁~9頁),欧州特許出願公開第520938A号明細書の式(I)で表される化合物(3)~(66)(10頁~44頁)及び式(III)で表される化合物HBT-1~10(14頁),欧州特許出願公開第521823A号明細書の式(1)で表される化合物(1)~(31)(カラム2~9)。 As additives other than couplers, the following are preferred: Dispersion medium of oil-soluble organic compound: P-3, 5, 16, 19, 25, 30, 42, 49, 54, 55, 66, 81, 85, 86, 93 (pages 140-144) of JP-A-62-215272; Impregnation latex of oil-soluble organic compound: latex described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,199,363; Oxidized developer scavenger: compounds represented by formula (I) in column 2, lines 54-62 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,978,606 (particularly I-, (1), (2), (6), (12) (columns 4-5), U.S. Pat. No. Formulae in columns 2, lines 5 to 10 of European Patent Application Publication No. 4,923,787 (particularly Compound 1 (column 3)); stain inhibitors: formulae (I) to (III) in pages 4, lines 30 to 33 of European Patent Application Publication No. 298321A, particularly I-47, 72, III-1, 27 (pages 24 to 48); discoloration inhibitors: A-6, 7, 20, 21, 23, 24, 25, 26, 30, 37, 40, 42, 48, 63, 90, 92, 94, 164 (pages 69 to 118) of European Patent Application Publication No. 298321A; No. 2,444, columns 25 to 38, II-1 to III-23, especially III-10; European Patent Application Publication No. 471347A, pages 8 to 12, I-1 to III-4, especially II-2; U.S. Patent Application Publication No. 5,139,931, columns 32 to 40, A-1 to A-48, especially A-39 and A-42; materials that reduce the amount of color-development enhancer or color-mix inhibitor used: European Patent Application Publication No. 411324A, pages 5 to 24, I-1 to II-15, especially I-46; formalin scavenger: European Patent Application Publication No. Hardeners: H-1, H-4, H-6, H-8, H-14 on page 17 of JP-A-1-214845, compounds represented by formula (VII) to (XII) (H-1 to H-54) on columns 13 to 23 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,618,573, compounds represented by formula (6) (H-1 to H-76), H-14 on the bottom right of page 8 of JP-A-2-214852, and compounds described in claim 1 of U.S. Pat. No. 3,325,287; development inhibitor precursors: P-24, 37, 39 (pages 6-7) of JP-A-62-168139; compounds described in claim 1 of U.S. Pat. No. 5,019,492, particularly compounds 28 and 29 in column 7; preservatives and antifungal agents: I-1 to III-43 in columns 3-15 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,923,790, particularly compounds II-1, 9, 10, 18, and III-25; stabilizers and antifogging agents: I-1 to (14) in columns 6-16 of U.S. Pat. No. 4,923,793, particularly compounds I-1, 60, (2), and (13), U.S. Pat. No. 4,952 Compounds 1 to 65, particularly 36, in columns 25 to 32 of JP-A-483; chemical sensitizer: triphenylphosphine selenide, compound 50 of JP-A-5-40324; dyes: a-1 to b-20, particularly a-1, 12, 18, 27, 35, 36, b-5, and V-1 to 23, particularly V-1, in pages 15 to 18 of JP-A-3-156450; F-I-1 to F-II-43, particularly F-I-11 and F-II-8, in pages 33 to 55 of EP-A-445627A; No. 457153A, pages 17 to 28, III-1 to 36, particularly III-1 and III-3; microcrystalline dispersions of Dye-1 to 124, pages 8 to 26, of WO 88/04794; compounds 1 to 22, particularly compound 1, of EP 319999A, pages 6 to 11, compounds D-1 to D-87 represented by formulas (1) to (3) of European Patent Application Publication No. 519306A (pages 3 to 28); compounds 1 to 22 represented by formula (I) of U.S. Pat. No. 4,268,622 (columns 3 to 10); U.S. Pat. No. 4,923,788 Compounds (1) to (31) represented by formula (I) in the specification (columns 2 to 9); UV absorbers: compounds (18b) to (18r) and 101 to 427 represented by formula (1) in JP 46-3335 A (pages 6 to 9), compounds (3) to (66) represented by formula (I) in EP 520938 A (pages 10 to 44) and compounds HBT-1 to 10 represented by formula (III) in EP 521823 A (columns 2 to 9), and compounds (1) to (31) represented by formula (1) in EP 521823 A (columns 2 to 9).
本開示は、白黒印画紙、白黒ネガフィルム、レントゲンフィルム、一般用若しくは映画用のカラーネガフィルム、スライド用若しくはテレビ用のカラー反転フィルム、カラーペーパー、カラーポジフィルム及びカラー反転ペーパーのような種々のカラー感光材料に適用することができる。また、特公平2-32615号公報、実公平3-39784号公報に記載されているレンズ付きフイルムユニット用に好適である。 This disclosure can be applied to various color photosensitive materials such as black-and-white photographic paper, black-and-white negative film, X-ray film, color negative film for general use or cinema, color reversal film for slides or television, color paper, color positive film, and color reversal paper. It is also suitable for use in the lens-fitted film units described in Japanese Patent Publication No. 2-32615 and Japanese Utility Model Publication No. 3-39784.
本開示に使用できる適当な支持体は、例えば、上述のRD.No.17643の28頁、同No.18716の647頁右欄から648頁左欄、及び、同No.307105の879頁に記載されている。 Suitable supports that can be used in the present disclosure are described, for example, in the above-mentioned RD. No. 17643, page 28; RD. No. 18716, page 647 (right column) to page 648 (left column); and RD. No. 307105, page 879.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、乳剤層を有する側の全親水性コロイド層の膜厚の総和が28μm以下であることが好ましく、23μm以下がより好ましく、18μm以下が更に好ましく、16μm以下が特に好ましい。また膜膨潤速度T1/2は30秒以下が好ましく、20秒以下がより好ましい。T1/2は、発色現像液で30℃、3分15秒処理した時に到達する最大膨潤膜厚の90%を飽和膜厚としたとき、膜厚がその1/2に到達するまでの時間と定義する。膜厚は、25℃相対湿度55%調湿下(2日)で測定した膜厚を意味し、T1/2は、エー・グリーン(A.Green)らのフォトグラフィック・サイエンス・アンド・エンジニアリング(Photogr.Sci.Eng.),19卷、2,124頁~129頁に記載の型のスエロメーター(膨潤計)を使用することにより測定できる。T1/2は、バインダーとしてのゼラチンに硬膜剤を加えること、あるいは塗布後の経時条件を変えることによって調整することができる。また、膨潤率は150%~400%が好ましい。膨潤率とは、上述した条件下での最大膨潤膜厚から、
式:(最大膨潤膜厚-膜厚)/膜厚
により計算できる。
In the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, the total thickness of all hydrophilic colloid layers on the emulsion layer side is preferably 28 μm or less, more preferably 23 μm or less, even more preferably 18 μm or less, and particularly preferably 16 μm or less. The film swelling rate T 1/2 is preferably 30 seconds or less, more preferably 20 seconds or less. T 1/2 is defined as the time required for the film thickness to reach half of the saturated film thickness, which is 90% of the maximum swollen film thickness achieved when processed in a color developer at 30°C for 3 minutes and 15 seconds. The film thickness refers to the film thickness measured at 25°C and 55% relative humidity (for 2 days). T 1/2 can be measured using a swellometer (swellometer) of the type described in A. Green et al., Photogr. Sci. Eng., Vol. 19, pp. 2, 124-129. T1 /2 can be adjusted by adding a film hardener to gelatin as a binder or by changing the aging conditions after coating. The swelling ratio is preferably 150% to 400%. The swelling ratio is calculated from the maximum swollen film thickness under the above conditions as follows:
It can be calculated using the formula: (maximum swelling film thickness - film thickness)/film thickness.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、乳剤層を有する側の反対側に、乾燥膜厚の総和が2μm~20μmの親水性コロイド層(バック層と称す)を設けることが好ましい。このバック層には、上述の光吸収剤、フィルター染料、紫外線吸収剤、スタチック防止剤、硬膜剤、バインダー、可塑剤、潤滑剤、塗布助剤、表面活性剤を含有させることが好ましい。このバック層の膨潤率は150%~500%が好ましい。 The silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure preferably has a hydrophilic colloid layer (referred to as a backing layer) with a total dry film thickness of 2 μm to 20 μm on the side opposite the emulsion layer. This backing layer preferably contains the above-mentioned light absorbers, filter dyes, ultraviolet absorbers, anti-static agents, film hardeners, binders, plasticizers, lubricants, coating aids, and surfactants. The swelling ratio of this backing layer is preferably 150% to 500%.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、上述のRD.No.17643の28頁~29頁、同No.18716の651左欄~右欄、及び、同No.307105の880頁~881頁に記載された通常の方法によって現像処理することができる。 The silver halide photographic light-sensitive material disclosed herein can be developed using the conventional methods described in the above-mentioned RD. No. 17643, pages 28-29, RD. No. 18716, paragraph 651, left and right columns, and RD. No. 307105, pages 880-881.
また、本開示においては、帯電防止剤が好ましく用いられる。
それらの帯電防止剤としては、カルボン酸及びカルボン酸塩、スルホン酸塩を含む高分子、カチオン性高分子、イオン性界面活性剤化合物、π電子共役系導電性高分子を挙げることができる。帯電防止剤として好ましいものは、ZnO、TiO2、SnO2、Al2O3、In2O3、SiO2、MgO、BaO、MoO3、V2O5の中から選ばれた少なくとも1種の体積抵抗率が107Ω・cm以下、より好ましくは105Ω・cm以下である粒子サイズ0.001μm~1.0μm結晶性の金属酸化物あるいはこれらの複合酸化物(Sb,P,B,In,S,Si,Cなど)の粒子、更にはゾル状の金属酸化物あるいはこれらの複合酸化物の粒子である。ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料への含有量としては、5mg/m2~500mg/m2が好ましく、特に好ましくは10mg/m2~350mg/m2である。導電性の結晶性酸化物又はその複合酸化物とバインダーとの量の比は、1/300~100/1が好ましく、より好ましくは1/100~100/5である。π電子共役系導電性高分子の例としては、ポリチオフェン化合物、ポリピロール化合物及びポリフラン化合物が挙げられる。好ましくはポリチオフェン化合物と重合体状ポリアニオン化合物とを含有するラテックス状の水分散物を用いることができる。化合物の詳細構造、分散物の組成、併用する分散剤との好ましい態様は特開2003-330145号公報、特許第4244541号公報、特開2016-120650号公報、特開平8-211615号公報に記載の方法を用いることができる。
In the present disclosure, an antistatic agent is preferably used.
Examples of such antistatic agents include polymers containing carboxylic acids and carboxylates, sulfonates, cationic polymers, ionic surfactant compounds, and π-electron conjugated conductive polymers. Preferred antistatic agents are at least one selected from ZnO, TiO 2 , SnO 2 , Al 2 O 3 , In 2 O 3 , SiO 2 , MgO, BaO, MoO 3 , and V 2 O 5 , and having a volume resistivity of 10 7 Ω·cm or less, more preferably 10 5 Ω·cm or less, and particles of crystalline metal oxides of these or composite oxides thereof (e.g., Sb, P, B, In, S, Si, and C), with a particle size of 0.001 μm to 1.0 μm, or particles of sol-like metal oxides or composite oxides thereof. The content of these metal oxides in the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material is preferably 5 mg/m 2 to 500 mg/m 2 , and particularly preferably 10 mg/m 2 to 350 mg/m 2 . The ratio of the amount of conductive crystalline oxide or composite oxide thereof to the binder is preferably 1/300 to 100/1, more preferably 1/100 to 100/5. Examples of π-electron conjugated conductive polymers include polythiophene compounds, polypyrrole compounds, and polyfuran compounds. Preferably, a latex-like aqueous dispersion containing a polythiophene compound and a polymeric polyanion compound can be used. For detailed structure of the compound, composition of the dispersion, and preferred embodiments of the dispersant used in combination, the methods described in JP-A-2003-330145, JP-A-4244541, JP-A-2016-120650, and JP-A-8-211615 can be used.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料には、滑り性があることが好ましい。滑り剤含有層は感光層面、バック面ともに用いることが好ましい。好ましい滑り性としては動摩擦係数で0.01以上0.25以下である。この時の測定は直径5mmのステンレス球に対し、60cm/分で搬送した時の値を表す(25℃、60%RH)。この評価において相手材として感光層面に置き換えてもほぼ同レベルの値となる。 It is preferable that the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure has slipperiness. A slip-agent-containing layer is preferably used on both the light-sensitive layer surface and the back surface. The preferred slipperiness is a dynamic friction coefficient of 0.01 or more and 0.25 or less. This measurement represents the value when conveyed at 60 cm/min against a 5 mm diameter stainless steel ball (25°C, 60% RH). In this evaluation, even if the light-sensitive layer surface is substituted as the mating material, the value will be roughly the same.
本開示に使用可能な滑り剤としては、ポリオルガノシロキサン、高級脂肪酸アミド、高級脂肪酸金属塩、高級脂肪酸と高級アルコールのエステル等が挙げられ、ポリオルガノシロキサンとしては、ポリジメチルシロキサン、ポリジエチルシロキサン、ポリスチリルメチルシロキサン、ポリメチルフェニルシロキサン等を用いることができる。添加層としては乳剤層の最外層やバック層が好ましい。特にポリジメチルシロキサン又は長鎖アルキル基を有するエステルが好ましい。 Slipping agents that can be used in the present disclosure include polyorganosiloxanes, higher fatty acid amides, higher fatty acid metal salts, and esters of higher fatty acids and higher alcohols. Examples of polyorganosiloxanes that can be used include polydimethylsiloxane, polydiethylsiloxane, polystyrylmethylsiloxane, and polymethylphenylsiloxane. The outermost layer or back layer of the emulsion layer is preferred as the additive layer. Polydimethylsiloxane or an ester with a long-chain alkyl group is particularly preferred.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、マット剤を含むことが好ましい。マット剤としては乳剤面、バック面とどちらでもよいが、乳剤側の最外層に添加することが特に好ましい。マット剤は処理液可溶性でも処理液不溶性でもよく、好ましくは両者を併用することである。例えばポリメチルメタクリレート、ポリ(メチルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸=9/1又は5/5(モル比))、ポリスチレン粒子などが好ましい。粒径としては0.8μm~10μmが好ましく、その粒径分布も狭いほうが好ましく、平均粒径の0.9倍~1.1倍の間に全粒子数の90%以上が含有されることが好ましい。また、マット性を高めるために0.8μm以下の粒子を同時に添加することも好ましく例えばポリメチルメタクリレート(0.2μm)、ポリ(メチルメタクリレート/メタクリル酸=9/1(モル比)、0.3μm))、ポリスチレン粒子(0.25μm)、コロイダルシリカ(0.03μm)が挙げられる。 The silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure preferably contains a matting agent. The matting agent may be added to either the emulsion side or the back side, but it is particularly preferred to add it to the outermost layer on the emulsion side. The matting agent may be soluble or insoluble in the processing solution, and it is preferable to use both in combination. Examples of suitable matting agents include polymethyl methacrylate, poly(methyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid = 9/1 or 5/5 (molar ratio)), and polystyrene particles. The particle size is preferably 0.8 μm to 10 μm, and a narrow particle size distribution is also preferred, with 90% or more of the total number of particles preferably falling within a range of 0.9 to 1.1 times the average particle size. To enhance matting properties, it is also preferable to simultaneously add particles of 0.8 μm or smaller. Examples include polymethyl methacrylate (0.2 μm), poly(methyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid = 9/1 (molar ratio), 0.3 μm), polystyrene particles (0.25 μm), and colloidal silica (0.03 μm).
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、各層において、その他の公知の添加剤を含むことができる。
また、X線照射に感光性のない本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料であっても、必要に応じ、後述するX線照射に感光性のあるハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の構成及び各成分等を用いてもよい。
The silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may contain other known additives in each layer.
Furthermore, even if the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure is not sensitive to X-ray irradiation, the constitution and components of a silver halide photographic light-sensitive material that is sensitive to X-ray irradiation, which will be described later, may be used, if necessary.
また、以下に、X線照射に感光性のあるハロゲン化銀写真感光材料について、説明する。 Furthermore, below we will explain silver halide photographic materials that are sensitive to X-ray irradiation.
ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料としては、X線照射に感光性のあるハロゲン化銀写真感光材料が好ましく挙げられる。 A preferred example of a silver halide photographic material is a silver halide photographic material that is sensitive to X-ray irradiation.
〔ハロゲン化銀乳剤〕
まず、本開示に用いられるハロゲン化銀乳剤について説明する。
[Silver halide emulsion]
First, the silver halide emulsions used in the present disclosure will be described.
1)ハロゲン組成
感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子は、塩化銀、塩臭化銀、臭化銀、ヨウ臭化銀、ヨウ塩臭化銀を用いることができるが、上述のように迅速処理の観点から感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子中に含まれるヨード量が平均で0モル%以上0.45モル%以下であることが好ましい。このヨード量として、より好ましくは平均で0.05モル%以上0.40モル%以下、更に好ましくは、0.10モル%以上0.30モル%以下である。ここで、感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子に含まれるヨード量の「平均」とは、個々の感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子のハロゲン組成から求められるヨード含有率の平均値を意味する。感光性ハロゲン化銀の粒子内におけるハロゲン組成の分布は均一であってもよく、ハロゲン組成がステップ上に変化したものでもよく、あるいは連続的に変化したものでもよい。また、感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子としては、コア/シェル構造を有する感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子を用いることもできる。
1) Halogen Composition. Photosensitive silver halide grains can be silver chloride, silver chlorobromide, silver bromide, silver iodobromide, or silver iodochlorobromide. However, as mentioned above, from the viewpoint of rapid processing, the average iodine content of the photosensitive silver halide grains is preferably 0 mol % to 0.45 mol %. This iodine content is more preferably 0.05 mol % to 0.40 mol %, and even more preferably 0.10 mol % to 0.30 mol %. Here, the "average" iodine content of the photosensitive silver halide grains refers to the average iodine content calculated from the halogen composition of each photosensitive silver halide grain. The halogen composition distribution within the photosensitive silver halide grains may be uniform, stepwise, or continuously varying. Furthermore, photosensitive silver halide grains having a core/shell structure may also be used.
2)粒子形状
感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子としては、英国特許第635,841号明細書、米国特許第3,622,318号明細書に記載されているような、いわゆるハロゲン変換型(コンバージョン型)の粒子も好適に挙げられる。ハロゲン変換の方法としては、通常ハロゲン変換前の粒子表面のハロゲン組成よりも銀との溶解度積の小さいハロゲン水溶液を添加することにより行う。例えば、塩化銀や塩臭化銀平板状粒子に対しては臭化カリウム及び/又は沃化カリウム水溶液を添加し、臭化銀や沃臭化銀平板に対しては沃化カリウム水溶液を添加してコンバージョンをおこす。これらの添加する水溶液の濃度は、低濃度のほうが好ましく、30%以下が好ましく、より好ましくは10%以下である。更にハロゲン変換前のハロゲン化銀1モルあたり毎分1モル%以下の速度で、変換ハロゲン溶液を添加するのが好ましい。さらに、ハロゲン変換時に、増感色素及び/又はハロゲン化銀吸着性物質の一部もしくは全部を存在させてもよく、変換ハロゲン水溶液のかわりに、臭化銀や、沃臭化銀、沃化銀のハロゲン化銀粒子を添加してもよい。これらの微粒子の大きさは、好ましくは0.2μm以下、好ましくは0.1μm以下、特に好ましくは0.05μm以下である。ハロゲン変換方法は、上記した方法に限定されるものではなく、目的に応じ適宜組み合わせて使用することができる。
2) Grain Shape Suitable photosensitive silver halide grains include so-called halogen conversion type grains, as described in British Patent No. 635,841 and U.S. Patent No. 3,622,318. Halogen conversion is usually achieved by adding an aqueous halide solution having a smaller solubility product with silver than the halogen composition on the grain surface before halogen conversion. For example, conversion is achieved by adding an aqueous potassium bromide and/or potassium iodide solution to silver chloride or silver chlorobromide tabular grains, or by adding an aqueous potassium iodide solution to silver bromide or silver iodobromide tabular grains. The concentration of these aqueous solutions added is preferably low, preferably 30% or less, and more preferably 10% or less. Furthermore, it is preferred to add the conversion halide solution at a rate of 1 mol% per minute or less per mole of silver halide before halogen conversion. Furthermore, during halogen conversion, a sensitizing dye and/or a silver halide adsorbent may be present in part or in whole, and silver halide grains such as silver bromide, silver iodobromide, or silver iodide may be added instead of the converted halogen aqueous solution. The size of these fine grains is preferably 0.2 μm or less, more preferably 0.1 μm or less, and particularly preferably 0.05 μm or less. The halogen conversion method is not limited to the above-mentioned methods, and can be used in combination as appropriate depending on the purpose.
3)粒子サイズ
感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子の形成方法は当業界では良く知られており、例えば特開平2-68539号公報、米国特許第3,700,458号明細書、及び、リサーチディスクロージャ1978年6月の第17029号に記載されている方法等を用いることによって調製することができる。
3) Grain Size Methods for forming photosensitive silver halide grains are well known in the art, and they can be prepared by using, for example, the methods described in JP-A No. 2-68539, U.S. Pat. No. 3,700,458, and Research Disclosure No. 17029, June 1978.
4)化学増感方法
化学増感方法としては、特開平2-68539号公報第10頁右上欄13行目から同左下欄16行目、特開平5-313282号公報、及び特開平6-110144号公報に記載の方法を用いることができる。
ハロゲン化銀乳剤の化学増感の方法としては、具体的には、ハロゲン化銀吸着性物質の存在下で硫黄増感法、セレン増感法、還元増感法、金増感法などの知られている方法を用いることができ、単独又は組合せて用いられる。
4) Chemical Sensitization Methods As chemical sensitization methods, those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 10, upper right column, line 13 to lower left column, line 16, JP-A Nos. 5-313282 and 6-110144 can be used.
As a method for chemical sensitization of a silver halide emulsion, specifically, known methods such as sulfur sensitization, selenium sensitization, reduction sensitization, and gold sensitization in the presence of a silver halide adsorbent can be used, and these methods can be used alone or in combination.
貴金属増感法のうち金増感法はその代表的なもので金化合物、主として金錯塩を用いる。金以外の貴金属、例えば、白金、パラジウム、イリジウム等の錯塩を含有しても差支えない。その具体例は米国特許第2448060号明細書、英国特許第618061号明細書などに記載されている。
硫黄増感剤としては、ゼラチン中に含まれる硫黄化合物のほか、種々の硫黄化合物、たとえばチオ硫酸塩、チオ尿素類、チアゾール類、ローダニン類等を用いることができる。具体例は米国特許第1,574,944号明細書、同2,278,947号明細書、同2,410,689号明細書、同2,728,668号明細書、同5,501,313号明細書、同3,656,955号明細書に記載されたものである。また、セレン増感剤としては特開平6-110144号公報に記載されている。
チオ硫酸塩による硫黄増感と、セレン増感及び金増感の併用は有用である。還元増感剤としては第一錫塩、アミン類、ホルムアミンジスルフィド酸、シラン化合物などを用いることができる。
Among the noble metal sensitization methods, gold sensitization is a typical example, which uses gold compounds, mainly gold complex salts. Complex salts of noble metals other than gold, such as platinum, palladium, and iridium, may also be used. Specific examples are described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,448,060 and British Patent No. 618,061.
As the sulfur sensitizer, in addition to the sulfur compounds contained in gelatin, various sulfur compounds such as thiosulfates, thioureas, thiazoles, rhodanines, etc. can be used. Specific examples are described in U.S. Patent Nos. 1,574,944, 2,278,947, 2,410,689, 2,728,668, 5,501,313, and 3,656,955. Selenium sensitizers are described in JP-A-6-110144.
The combined use of sulfur sensitization with thiosulfate, selenium sensitization, and gold sensitization is useful. As reduction sensitizers, stannous salts, amines, formamine disulfide acid, silane compounds, etc. can be used.
5)カブリ防止剤及び安定剤
カブリ防止剤及び安定剤としては、特開平2-68539号公報第10頁左下欄17行目から同第11頁左上欄7行目及び同第3頁左下欄2行目から同第4頁左下欄に記載のものを使用できる。
5) Antifoggants and stabilizers Examples of antifoggants and stabilizers that can be used include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 10, lower left column, line 17 to page 11, upper left column, line 7, and page 3, lower left column, line 2 to page 4, lower left column.
具体的には、アゾール類(例えばベンゾチアゾリウム塩、エトロイミダゾール類、ニトロベンズイミダゾール類、クロロベンズイミダゾール類、クロモベンズイミダゾール類、ニトロインダゾール類、ベンゾトリアゾール類、アミノトリアゾール類など);メルカプト化合物類(例えばメルカプトテアゾール類、メルカプトベンジチアゾール類、メルカプトベンズイミダゾール類、メルカプトチアジアゾール類、メルカプトテトラゾール類、メルカプトピリミジシ類、メルカプトトリアジン類など);例えばオキサドリンチオンのようなチオケト化合物;アザインデン類(例えばトリアザインデン類、テトラアザインデン類(特に4-ヒドロキシ置換(1,3,3a,7)テトラアザインデン類)、ペンタアザインデン類など);ベンゼンチオスルホン酸、ベンゼンスルフィン酸、ベンゼンスルホン酸アミド等のようなカブリ防止剤又は安定剤として知られる化合物を加えることができる。 Specific examples of compounds that can be added include azoles (e.g., benzothiazolium salts, etroimidazoles, nitrobenzimidazoles, chlorobenzimidazoles, chromobenzimidazoles, nitroindazoles, benzotriazoles, aminotriazoles, etc.); mercapto compounds (e.g., mercaptothiazoles, mercaptobenzimidazoles, mercaptothiadiazoles, mercaptotetrazoles, mercaptopyrimidazoles, mercaptotriazines, etc.); thioketo compounds such as oxadrinethione; azaindenes (e.g., triazaindenes, tetraazaindenes (especially 4-hydroxy-substituted (1,3,3a,7)tetraazaindenes), pentaazaindenes, etc.); and compounds known as antifogging agents or stabilizers, such as benzenethiosulfonic acid, benzenesulfinic acid, and benzenesulfonic acid amide.
特に特開昭60-76743号公報、同60-87322号公報に記載のニトロン及びその誘導体、特開昭60-80839号公報に記載のメルカプト化合物、特開昭57-164735号公報に記載のヘテロ環化合物、及びヘテロ環化合物と酸の錯塩(例えば1-フェニル-5-メルカプトテトラゾール類)などを好ましく用いることができる。 In particular, nitrones and derivatives thereof described in JP-A Nos. 60-76743 and 60-87322, mercapto compounds described in JP-A No. 60-80839, heterocyclic compounds described in JP-A No. 57-164735, and complex salts of heterocyclic compounds and acids (e.g., 1-phenyl-5-mercaptotetrazoles) are preferably used.
更に、プリン類又は核酸類、あるいは特公昭61-36213号公報、特開昭59-90844号公報等に記載の高分子化合物などを使用することもできる。中でも特にアザインデン類とプリン類、核酸類は好ましく用いることができる。これらの化合物の添加量はハロゲン化銀1モルあたり、好ましくは0.5ミリモル~5.0ミリモル、より好ましくは0.5ミリモル~3.0ミリモルである。 Furthermore, purines or nucleic acids, or polymeric compounds described in JP-B No. 61-36213 and JP-A No. 59-90844, etc., can also be used. Among these, azaindenes, purines, and nucleic acids are particularly preferred. The amount of these compounds added is preferably 0.5 to 5.0 millimoles, and more preferably 0.5 to 3.0 millimoles, per mole of silver halide.
6)色調改良剤
色調改良剤としては、特開昭62-276539号公報第2頁左下欄7行目から同第10頁左下欄20行目、並びに特開平3-94249号公報第6頁左下欄15行目から第11頁右上欄19行目に記載のものが挙げられる。
具体的には、ハロゲン化銀写真乳剤層の被覆力が60以上とし、ハロゲン化銀写真乳剤層及び/又は他の層中に、520nm~560nmの間に極大吸収波長を有する染料と570nm~700nmの間に極大吸収波長を有する染料とを、現像処理後の末露光部透過濃度の含有染料による光学濃度の増加が0.03以下となるように含めることができる。
6) Color Tone Improver Examples of the color tone improver include those described in JP-A-62-276539, page 2, lower left column, line 7 to page 10, lower left column, line 20, and JP-A-3-94249, page 6, lower left column, line 15 to page 11, upper right column, line 19.
Specifically, the covering power of the silver halide photographic emulsion layer is set to 60 or more, and the silver halide photographic emulsion layer and/or other layers can contain a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength between 520 nm and 560 nm and a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength between 570 nm and 700 nm so that the increase in optical density due to the contained dyes in the transmission density of the unexposed area after development processing is 0.03 or less.
ハロゲン化銀写真乳剤層の被覆力を60以上とする乳剤としては代表的には平板状乳剤、粒子乳剤などを挙げることができる。特には、ハロゲン化銀写真乳剤が0.4μm以下の粒子厚みをもつ平板状ハロゲン化銀粒子からなる場合、あるいは高ヨード表面感光性字乳剤と粒子で内部がかぶった粒子からなる乳剤との混合乳剤を用いると色調改良の効果が大きい。
色調改良用に使用できる染料としては、好ましくは520nm~560nm、より好ましくは530nm~555nmの間に極大吸収波長を有する染料と、好ましくは570nm~700nm、より好ましくは580~650nmの間に極大吸収波長を有する染料との併用する態様が挙げられる。極大吸収波長とは、染料を感光材料中に存在させた状態における極大吸収波長を意味する。
Representative examples of emulsions for making the covering power of the silver halide photographic emulsion layer 60 or more include tabular emulsions, grain emulsions, etc. In particular, when the silver halide photographic emulsion is made up of tabular silver halide grains having a grain thickness of 0.4 μm or less, or when a mixed emulsion of a high iodine surface photosensitive emulsion and an emulsion made up of grains with internal fogging is used, the effect of improving color tone is significant.
Dyes that can be used to improve color tone include a combination of a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength preferably between 520 nm and 560 nm, more preferably between 530 nm and 555 nm, and a dye having a maximum absorption wavelength preferably between 570 nm and 700 nm, more preferably between 580 nm and 650 nm. The maximum absorption wavelength means the maximum absorption wavelength when the dye is present in a photosensitive material.
染料としては、例えば、アントラキノン染料、アゾ染料、アゾメチン染料、インドアニリン染料、オキソノール染料、カルボシアニン染料、スチリル染料、トリフェニルメタン染料などの中から所定の極大波長を有するものが選択される。現像処理に対する安定性や光堅牢性や、減感、カブリ、ステイン等の写真性能に対する影響を考慮すると、アントラキノン染料、アゾ染料、アゾメチン染料、及びインドアニリン染料の中から好ましいものが用いられる。好ましい化合物は、特開昭62-276539号公報第3頁左上欄5行目から同第9頁左上欄9行目に記載されている。
このような染料は、乳剤層その他の親水性コロイド層(中間層、保護層、アンチハレーション層、フィルター層など)中に種々の知られた方法で分散することができ、具体的には、特開昭62-276539号公報第9頁左上欄14行目から同第10頁左下欄20行目に記載されている。
The dye may be selected from anthraquinone dyes, azo dyes, azomethine dyes, indoaniline dyes, oxonol dyes, carbocyanine dyes, styryl dyes, triphenylmethane dyes, etc., and may have a predetermined maximum wavelength. Taking into consideration the stability to development processing, light fastness, and effects on photographic performance such as desensitization, fogging, and staining, preferred dyes are used from anthraquinone dyes, azo dyes, azomethine dyes, and indoaniline dyes. Preferred compounds are described in JP-A No. 62-276539, page 3, upper left column, line 5 to page 9, upper left column, line 9.
Such dyes can be dispersed in emulsion layers and other hydrophilic colloid layers (intermediate layers, protective layers, antihalation layers, filter layers, etc.) by various known methods, and specific examples are described in JP-A No. 62-276539, page 9, upper left column, line 14 to page 10, lower left column, line 20.
7)分光増感色素
分光増感色素としては、特開平2-68539号公報第4頁右下欄4行目から同第8頁右下欄に記載されているものが挙げられる。
具体的には、シアニン色素、メロシアニン色素、コンプレックスシアニン色素、コンプレックスメロシアニン色素、ホロポーランアニン色素、スチリル色素、ヘミシアニン色素、オキソノール色素、ヘミオキソノール色素等を用いることができる。
増感色素は、例えば米国特許第3,522,052号明細書、同3,617,197号明細書、同3,713,828号明細書、同3,615,643号明細書、同3,615,632号明細書、同3,617,293号明細書、同3,628,964号明細書、同3,703,377号明細書、同3,666,480号明細書、同3,667,960号明細書、同3,679,428号明細書、同3,672,897号明細書、同3,769,026号明細書、同3,556,800号明細書、同3,615,613号現細書、同3,613,638号明細書、同3,615,635号明細書、同3,705,809号明細書、同3,632,349号明細書、同3,677,765号明細書、同3,770,449号明細書、同3,770,440号明細書、同3,769,025号明細書、同3,745,014号明細書、同3,713,826号明細書、同3,567,458号明細書、同3,625,698号明細書、同2,526,632号明細書、同2,503,776号明細書、特開昭48-76525号公報、ベルギー特許第691807号明細書などに記載されている。増感色素の添加量はハロゲン化銀1モルあたり、好ましくは0.5mmol以上4mmol未満、より好ましくは0.5mmol以上1.5mmol未満である。
増感色素の具体例としては、特開平2-68539号公報第5頁から同第8頁に記載されているII-1~II-47が挙げられる。
7) Spectral Sensitizing Dyes Examples of spectral sensitizing dyes include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 4, line 4 in the lower right column to page 8, lower right column.
Specifically, cyanine dyes, merocyanine dyes, complex cyanine dyes, complex merocyanine dyes, holopolar cyanine dyes, styryl dyes, hemicyanine dyes, oxonol dyes, hemioxonol dyes, and the like can be used.
Sensitizing dyes are described in, for example, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,522,052, 3,617,197, 3,713,828, 3,615,643, 3,615,632, 3,617,293, 3,628,964, 3,703,377, 3,666,480, 3,667,960, 3,679,428, 3,672,897, 3,769,026, 3,556,800, 3,615,613, 3,613, These sensitizing dyes are described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 638, 3,615,635, 3,705,809, 3,632,349, 3,677,765, 3,770,449, 3,770,440, 3,769,025, 3,745,014, 3,713,826, 3,567,458, 3,625,698, 2,526,632, 2,503,776, JP-A-48-76525, and Belgian Patent No. 691807. The amount of sensitizing dye added is preferably 0.5 mmol or more and less than 4 mmol, more preferably 0.5 mmol or more and less than 1.5 mmol, per mole of silver halide.
Specific examples of sensitizing dyes include II-1 to II-47 described on pages 5 to 8 of JP-A No. 2-68539.
8)帯電防止剤
本開示においては、塗布用助剤、帯電防止剤あるいは帯電調整剤として、特開平2-68539号公報第11頁左上欄14行目から同第12頁左上欄9行目に記載の界面活性剤を用いることができる。
また、塗布用助剤、帯電防止剤あるいは帯電調整剤として、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を用いてもよい。
このような目的に用いられる界面活性剤の具体例としては、例えばサポニン(ステロイド系)、アルキレンオキサイド誘導体(例えばポリエチレングリコール、ポリエチレングリコール/ポリプロピレングリコール縮合物、ポリエチレングリコールアルキルエーテル類又はポリエチレングリコールアルキルアリールエーテル類、シリコーンのポリエチレンオキサイド化合物類)、糖のアルキルエステル類などの非イオン性界面活性剤;アルキルスルフォン酸塩、アルキルベンゼンスルフォン酸塩、アルキルナフタレンスルフォン酸塩、アルキル硫酸エステル類、N-アシル-N-アルキルタウリン類、スルホコハク酸エステル類、スルホアルキルポリオキシエチレンアルキルフェニルエーテル類、などのアニオン界面活性剤;アルキルベタイン類、アルキルスルホベタイン類などの両性界面活性剤;脂肪族あるいは芳香族第4級アンモニウム塩類、ビリジニウム塩類、イミダゾリウム塩類などのカチオン界面活性剤を用いることができる。
8) Antistatic Agent In the present disclosure, surfactants described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 11, upper left column, line 14 to page 12, upper left column, line 9 can be used as coating aids, antistatic agents, or charge adjusting agents.
The ionic compounds according to the present disclosure may also be used as coating aids, antistatic agents, or charge adjusting agents.
Specific examples of surfactants that can be used for such purposes include nonionic surfactants such as saponin (steroid-based), alkylene oxide derivatives (e.g., polyethylene glycol, polyethylene glycol/polypropylene glycol condensates, polyethylene glycol alkyl ethers or polyethylene glycol alkylaryl ethers, and silicone polyethylene oxide compounds), and sugar alkyl esters; anionic surfactants such as alkyl sulfonates, alkylbenzene sulfonates, alkylnaphthalene sulfonates, alkyl sulfates, N-acyl-N-alkyltaurines, sulfosuccinates, and sulfoalkylpolyoxyethylene alkylphenyl ethers; amphoteric surfactants such as alkyl betaines and alkyl sulfobetaines; and cationic surfactants such as aliphatic or aromatic quaternary ammonium salts, pyridinium salts, and imidazolium salts.
このうち、サポニン、ドデシルベンゼンスルホン酸Na塩、ジ-2-エチルへキシルα-スルホコハク酸Na塩、p-オクチルフェノキシエトキシエタンスルホン酸Na塩、ドデシル硫酸Na塩、トリイソプロピルナフタレンスルホン酸Na塩、N-メチル-オレオイルタウリンNa塩などのアニオン、ドデシルトリメチルアンモニウムクロライド、N-オレオイル-N’,N’,N’-トリメチルアンモニオジアミノプロパンブロマイド、ドデシルピリジウムクロライドなどのカチオン、N-ドデシル-N,N-ジメナルカルボキシベタイン、N-オレイル-N,N-ジメチルスルホブチルベタインなどのベタイン、ポリ(平均重合度n-10)オキシエチレンセチルエーテル、ポリ(n=25)オキシエチレンp-ノニルフェノールエーテル、ビス(1-ポリ(n=15)オキシエチレン-オキシ-2,4-ジ-t-ベンチルフェニル)エタンなどのノニオンを特に好ましく用いることができる。
また、帯電防止剤としては、特開昭60-80848号公報、同61-112144号公報、特開昭62-172343号公報、特開昭62-173459号公報などに記載のノニオン系界面活性剤、アルカリ金属の硝酸塩、導電性酸化スズ、酸化亜鉛、五酸化バナジウム又はこれらにアンチモン等をドープした複合酸化物を好ましく用いることができる。
Among these, anions such as saponin, dodecylbenzenesulfonate Na salt, di-2-ethylhexyl α-sulfosuccinate Na salt, p-octylphenoxyethoxyethanesulfonate Na salt, dodecyl sulfate Na salt, triisopropylnaphthalenesulfonate Na salt, and N-methyl-oleoyl taurine Na salt; cations such as dodecyltrimethylammonium chloride, N-oleoyl-N',N',N'-trimethylammoniodiaminopropane bromide and dodecylpyridium chloride; betaines such as N-dodecyl-N,N-dimenalcarboxybetaine and N-oleyl-N,N-dimethylsulfobutylbetaine; and nonions such as poly(average polymerization degree n-10)oxyethylene cetyl ether, poly(n = 25)oxyethylene p-nonylphenol ether, and bis(1-poly(n = 15)oxyethylene-oxy-2,4-di-t-pentylphenyl)ethane can be particularly preferably used.
As the antistatic agent, nonionic surfactants described in JP-A Nos. 60-80848, 61-112144, 62-172343, 62-173459, and the like, alkali metal nitrates, conductive tin oxide, zinc oxide, vanadium pentoxide, or composite oxides of these doped with antimony or the like can be preferably used.
9)マット剤、滑り剤及び可塑剤
マット剤、滑り剤及び可塑剤としては、特開平2-68539号公報第12頁左上欄10行目から同右上本欄10行目、及び同第14頁左下欄10行目から同右下欄1行目に記載のものが挙げられる。
具体的には、マット剤としては米国特許第2992101号明細書、同2701245号明細書、同4142894号明細書、同4396706号明細書に記載の如きポリメチルメタクリレートのホモポリマー又はメチルメタクリレートとメタクリル酸とのコポリマー、デンプンなどの有機化合物、シリカ、二酸化チタン、硫酸、ストロンチウムバリウム等の無機化合物の微粒子を用いることができる。粒子サイズとしては、1.0μm~10μmであることが好ましく、2μm~5μmであることが特に好ましい。
本開示に係るハハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の表面層には、滑り剤として米国特許3,489,576号明細書、同4,047,958号明細書等に記載のシリコーン化合物、特公昭56-23139号公報に記載のコロイダルシリカの他に、パラフィンワックス、高級脂肪酸エステル、デン粉誘導体等を用いることができる。
9) Matting Agents, Slipping Agents, and Plasticizers Examples of the matting agents, slipping agents, and plasticizers include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 12, upper left column, line 10 to the upper right column, line 10, and page 14, lower left column, line 10 to the lower right column, line 1.
Specifically, examples of matting agents that can be used include fine particles of polymethyl methacrylate homopolymers or copolymers of methyl methacrylate and methacrylic acid, organic compounds such as starch, and inorganic compounds such as silica, titanium dioxide, sulfuric acid, and strontium barium, as described in U.S. Patent Nos. 2,992,101, 2,701,245, 4,142,894, and 4,396,706. The particle size is preferably 1.0 μm to 10 μm, and particularly preferably 2 μm to 5 μm.
In the surface layer of the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, as a lubricant, in addition to silicone compounds described in U.S. Patent Nos. 3,489,576 and 4,047,958, and colloidal silica described in JP-B-56-23139, paraffin wax, higher fatty acid esters, starch derivatives, and the like can be used.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の親水性コロイド層には、トリメチロールプロパン、ペンタンジオール、ブタンジオール、エチレングリコール、グリセリン等のポリオール類を可塑剤として用いることができる。また、本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の乳剤層には圧力特性を改良するためポリマーや乳化物などの可塑剤を含有させることができる。
例えば、英国特許第738618号明細書には異節環状化合物を、同738637号明細書にはアルキルフタレートを、同738639号明細書にはアルキルエステルを、米国特許2,960,404号明細書には多価アルコールを、同3,121,060号明細書にはカルボキシルアルキルセルロースを、特開昭49-5017号公報にはパラフィンとカルボン酸塩を、特公昭53-28086号公報にはアルキルアクリレートと有機酸を用いる方法等が開示されており、本開示でもこれらの方法を使用することができる。
In the hydrophilic colloid layer of the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, polyols such as trimethylolpropane, pentanediol, butanediol, ethylene glycol, glycerin, etc. can be used as a plasticizer. In addition, in the emulsion layer of the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, a plasticizer such as a polymer or an emulsion can be contained to improve pressure characteristics.
For example, British Patent No. 738618 discloses a method using a heterocyclic compound, British Patent No. 738637 discloses an alkyl phthalate, British Patent No. 738639 discloses an alkyl ester, U.S. Patent No. 2,960,404 discloses a polyhydric alcohol, U.S. Patent No. 3,121,060 discloses a carboxyl alkyl cellulose, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 49-5017 discloses a method using paraffin and a carboxylate, and Japanese Patent Publication No. 53-28086 discloses a method using an alkyl acrylate and an organic acid, and these methods can also be used in the present disclosure.
10)親水性コロイド
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の乳剤層や中間層及び表面保護層に用いることのできる結合剤又は保護コロイドとしては、ゼラチンを用いるのが有利であるが、それ以外の親水性コロイドも用いることができる。
親水性コロイドとしては、特開平2-68539号公報第12頁右上欄11行目から同左下欄16行目に記載のものが挙げられる。
10) Hydrophilic Colloid As a binder or protective colloid that can be used in the emulsion layer, intermediate layer, and surface protective layer of the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, gelatin is advantageously used, but other hydrophilic colloids can also be used.
Examples of hydrophilic colloids include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 12, upper right column, line 11 to lower left column, line 16.
例えばゼラチン誘導体、ゼラチンと他の高分子とのグラフトポリマー、アルブミン、カゼイン等の蛋白質;ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、カルボキシメチルセルロース、セルロース硫酸エステル類等の如きセルロース誘導体、アルギン酸ソーダ、デキストラン、澱粉誘導体などの糖誘導体;ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルアルコール部分アセタール(ポリ-N-ビニルピロリドン、ポリアクリル酸、ポリメタクリル酸、ポリアクリルアミド、ポリビニルイミダゾール、ポリビニルピラゾール等の単一あるいは共重合体の如き多種の合成親水性高分子物質を用いることができる。
ゼラチンとしては石灰処理ゼラチンのほか、酸処理ゼラチンや酵素処理ゼラチンを用いてもよく、また、ゼラチンの加水分解物や酵素分解物も用いることができる。
これらの中でもゼラチンとともに平均分子量10万以下のデキストランやポリアクリルアミドを併用することが好ましい。特開昭63-68887号公報、特開昭63-149641号公報に記載の方法は本開示においても用いることができる。
For example, various synthetic hydrophilic polymeric substances can be used, such as gelatin derivatives, graft polymers of gelatin with other polymers, proteins such as albumin and casein; cellulose derivatives such as hydroxyethyl cellulose, carboxymethyl cellulose, and cellulose sulfate esters; sugar derivatives such as sodium alginate, dextran, and starch derivatives; and homopolymers or copolymers of polyvinyl alcohol, polyvinyl alcohol partial acetal (poly-N-vinylpyrrolidone, polyacrylic acid, polymethacrylic acid, polyacrylamide, polyvinylimidazole, polyvinylpyrazole, etc.).
As the gelatin, lime-processed gelatin, acid-processed gelatin, enzyme-processed gelatin, and gelatin hydrolysates and enzyme-decomposed gelatin can also be used.
Among these, it is preferable to use gelatin in combination with dextran or polyacrylamide having an average molecular weight of 100,000 or less. The methods described in JP-A-63-68887 and JP-A-63-149641 can also be used in the present disclosure.
11)硬膜剤
写真乳剤及び非感光性の親水性コロイドには、無機又は有機の硬膜剤を含有してよい。
硬膜剤としては、特開平2-68539号公報第12頁左下欄17行目から同第13頁右上欄6行目に記載のものが挙げられる。
具体的には、例えばクロム塩(クロム明ばん、酢酸クロムなど)、アルデヒド類(ホルムアルデヒド、グリオキサール、ダリタールアルデヒドなど)、N-メチロール化合物(ジメチロール尿素、メチロールジメチルとダントインなど)、ジオキサン誘導体(2,3-ジヒドロキシジオキサンなど)、活性ビニル化合物(1,3,5-トリアクリロイル-ヘキサヒドロ-s-トリアジン、ビス(ビニルスルホニル)メチルエーテル、N,N’-メチレンビス-(β-(ビニルスルホニル)プロピオンアミド)など)、活性ハロゲン化合物(2,4-ジクロル-6-ヒドロキシ-s-トリアジンなど)、ムコハロゲン酸類(ムコクロル酸、ムコフェノキシクロル酸など)イソオキサゾール類、ジアルデヒドでん粉、2-クロル-6-ヒドロキシトリアジニル化ゼラチンなどを、単独又は組合せて用いることができる。中でも、特開昭53-41221号公報、同53-57257号公報、同59-162546号公報、同60-80846号公報に記載の活性ビニル化合物及び米国特許第3,325,287号明細書に記載の活性ハロゲン化物が好ましい。
11) Hardeners Photographic emulsions and non-light-sensitive hydrophilic colloids may contain inorganic or organic hardeners.
Examples of hardeners include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 12, lower left column, line 17 to page 13, upper right column, line 6.
Specific examples of such compounds that can be used alone or in combination include chromium salts (chrome alum, chromium acetate, etc.), aldehydes (formaldehyde, glyoxal, dimethicone aldehyde, etc.), N-methylol compounds (dimethylol urea, methylol dimethyl dantoin, etc.), dioxane derivatives (2,3-dihydroxydioxane, etc.), active vinyl compounds (1,3,5-triacryloyl-hexahydro-s-triazine, bis(vinylsulfonyl)methyl ether, N,N'-methylenebis-(β-(vinylsulfonyl)propionamide)), active halogen compounds (2,4-dichloro-6-hydroxy-s-triazine, etc.), mucohalogen acids (mucochloric acid, mucophenoxychloroic acid, etc.), isoxazoles, dialdehyde starch, and 2-chloro-6-hydroxytriazinylated gelatin. Of these, the active vinyl compounds described in JP-A Nos. 53-41221, 53-57257, 59-162546 and 60-80846 and the active halides described in US Pat. No. 3,325,287 are preferred.
硬膜剤としては、高分子硬膜剤も有効に利用することができる。
高分子硬膜剤としては例えばジアルデヒド澱粉、ポリアクロレイン、米国特許第3,396,029号明細書に記載のアクロレイン共重合体のようなアルデヒド基を有するポリマー、米国特許第3,623,878号明細書に記載のエポキシ基を有するポリマー、米国特許第3,362,827号明細書、リサーチディスクロージャ誌No.17333(1978)などに記載されているジクロロトリアジン基を有するポリマー、特開昭56-66841号公報に記載されている活性エステル基を有するポリマー、特開昭56-142524号公報、米国特許4,161,407号明細書、特開昭54-65033号公報、リサーチディスクロージャ誌No.16725(1978)などに記載されている活性ビニル基、あるいはその前駆体となる基を有するポリマーなどが挙げられ、活性ビニル基、あるいはその前駆体となる基を有するポリマーが好ましく、中でも特開昭56-142524号公報に記載されているような、長いスペーサーによって活性ビニル基、あるいはその前駆体となる基がポリマー主鎖に結合されているようなポリマーが特に好ましい。
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料中の親水性コロイド層は、これらの硬膜剤により水中での膨潤率が300%以下、特に230%以下になるように硬膜されていることが好ましい。
As the hardener, a polymer hardener can also be effectively used.
Examples of polymeric hardeners include dialdehyde starch, polyacrolein, polymers having an aldehyde group such as the acrolein copolymer described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,396,029, polymers having an epoxy group described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,623,878, polymers having a dichlorotriazine group described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,362,827 and Research Disclosure No. 17333 (1978), polymers having an active ester group described in JP-A No. 56-66841, polymers having an active ester group described in JP-A No. 56-142524, U.S. Pat. No. 4,161,407, JP-A No. 54-65033, and Research Disclosure No. 17333 (1978), and polymers having an active ester group described in JP-A No. 56-142524, U.S. Pat. No. 4,161,407, JP-A No. 54-65033, and Research Disclosure No. 17333 (1978). 16725 (1978), or a polymer having an active vinyl group or a group that will be a precursor thereof. Polymers having an active vinyl group or a group that will be a precursor thereof are preferred, and particularly preferred are polymers in which an active vinyl group or a group that will be a precursor thereof is bound to the polymer main chain by a long spacer, as described in JP-A-56-142524.
The hydrophilic colloid layer in the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure is preferably hardened with these hardeners so that the swelling ratio in water is 300% or less, particularly 230% or less.
12)支持体
支持体としては、特開平2-68539号公報第13頁右上欄7行目から20行目に記載のものが挙げられる。具体的には、支持体としてはポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム又は三酢酸セルロースフィルムが好ましい。
支持体は、親水性コロイド層との密着力を向上せしめるために、その表面をコロナ放電処理、あるいはグロー放電処理あるいは紫外線照射処理する方法が好ましく、あるいは、スチレンブタジエン系ラテックス、塩化ビニリデン系ラテックス等からなる下塗層を設けてもよくまた、その上層にゼラチン層を更に設けてもよい。
また、ポリエチレン膨潤剤とゼラチンを含む有機溶剤を用いた下塗層を設けてもよい。これらの下塗層は表面処理を加えることで更に親水性コロイド層との密着力を向上することもできる。
12) Support Examples of the support include those described in JP-A No. 2-68539, page 13, upper right column, lines 7 to 20. Specifically, the support is preferably a polyethylene terephthalate film or a cellulose triacetate film.
In order to improve adhesion to the hydrophilic colloid layer, the surface of the support is preferably subjected to a corona discharge treatment, a glow discharge treatment or an ultraviolet irradiation treatment. Alternatively, a subbing layer made of a styrene-butadiene latex, a vinylidene chloride latex or the like may be provided, and a gelatin layer may be further provided on top of the subbing layer.
Furthermore, a subbing layer may be provided using an organic solvent containing a polyethylene swelling agent and gelatin. The adhesion of such a subbing layer to a hydrophilic colloid layer can be further improved by adding a surface treatment to the subbing layer.
13)クロスオーバーカット法
クロスオーバー光が鮮鋭度を大幅に低下させることは当業界では周知の事実である。写真感光材料のクロスオーバー光が12%以下であるようにする手段としては、米国特許第4,130,429号明細書、特開昭61-116354号公報などにX線蛍光スクリーンの発光波長と一致する波長の光を増感色素や染料を用いて吸収する方法が開示されている。
13) Crossover Cut Method It is well known in the art that crossover light significantly reduces sharpness. As a means for keeping the crossover light of a photographic material to 12% or less, U.S. Pat. No. 4,130,429 and JP-A-61-116354 disclose methods for absorbing light of a wavelength that coincides with the emission wavelength of an X-ray fluorescent screen using a sensitizing dye or dye.
更に、米国特許第4,800,150号明細書には支持体と乳剤層の間に染料を微結晶分散物の形として存在させクロスオーバー光が10%以下であるようにする技術が開示されている。また、特開昭63-305345号公報には、カチオン性ポリマーラテックスを用いてアニオンは染料を特定層に固定する技術が、更に特開平1-166031号公報には染料の固定層を支持体の下塗り層にする技術が開示されている。本開示に係る感光材料ではこれらのいずれの方法をも用いることができるが、染料による着色層は下塗り層であることが好ましく、染料は特開平1-166031号公報に記載の方法で固定されていること、特に染料が米国特許第4,803,150号明細書に記載の微結晶分散物のかたちで下塗り層に固定されていることが望ましい。本開示ではこれらの方法を適宜組み合わせることが可能である。
好ましい染料としては、特開平2-264944号公報第4頁左下欄から第9頁右上欄に記載のものが挙げられる。
また、媒染層としては、特開平2-264944号公報第9頁右下欄から第14買右上欄に記載のものを使用することができる。
Furthermore, U.S. Pat. No. 4,800,150 discloses a technique in which a dye is present in the form of a microcrystalline dispersion between the support and the emulsion layer, thereby reducing crossover light to 10% or less. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 63-305345 discloses a technique in which an anionic dye is fixed in a specific layer using a cationic polymer latex, and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 1-166031 discloses a technique in which the dye fixing layer is an undercoat layer of the support. While any of these methods can be used in the photosensitive material of the present disclosure, it is preferred that the dye-colored layer be an undercoat layer, and that the dye be fixed by the method described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 1-166031, and it is particularly preferred that the dye be fixed in the undercoat layer in the form of a microcrystalline dispersion described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,803,150. In the present disclosure, these methods can be combined as appropriate.
Preferred dyes include those described in the lower left column on page 4 to the upper right column on page 9 of JP-A No. 2-264944.
As the mordant layer, those described in the lower right column to the upper right column of page 14 of JP-A No. 2-264944 can be used.
14)ポリヒドロキシベンゼン類
ポリヒドロキシベンゼン類としては、特開平3-39948号公報第11頁左上欄から同第12頁左下欄、欧州特許出願公開第452772A号明細書に記載のものが挙げられる。
具体的には、特開平8-39948号公報第11頁左上欄に記載の一般式(III)の化合物、その具体的化合物である同公報第11頁左下欄から第12頁左下欄に記載の(III)-1~25の化合物が挙げられる。
これらポリヒドロキシベンゼン化合物の添加量としては、ハロゲン化銀1モルあたり、5×10-1モル未満であればよく、好ましくはハロゲン化銀1モルあたり、5×10-3モル~1×10-1モルの添加量である。
14) Polyhydroxybenzenes Examples of polyhydroxybenzenes include those described in JP-A No. 3-39948, page 11, upper left column to page 12, lower left column, and European Patent Application Publication No. 452772A.
Specific examples thereof include the compound of general formula (III) described in the upper left column of page 11 of JP-A-8-39948, and specific compounds thereof, namely, compounds (III)-1 to -25 described in the lower left column of page 11 to the lower left column of page 12 of the same publication.
The amount of these polyhydroxybenzene compounds added may be less than 5×10 −1 mol per mol of silver halide, and preferably 5×10 −3 to 1×10 −1 mol per mol of silver halide.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、支持体上に、感光性ハロゲン化銀粒子を含むハロゲン化銀乳剤層(感光層)と、例えば、中間層、表面保護層、バック層、バック面保護層、アンチハレーション層、フィルター層等の少なくとも1層の非感光性の親水性コロイド層とから構成されるが、その他用いられる乳剤増感法や各種添加剤に関しては特に制限はなく、例えば特開平2-68539号公報等に記載のものを好適に用いることができる。 The silver halide photographic material according to the present disclosure is composed of a support, a silver halide emulsion layer (photosensitive layer) containing photosensitive silver halide grains, and at least one non-photosensitive hydrophilic colloid layer, such as an intermediate layer, surface protective layer, back layer, back surface protective layer, antihalation layer, or filter layer. However, there are no particular restrictions on the emulsion sensitization method or various additives used, and those described in, for example, JP-A No. 2-68539 can be suitably used.
15)表面保護層及びバック保護層
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、表面保護層及びバック保護層を有しているのが好ましく、前記表面保護層及びバック保護層は、ゼラチンなどの親水性コロイドをバインダーとして、様々な薬品を含有している。その層の主成分がゼラチンである場合は防腐剤などが必要である。また、必要に応じてマット剤、滑り剤、可塑剤、帯電防止剤、界面活性剤、硬膜剤、増粘剤、染料、導電性物質などを含有することが好ましい。
15) Surface Protective Layer and Back Protective Layer The silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure preferably has a surface protective layer and a back protective layer, which contain various chemicals with a hydrophilic colloid such as gelatin as a binder. When the main component of the layer is gelatin, a preservative or the like is necessary. Furthermore, it is preferable that the layer contains a matting agent, a lubricant, a plasticizer, an antistatic agent, a surfactant, a hardener, a thickener, a dye, a conductive substance, or the like, as needed.
16)現像処理方法
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の現像処理方法としては、特開平2-103037号公報第16頁右上欄7行目から同第19頁左下欄15行目、特開平2-115837号公報第3頁右下欄5行目から同第6頁を上欄10行目、及び特開2000-112078号公報第34頁左欄42行目から同35頁左欄2行目に記載の方法を採用することができる。また、熱現像感光材料においては特開2001-255617号公報第37項左欄40行目から同35頁左欄43行目に記載の方法等を採用することができる。
16) Development Processing Method As a development processing method for the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, the methods described in JP-A No. 2-103037, page 16, upper right column, line 7 to page 19, lower left column, line 15, JP-A No. 2-115837, page 3, lower right column, line 5 to page 6, upper column, line 10, and JP-A No. 2000-112078, page 34, left column, line 42 to page 35, left column, line 2 can be used. Furthermore, for thermally developable light-sensitive materials, the methods described in JP-A No. 2001-255617, page 37, left column, line 40 to page 35, left column, line 43 can be used.
本開示に係るハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の態様の一つとしては、感光性熱現像写真材料が挙げられる。その技術は特許第5623921号公報の16~189段落に記載されている。この態様においては、当該公報の181~183段落の界面活性剤を、本願記載のものとした場合に所望の効果が得られる。 One embodiment of the silver halide photographic material according to this disclosure is a photosensitive heat-developable photographic material. The technology for this is described in paragraphs 16 to 189 of Japanese Patent No. 5,623,921. In this embodiment, the desired effect can be achieved when the surfactants described in paragraphs 181 to 183 of the publication are those described in this application.
(拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料)
本開示に係る拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、支持体と、上記支持体上に、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物(本開示に係るイオン性化合物)を含む層と、を有する。
(Diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic material)
The diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure has a support and a layer on the support, the layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1 (the ionic compound according to the present disclosure):
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
本開示に係る拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料における上記イオン性化合物の好ましい態様は、上述した本開示に係るイオン性化合物の好ましい態様と同様である。
本開示に係る拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料において、本開示に係るイオン性化合物は、1種単独で含有していても、2種以上を含有していてもよい。
本開示に係る拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の上記層における本開示に係るイオン性化合物の含有量は、その用途に応じて適宜選択すればよいが、上記層の全質量に対し、0.0001質量%~50質量%であることが好ましく、0.001質量%~20質量%であることがより好ましく、0.01質量%~10質量%であることが特に好ましい。
Preferred embodiments of the ionic compound in the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure are the same as the preferred embodiments of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure described above.
The diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may contain one type of ionic compound according to the present disclosure alone, or two or more types.
The content of the ionic compound according to the present disclosure in the layer of the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may be appropriately selected depending on the application, but is preferably 0.0001% by mass to 50% by mass, more preferably 0.001% by mass to 20% by mass, and particularly preferably 0.01% by mass to 10% by mass, relative to the total mass of the layer.
上記層は、後述する拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料を構成するいずれの層であってもよい。好ましくは、塗布時に気液界面となる層であり、更に好ましくは最終的に積層された感光材料の最表層である。具体的には感光シート用基材における中間層、基材最表層、感光シートにおける中間層、保護層、カバーシートにおける温度補償層等である。中でも、感光シート用基材における基材最表層、感光シートにおける保護層、カバーシートにおける温度補償層が特に好適に挙げられる。
また、本開示に係る拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料において、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含む層は、1層であっても、2層以上であってもよい。
上記層は、後述する拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料に含まれる各種成分を含んでいてもよい。
The layer may be any layer constituting the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material described below. Preferably, it is a layer that forms an air-liquid interface during coating, and more preferably, it is the outermost layer of the finally laminated light-sensitive material. Specifically, it is an intermediate layer in a substrate for a light-sensitive sheet, the outermost layer of a substrate, an intermediate layer in a light-sensitive sheet, a protective layer, a temperature compensation layer in a cover sheet, etc. Among these, the outermost layer of a substrate in a substrate for a light-sensitive sheet, a protective layer in a light-sensitive sheet, and a temperature compensation layer in a cover sheet are particularly preferred.
Furthermore, in the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure, the layer containing the ionic compound according to the present disclosure may be one layer or two or more layers.
The above layer may contain various components contained in the diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material described below.
本開示に係る拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、感光シート及び透明カバーシートと、その間に展開されるアルカリ処理組成物含有体とを具備することが好ましい。 The diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure preferably comprises a light-sensitive sheet, a transparent cover sheet, and an alkaline processing composition-containing material spread between them.
〔1〕アルカリ処理組成物含有体
アルカリ処理組成物含有体は、露光後の感光シート上に均一に展開され、感光層を現像処理する機能と、感光シートの透明支持体の背面又は感光シート中に設けられた遮光層と共に感光層を外光から完全に遮断する機能とを有する。そのためアルカリ処理組成物含有体は典型的にはアルカリ、増粘剤、遮光剤、現像薬の他、現像を調節するための現像促進剤、現像抑制剤、現像薬の劣化を防ぐための酸化防止剤等を含有する。
[1] Alkali Processing Composition-Containing Body The alkali processing composition-containing body is uniformly spread on the photosensitive sheet after exposure to light, and has the functions of developing the photosensitive layer and, together with a light-shielding layer provided on the back side of the transparent support of the photosensitive sheet or in the photosensitive sheet, completely shielding the photosensitive layer from external light. Therefore, the alkali processing composition-containing body typically contains, in addition to alkali, a thickener, a light-shielding agent, and a developing agent, a development accelerator for controlling development, a development inhibitor for preventing deterioration of the developing agent, and an antioxidant for preventing deterioration of the developing agent.
(a)アルカリ
アルカリは液のpHを12以上とするものであれば特に限定されるものではない。アルカリの例として、アルカリ金属の水酸化物(例えば水酸化ナトリウム、水酸化カリウム及び水酸化リチウム)、アルカリ金属のリン酸塩(例えばリン酸カリウム)、グアニジン類、四級アミンの水酸化物(例えば水酸化テトラメチルアンモニウム等)が挙げられる。なかでも水酸化カリウム、水酸化ナトリウムが好ましい。
(a) Alkali The alkali is not particularly limited as long as it can adjust the pH of the solution to 12 or higher. Examples of alkalis include alkali metal hydroxides (e.g., sodium hydroxide, potassium hydroxide, and lithium hydroxide), alkali metal phosphates (e.g., potassium phosphate), guanidines, and quaternary amine hydroxides (e.g., tetramethylammonium hydroxide). Among these, potassium hydroxide and sodium hydroxide are preferred.
(b)現像薬
現像薬は色素像形成化合物をクロス酸化し、かつ酸化されても実質的にステインを生じないものであればどのようなものでもよい。現像薬は単独で使用しても二種類以上を使用してもよく、またプレカーサーの型で使用してもよい。現像薬の例としてアミノフェノール類、ピラゾリジノン類が挙げられる。このうちピラゾリジノン類はステインの発生が少ないので特に好ましい。ピラゾリジノン類の具体例として1-フェニル-3-ピラゾリジノン、1-p-トリル-4,4-ジヒドロキシメチル-3-ピラゾリジノン、1-(3’-メチル-フェニル)-4-メチル-4-ヒドロキシメチル-3-ピラゾリジノン、1-フェニル-4-メチル-4-ヒドロキシメチル-3-ピラゾリジノン、1-p-トリル-4-メチル-4-ヒドロキシメチル-3-ピラゾリジノン等が挙げられる。現像薬はアルカリ処理組成物含有体に配合されてもよいし、感光シートの適当な層中に添加されてもよい。
(b) Developing Agent Any developing agent may be used as long as it cross-oxidizes the dye image-forming compound and does not substantially produce stains even when oxidized. A single developing agent may be used, or two or more developing agents may be used, or they may be used in the form of a precursor. Examples of developing agents include aminophenols and pyrazolidinones. Of these, pyrazolidinones are particularly preferred because they cause less staining. Specific examples of pyrazolidinones include 1-phenyl-3-pyrazolidinone, 1-p-tolyl-4,4-dihydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolidinone, 1-(3'-methyl-phenyl)-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolidinone, 1-phenyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolidinone, and 1-p-tolyl-4-methyl-4-hydroxymethyl-3-pyrazolidinone. The developing agent may be incorporated into the alkaline processing composition-containing material, or may be added to an appropriate layer of the photosensitive sheet.
(c)遮光剤
遮光機能を有する材料であれば、特に限定されることなく遮光剤として利用可能である。遮光剤の例としてカーボンブラック、米国特許第4,615,966号明細書等に記載の分解性の染料が挙げられる。これらの遮光剤のうち好ましいのは、カーボンブラックである。カーボンブラックは特定の製造方法で得られたものに限定されず、任意の製造方法で得られたものでよい。カーボンブラックの製造方法の例としてDonnel Voet “Carbon Black” MarcelDekker,Inc.(1976)に記載されているようなチャンネル法の他、サーマル法及びファーネス法が挙げられる。
(c) Light-blocking agent Any material having a light-blocking function can be used as a light-blocking agent without any particular limitation. Examples of light-blocking agents include carbon black and the decomposable dyes described in U.S. Pat. No. 4,615,966. Of these light-blocking agents, carbon black is preferred. Carbon black is not limited to carbon black obtained by a specific manufacturing method, and may be obtained by any manufacturing method. Examples of methods for manufacturing carbon black include the channel method described in Donnel Voet "Carbon Black" MarcelDekker, Inc. (1976), as well as the thermal method and the furnace method.
遮光剤としてカーボンブラックを用いる場合、カーボンブラックを予め水性分散体にしておくのが好ましい。カーボンブラックの水性分散体は塗料、インキ、化粧品あるいは写真性感光材料として、黒色材料あるいは遮光性材料として、非常に良く用いられている。カーボンブラックの水性分散体を調製するには、適当な分散剤を溶解させた水中にカーボンブラックを添加し、粗分散機(例えば特願昭54-36045号公報に記載のディゾルバー等の高速撹拌分散機)を用いてカーボンブラックの平均粒径を10μm~100μm程度にして粗分散させた後、細分散機(例えばサンドグラインダー、ホモジナイザー、コロイドミル等)によって更に粒径を小さくすることが一般的である。この工程により、概ね0.1μm~10μmの平均粒径を有するカーボンブラックの水性分散物を得ることができる。また特開昭58-52362号公報記載のように、有機溶剤を含有する水溶液にカーボンブラックを分散させた後、有機溶剤を除去してカーボンブラックの水性分散物としてもよい。 When using carbon black as a light-blocking agent, it is preferable to prepare the carbon black in an aqueous dispersion beforehand. Aqueous dispersions of carbon black are widely used in paints, inks, cosmetics, and photographic materials, as black materials, or light-blocking materials. To prepare an aqueous dispersion of carbon black, carbon black is added to water containing a suitable dispersant, and the carbon black is coarsely dispersed using a coarse disperser (e.g., a high-speed agitator such as the Dissolver described in Japanese Patent Application No. 54-36045) to achieve an average particle size of approximately 10 μm to 100 μm. The particle size is then further reduced using a fine disperser (e.g., a sand grinder, homogenizer, colloid mill, etc.). This process yields an aqueous dispersion of carbon black with an average particle size of approximately 0.1 μm to 10 μm. Alternatively, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 58-52362, carbon black may be dispersed in an aqueous solution containing an organic solvent, followed by removal of the organic solvent to obtain an aqueous dispersion of carbon black.
好ましい分散剤として、「分散技術総合資料集」(経営開発センター出版部)255頁~257頁及び501頁~539頁に記載のものが挙げられる。市販されている分散剤の例として、デモールN(商品名、花王株式会社製)が挙げられる。 Preferred dispersants include those described on pages 255-257 and 501-539 of "Dispersion Technology Comprehensive Data Collection" (Business Development Center Publishing Division). An example of a commercially available dispersant is Demol N (trade name, manufactured by Kao Corporation).
分散剤の種類及び/又は量は、後述するナトリウムイオン含有量に影響する。分散剤の種類及び/又は量は、(a)遮光剤に十分な分散性を付与するという条件のほか、(b)ナトリウムイオン含有量の条件も満たすように決定する必要がある。分散性とナトリウムイオン含有量の条件を共に満たすには、分散剤の配合量を遮光剤に対して2質量%~100質量%とすることが好ましい。 The type and/or amount of dispersant affects the sodium ion content, which will be described later. The type and/or amount of dispersant must be determined so as to satisfy (a) the condition of providing sufficient dispersibility to the light-blocking agent, as well as (b) the condition of sodium ion content. To satisfy both the conditions of dispersibility and sodium ion content, it is preferable to set the amount of dispersant to 2% to 100% by mass relative to the light-blocking agent.
(d)光学濃度
アルカリ処理組成物含有体の光学濃度は47以上であることが好ましく、50以上であることがより好ましく、55以上であることが特に好ましい。光学濃度が47以上であると、十分な遮光性が得られ、スポットかぶりが抑制される。光学濃度が47以上になるように、遮光剤の配合量を決めるのが好ましい。使用する遮光剤の種類にも拠るが、光学濃度を47以上にするには遮光剤の配合量を概ね10質量%~40質量%とすることが好ましい。
(d) Optical Density The optical density of the alkali treatment composition-containing body is preferably 47 or more, more preferably 50 or more, and particularly preferably 55 or more. When the optical density is 47 or more, sufficient light-shielding properties are obtained and spot fogging is suppressed. It is preferable to determine the amount of the light-shielding agent to be blended so that the optical density is 47 or more. Although it depends on the type of light-shielding agent used, it is preferable to set the amount of the light-shielding agent to about 10% by mass to 40% by mass in order to achieve an optical density of 47 or more.
(e)ナトリウムイオン含有量
アルカリ処理組成物含有体のナトリウムイオン含有量は、展開された状態で好ましくは0.4g/m2以下である。ナトリウムイオン含有量は0.35g/m2以下であることが更に好ましく、0.25g/m2以下であることが特に好ましい。
(e) Sodium ion content The sodium ion content of the alkaline treatment composition-containing material in a spread state is preferably 0.4 g/ m2 or less. The sodium ion content is more preferably 0.35 g/ m2 or less, and particularly preferably 0.25 g/ m2 or less.
ナトリウムイオンの含有量は主として上述の遮光剤の分散剤の他、増粘剤によって決まる。
増粘剤として特に好ましいのは、ナトリウムカルボキシメチルセルロースである。ナトリウムカルボキシメチルセルロースは十分な展開性及び安定性を有する。ポリビニルアルコール、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、カルボキシメチルセルロースのナトリウム以外のアルカリ金属塩を増粘剤として使用すると、ナトリウムイオン含有量を小さくすることができる。しかし、これらは十分な展開性及び安定性を有していないので、単独で使用するのは適切でない。そのため、増粘剤としては主にナトリウムカルボキシメチルセルロースを用いた上で、ポリビニルアルコール、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、カルボキシメチルセルロースのナトリウム以外のアルカリ金属塩を併用することが好ましい。
The content of sodium ions is mainly determined by the dispersant for the light-blocking agent and the thickener.
Sodium carboxymethylcellulose is particularly preferred as a thickener. Sodium carboxymethylcellulose has sufficient spreadability and stability. The sodium ion content can be reduced by using polyvinyl alcohol, hydroxyethyl cellulose, or an alkali metal salt of carboxymethylcellulose other than sodium as a thickener. However, these do not have sufficient spreadability and stability, so their use alone is not appropriate. Therefore, it is preferable to use sodium carboxymethylcellulose primarily as a thickener, and to use polyvinyl alcohol, hydroxyethyl cellulose, or an alkali metal salt of carboxymethylcellulose other than sodium in combination.
ナトリウムイオン含有量が展開された状態で0.4g/m2以下になるように、ナトリウムカルボキシメチルセルロースのエーテル化度と、添加量を調整することが好ましい。ナトリウムカルボキシメチルセルロースのエーテル化度は0.5~2.7であることが好ましく、1.0~2.4であることがより好ましい。ナトリウムカルボキシメチルセルロースの配合量は1質量%~15質量%とすることが好ましく、2質量%~10質量%とすることがより好ましい。 It is preferable to adjust the degree of etherification of sodium carboxymethylcellulose and the amount added so that the sodium ion content in the developed state is 0.4 g/ m2 or less. The degree of etherification of sodium carboxymethylcellulose is preferably 0.5 to 2.7, and more preferably 1.0 to 2.4. The amount of sodium carboxymethylcellulose added is preferably 1% by mass to 15% by mass, and more preferably 2% by mass to 10% by mass.
上述の光学濃度及びナトリウムイオン含有量を満たすアルカリ処理組成物含有体は、感光シート上に薄く展開されても優れた遮光性及び色素転写性を示す。本明細書中、「薄く展開」とは、アルカリ処理組成物含有体が感光シート上に10μm~80μmの厚さで展開されることを示す。好ましい展開厚さは10μm~70μmであり、より好ましい展開厚さは20μm~60μmである。 An alkaline processing composition-containing material that satisfies the above-mentioned optical density and sodium ion content exhibits excellent light-blocking properties and dye transfer properties even when spread thinly on a photosensitive sheet. In this specification, "thinly spread" means that the alkaline processing composition-containing material is spread to a thickness of 10 μm to 80 μm on the photosensitive sheet. A preferred spread thickness is 10 μm to 70 μm, and a more preferred spread thickness is 20 μm to 60 μm.
〔2〕感光シート
(a)第一の透明支持体
感光シートの支持体は、写真感光材料に通常用いられるものであればよい。一体型のカラー拡散転写フイルムユニットの支持体は、透明である必要がある。支持体は平滑であることが好ましい。支持体材料の例として酢酸セルロース、ポリスチレン、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリカーボネートが挙げられる。ライトパイピングを防止するために、支持体は微量の染料又は酸化チタンのような顔料を含有することが好ましい。感光シートの支持体の厚さは25μm~350μmが好ましく、50μm~210μmであることが更に好ましく、70μm~150μmであることが特に好ましい。支持体の表側の面には、下塗り層(下引層)を設けるのが好ましい。また支持体のバック側には、必要に応じてカールバランスをとる層又は酸素遮断性の層を設けることができる。酸素遮断性の層については、特開昭56-78833号公報の記載を参照して設けることができる。
[2] Photosensitive Sheet (a) First Transparent Support The support of the photosensitive sheet may be any of those commonly used for photographic materials. The support of the integrated color diffusion transfer film unit must be transparent. The support is preferably smooth. Examples of support materials include cellulose acetate, polystyrene, polyethylene terephthalate, and polycarbonate. To prevent light piping, the support preferably contains a trace amount of dye or pigment such as titanium oxide. The thickness of the support of the photosensitive sheet is preferably 25 μm to 350 μm, more preferably 50 μm to 210 μm, and particularly preferably 70 μm to 150 μm. A primer layer (undercoat layer) is preferably provided on the front side of the support. Furthermore, a curl-balancing layer or an oxygen-blocking layer can be provided on the back side of the support as needed. The oxygen-blocking layer can be provided by referring to the description in JP-A-56-78833.
(b)受像層
感光シートの受像層(染料受像層)は媒染剤及び親水性コロイドを含有することが好ましい。受像層は単一の層でもよいし、異なる媒染力を有する層が積層した構成のものでもよい。単層及び多層の受像層については、特開昭61-252551号公報の記載を参照して設けることができる。
(b) Image-receiving layer The image-receiving layer (dye image-receiving layer) of the photosensitive sheet preferably contains a mordant and a hydrophilic colloid. The image-receiving layer may be a single layer or may be a laminate of layers having different mordanting powers. Single-layer and multi-layer image-receiving layers can be provided by referring to the description in JP-A-61-252551.
媒染剤としては、ポリマー媒染剤が好ましい。ポリマー媒染剤とは、二級及び/又は三級アミノ基を含むポリマー、含窒素複素環部分を有するポリマー、並びに四級カチオンを含むポリマー等であって、分子量が5,000以上のものが好ましく、特に好ましくは10,000以上のものである。媒染剤の塗設量は好ましくは0.5g/m2~10g/m2であり、より好ましくは1g/m2~5g/m2であり、特に好ましくは2g/m2~4g/m2である。 The mordant is preferably a polymer mordant. Polymer mordants include polymers containing secondary and/or tertiary amino groups, polymers having a nitrogen-containing heterocyclic moiety, and polymers containing a quaternary cation, and preferably have a molecular weight of 5,000 or more, particularly preferably 10,000 or more. The coating amount of the mordant is preferably 0.5 g/m 2 to 10 g/m 2 , more preferably 1 g/m 2 to 5 g/m 2 , and particularly preferably 2 g/m 2 to 4 g/m 2 .
親水性コロイドとしてはゼラチン、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリアクリルアミド、ポリビニルピロリドン等が挙げられる。好ましい親水性コロイドはゼラチンである。 Hydrophilic colloids include gelatin, polyvinyl alcohol, polyacrylamide, polyvinylpyrrolidone, etc. The preferred hydrophilic colloid is gelatin.
受像層は退色防止剤を含有してもよい。退色防止剤について特に制限はないが、例えば特開昭62-30620号公報や特開昭62-30621号公報及び特開昭62-215272号公報に記載されているものを用いることができる。
受像層の厚さは、一般的なカラー拡散転写フイルムユニットの受像層の厚さと同じで良い。
The image receiving layer may contain a discoloration inhibitor. There are no particular restrictions on the discoloration inhibitor, but those described in, for example, JP-A Nos. 62-30620, 62-30621, and 62-215272 can be used.
The thickness of the image receiving layer may be the same as that of an ordinary color diffusion transfer film unit.
(c)白色反射層
感光シートの白色反射層は、色画像の白背景を成す。白色反射層は通常、白色顔料及び親水性バインダーを含有する。
(c) White Reflective Layer The white reflective layer of the photosensitive sheet forms a white background for the color image and usually contains a white pigment and a hydrophilic binder.
白色反射層の白色度は顔料の種類、顔料とバインダーとの混合比率及び顔料の塗布量によって決まる。白色顔料が二酸化チタンである場合、二酸化チタンの含有量は、好ましくは5g/m2~40g/m2であり、より好ましくは10g/m2~25g/m2である。 The whiteness of the white reflective layer is determined by the type of pigment, the mixing ratio of the pigment to the binder, and the coating amount of the pigment. When the white pigment is titanium dioxide, the content of titanium dioxide is preferably 5 g/m 2 to 40 g/m 2 , more preferably 10 g/m 2 to 25 g/m 2 .
白色反射層の光反射率は70%以上であることが好ましく、540nmの波長の光で78%~85%であることがより好ましい。 The light reflectance of the white reflective layer is preferably 70% or higher, and more preferably 78% to 85% for light with a wavelength of 540 nm.
白色顔料の例としては、硫酸バリウム、酸化亜鉛、ステアリン酸バリウム、銀フレーク、ケイ酸塩類、アルミナ、酸化ジルコニウム、ジルコニウム硫酸ソーダ、カオリン、雲母及び二酸化チタンが挙げられる。またポリスチレン等の非造膜性のポリマー粒子も白色顔料として使用可能である。中でも二酸化チタンが好ましく、ルチル型の二酸化チタンが特に好ましい。白色顔料は単独で使用してもよいし、2種以上使用してもよい。2種以上の白色顔料を使用すると、白色反射層の反射率を好ましい値にし易い。 Examples of white pigments include barium sulfate, zinc oxide, barium stearate, silver flakes, silicates, alumina, zirconium oxide, sodium zirconium sulfate, kaolin, mica, and titanium dioxide. Non-film-forming polymer particles such as polystyrene can also be used as white pigments. Of these, titanium dioxide is preferred, with rutile titanium dioxide being particularly preferred. White pigments may be used alone or in combination of two or more types. Using two or more types of white pigments makes it easier to achieve a desired reflectance value for the white reflective layer.
白色顔料としてはアルミナ、シリカ、酸化亜鉛等によって表面処理されたものが好ましく、表面処理量が5%以上のものがより好ましい。表面処理された白色顔料を含有する白色反射層は、高い反射率を示す。 White pigments that are surface-treated with alumina, silica, zinc oxide, etc. are preferred, with the amount of surface treatment being 5% or more being more preferred. A white reflective layer containing surface-treated white pigment exhibits high reflectivity.
市販の二酸化チタンの例として、デュポン社のTi-pure R931(商品名)や、リサーチ・ディスクロージャ(RD)No.15162号に記載のものが挙げられる。 Commercially available examples of titanium dioxide include DuPont's Ti-pure R931 (trade name) and those described in Research Disclosure (RD) No. 15162.
親水性バインダーとしては、ゼラチン、ポリビニルアルコール等のアルカリ浸透性の高分子マトリックスや、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、カルボキシルメチルセルロース等のセルロース誘導体が挙げられる。バインダーがゼラチンの場合、白色顔料とゼラチンの質量比は、好ましくは1/1~20/1であり、より好ましくは5/1~10/1である。 Hydrophilic binders include alkali-permeable polymer matrices such as gelatin and polyvinyl alcohol, and cellulose derivatives such as hydroxyethyl cellulose and carboxymethyl cellulose. When the binder is gelatin, the mass ratio of the white pigment to the gelatin is preferably 1/1 to 20/1, and more preferably 5/1 to 10/1.
白色反射層は褪色防止剤を含有することが好ましい。褪色防止剤については、特に制限はないが、例えば特公昭62-30620号公報や特公昭62-30621号公報に記載されているものを用いることができる。 The white reflective layer preferably contains an anti-fading agent. There are no particular restrictions on the anti-fading agent, but for example, those described in Japanese Patent Publication Nos. 62-30620 and 62-30621 can be used.
(d)遮光層
遮光層は白色反射層と感光層の間に設けられる。遮光層は遮光剤及び親水性バインダーを含有することが好ましい。
(d) Light-shielding layer The light-shielding layer is provided between the white reflective layer and the photosensitive layer. The light-shielding layer preferably contains a light-shielding agent and a hydrophilic binder.
遮光剤は、上述の〔1〕アルカリ処理組成物含有体の(c)遮光剤に記載のものでよい。遮光剤の含有量は遮光すべき感光材料の感度によってさまざまであるが、一般的には光学濃度で5~10程度が好ましい。 The light-blocking agent may be one of those listed in (c) Light-blocking agent in [1] Alkaline processing composition-containing substance above. The amount of light-blocking agent contained will vary depending on the sensitivity of the photosensitive material to be blocked, but an optical density of about 5 to 10 is generally preferred.
遮光層のバインダーは、カーボンブラック等の遮光剤を分散しうるものならいずれでも良い。好ましいバインダーとして、ゼラチンが挙げられる。 The binder for the light-shielding layer can be any material that can disperse a light-shielding agent such as carbon black. A preferred binder is gelatin.
十分な遮光能を発揮し、かつ感光シートを厚くし過ぎない範囲であれば、遮光層の厚さは、特に制限されるものではない。 There are no particular restrictions on the thickness of the light-shielding layer, as long as it provides sufficient light-shielding ability and does not make the photosensitive sheet too thick.
(e)感光層
感光層は遮光層に隣接し、色素像形成化合物及びハロゲン化銀乳剤を含有することが好ましい。感光層は、ハロゲン化銀乳剤層と色素像形成化合物層からなる多層であっても、ハロゲン化銀乳剤及び色素像形成化合物の両方を含有する単層であってもよい。以下多層の場合について説明するが、単層の場合も同様である。
(e) Photosensitive layer The photosensitive layer is adjacent to the light-shielding layer and preferably contains a dye image-forming compound and a silver halide emulsion. The photosensitive layer may be a multilayer consisting of a silver halide emulsion layer and a dye image-forming compound layer, or a single layer containing both a silver halide emulsion and a dye image-forming compound. The multilayer case will be explained below, but the same applies to a single layer case.
(f)色素像形成化合物
色素像形成化合物には、イエロー色素形成化合物、マゼンタ色素形成化合物及びシアン色素形成化合物がある。
イエロー色素形成化合物の具体例は、米国特許第3,597,200号明細書、米国特許第3,309,199号明細書、米国特許第4,013,633号明細書、米国特許第4,245,028号明細書、米国特許第4,156,609号明細書、米国特許第4,139,383号明細書、米国特許第4,195,992号明細書、米国特許第4,148,641号明細書、米国特許第4,148,643号明細書、米国特許第4,336,322号明細書、特開昭51-114930号公報、特開昭56-71072号公報、Research Disclosure 17630(1978)号、及びResearch Disclosure 16475(1977)号などに記載されている。
(f) Dye Image-Forming Compounds Dye image-forming compounds include yellow dye-forming compounds, magenta dye-forming compounds, and cyan dye-forming compounds.
Specific examples of yellow dye-forming compounds are described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,597,200, 3,309,199, 4,013,633, 4,245,028, 4,156,609, 4,139,383, 4,195,992, 4,148,641, 4,148,643, 4,336,322, JP-A-51-114930, JP-A-56-71072, Research Disclosure 17630 (1978), and Research Disclosure 16475 (1977).
マゼンタ色素形成化合物の具体例は、米国特許第3,453,107号明細書、米国特許第3,544,545号明細書、米国特許第3,932,380号明細書、米国特許第3,931,144号明細書、米国特許第3,932,308号明細書、米国特許第3,954,476号公報、米国特許4,233,237号公報、米国特許4,255,509号明細書、米国特許第4,250,246号明細書、米国特許第4,142,891号明細書、米国特許第4,207,104号明細書、米国特許第4,287,292号明細書、特開昭52-106727号公報、特開昭53-23628号公報、特開昭55-36804号公報、特開昭56-73057号公報、特開昭56-71060号公報、特開昭55-134号公報、特開平7-120901号公報、特開昭8-286343号公報、特開昭8-286344号公報、及び特開昭8-292537号公報などに記載されている。 Specific examples of magenta dye-forming compounds are disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,453,107, 3,544,545, 3,932,380, 3,931,144, 3,932,308, 3,954,476, 4,233,237, 4,255,509, 4,250,246, and 4,142,891. These are described in the fine print, U.S. Patent No. 4,207,104, U.S. Patent No. 4,287,292, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Nos. 52-106727, 53-23628, 55-36804, 56-73057, 56-71060, 55-134, 7-120901, 8-286343, 8-286344, and 8-292537, among others.
シアン色素形成化合物の具体例は、米国特許第3,482,972号明細書、米国特許第3,929,760号明細書、米国特許第4,013,635号明細書、米国特許第4,268,625号明細書、米国特許第4,171,220号明細書、米国特許第4,242,435号明細書、米国特許第4,142,891号明細書、米国特許第4,195,994号明細書、米国特許第4,147,544号明細書、米国特許第4,148,642号明細書、英国特許第1,551,138号明細書、特開昭54-99431号公報、特開昭52-8827号公報、特開昭53-47823号公報、特開昭53-143323号公報、特開昭54-99431号公報、特開昭56-71061号公報、ヨーロッパ特許(EP)53,037号公報、ヨーロッパ特許(EP)53,040号公報、Research Disclosure 17,630(1978)号、及びResearch Disclosure 16,475(1977)号などに記載されている。 Specific examples of cyan dye-forming compounds are those described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,482,972, 3,929,760, 4,013,635, 4,268,625, 4,171,220, 4,242,435, 4,142,891, 4,195,994, 4,147,544, 4,148,642, and British Patent No. 1,551,111. These are described in Patent Publication No. 38, JP 54-99431 A, JP 52-8827 A, JP 53-47823 A, JP 53-143323 A, JP 54-99431 A, JP 56-71061 A, European Patent (EP) No. 53,037, European Patent (EP) No. 53,040, Research Disclosure No. 17,630 (1978), and Research Disclosure No. 16,475 (1977), among others.
カップリングによって色素を形成する色素像形成化合物も、色素像形成化合物として使用可能である。カップリングによって色素を形成する色素像形成化合物の例は特開平8-286340号公報、特開平9-152705号公報、特開平10-186564号公報、特開平10-293388号公報等に記載されている。 Dye image-forming compounds that form dyes by coupling can also be used as dye image-forming compounds. Examples of dye image-forming compounds that form dyes by coupling are described in JP-A Nos. 8-286340, 9-152705, 10-186564, and 10-293388, etc.
ポジ型の色素像形成化合物も使用可能である。ポジ型の色素像形成化合物の例は特開平4-156542号公報、特開平4-155332号公報、特開平4-172344号公報、特開平4-172450号公報、特開平4-318844号公報、特開平4-356046号公報、特開平5-45824号公報、特開平5-45825号公報、特開平5-53279号公報、特開平5-107710号公報、特開平5-241302号公報、特開平5-107708号公報、特開平5-232659号公報及び米国特許第5,192,649号明細書などに記載されている。ポジ型の色素像形成化合物は、後述するネガ型ハロゲン化銀乳剤と組み合わせるのが好ましい。 Positive dye image-forming compounds can also be used. Examples of positive dye image-forming compounds are described in JP-A Nos. 4-156542, 4-155332, 4-172344, 4-172450, 4-318844, 4-356046, 5-45824, 5-45825, 5-53279, 5-107710, 5-241302, 5-107708, 5-232659, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,192,649, among others. Positive dye image-forming compounds are preferably combined with negative silver halide emulsions, as described below.
ポジ型の色素像形成化合物は、特開昭62-215272号公報144頁~146頁に記載の方法で分散することができる。また分散物は、特開昭62-215272号公報137頁~144頁に記載の化合物を含有してもよい。これらの色素像形成化合物の具体例として、以下の化合物が挙げられる。なお下記の化合物中のDyeは、色素基、一時的に短波化された色素基、又は色素前駆体基を表す。 Positive dye image-forming compounds can be dispersed using the method described on pages 144 to 146 of JP-A No. 62-215272. The dispersion may also contain compounds described on pages 137 to 144 of JP-A No. 62-215272. Specific examples of these dye image-forming compounds include the following compounds. In the following compounds, Dye represents a dye group, a dye group temporarily short-waved, or a dye precursor group.
(g)ハロゲン化銀乳剤
ハロゲン化銀乳剤は、主にハロゲン化銀粒子表面に潜像を形成するネガ型ハロゲン化銀乳剤でもよいし、ハロゲン化銀粒子内部に潜像を形成する内部潜像型直接ポジハロゲン化銀乳剤でもよい。内部潜像型直接ポジハロゲン化銀乳剤には、例えばハロゲン化銀の溶解度差を利用してつくる、いわゆる「コンバージョン型乳剤」や、金属イオンをドープするか、若しくは化学増感するか、又はその両方を施したハロゲン化銀の内部核(コア)粒子の少なくとも感光サイトをハロゲン化銀の外部殻(シェル)で被覆してなる「コア/シェル型乳剤」等があり、これらについては米国特許第2,592,250号、同3,206,313号、英国特許第1,027,146号、米国特許第3,761,276号、同3,935,014号、同3,447,927号、同2,297,875号、同2,563,785号、同3,551,662号、同4,395,478号、西独特許第2,728,108号、米国特許第4,431,730号の各明細書等に記載されている。
(g) Silver halide emulsions The silver halide emulsion may be a negative type silver halide emulsion in which a latent image is formed mainly on the surface of the silver halide grains, or an internal latent image type direct positive silver halide emulsion in which a latent image is formed inside the silver halide grains. Internal latent image type direct positive silver halide emulsions include, for example, so-called "conversion type emulsions" which are made by utilizing the difference in solubility of silver halide, and "core/shell type emulsions" which are made by doping metal ions or chemically sensitizing, or both, silver halide core grains, and at least the photosensitive sites of the core grains are covered with an outer shell of silver halide. These emulsions are described in U.S. Pat. These compounds are described in the specifications of, for example, British Patent Nos. 2,592,250, 3,206,313, British Patent No. 1,027,146, U.S. Patent Nos. 3,761,276, 3,935,014, 3,447,927, 2,297,875, 2,563,785, 3,551,662, 4,395,478, West German Patent No. 2,728,108, and U.S. Patent No. 4,431,730.
また、内部潜像型直接ポジハロゲン化銀乳剤を用いる場合には、像露光後に光又は造核剤を用いて表面カブリ核を与える必要がある。造核剤としては、米国特許第2,563,785号明細書、同2,588,982号明細書等に記載のヒドラジン類、米国特許第3,227,552号明細書に記載のヒドラジン類及びヒドラゾン類、英国特許第1,283,835号明細書、特開昭52-69613号公報、米国特許第3,615,615号明細書、同3,719,494号明細書、同3,734,738号明細書、同4,094,683号明細書、同4,115,122号明細書等に記載の複素環4級塩化合物、米国特許第3,718,470号明細書に記載の造核作用のある置換基を色素分子中に有する増感色素、米国特許第4,030,925号明細書、同4,031,127号明細書、同4,245,037号明細書、同4,255,511号明細書、同4,266,013号明細書、同4,276,364号明細書、英国特許第2,012,443号明細書等に記載のチオ尿素結合型アシルヒドラジン系化合物、米国特許第4,080,270号明細書、同4,278,748号明細書、英国特許第2,011,391B号明細書等に記載のヘテロ環基(チオアミド環、トリアゾール環、テトラゾール環等)を吸着基として結合したアシルヒドラジン系化合物等が使用できる。
再反転ネガ像の感度を低下させ反転ポジ感度を高くするために、特開2002-40607号公報及び特開2003-107616号公報に記載の金属錯体を用いることも好ましい。
ネガ型のハロゲン化銀乳剤の好ましい製造方法については、特開2006-113291号公報に記載の方法を好ましく使用できる。
When an internal latent image type direct positive silver halide emulsion is used, it is necessary to provide surface fog nuclei after imagewise exposure using light or a nucleating agent. Examples of nucleating agents include hydrazines described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 2,563,785 and 2,588,982, hydrazines and hydrazones described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,227,552, heterocyclic quaternary salt compounds described in British Patent No. 1,283,835, JP-A-52-69613, U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,615,615, 3,719,494, 3,734,738, 4,094,683 and 4,115,122, and heterocyclic quaternary salt compounds having a nucleating substituent in the dye molecule described in U.S. Pat. No. 3,718,470. Sensitizing dyes, thiourea-bonded acylhydrazine compounds described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,030,925, 4,031,127, 4,245,037, 4,255,511, 4,266,013, 4,276,364, and British Patent No. 2,012,443, and acylhydrazine compounds having a heterocyclic group (such as a thioamide ring, a triazole ring, or a tetrazole ring) bonded as an adsorptive group described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,080,270, 4,278,748, and British Patent No. 2,011,391B can be used.
In order to decrease the sensitivity of the re-reversal negative image and increase the reversal positive sensitivity, it is also preferable to use the metal complexes described in JP-A Nos. 2002-40607 and 2003-107616.
As a preferred method for producing a negative silver halide emulsion, the method described in JP-A No. 2006-113291 can be preferably used.
ハロゲン化銀乳剤と組合わせて、分光増感色素を用いることができる。その具体例については特開昭59-180550号公報、特開昭60-140335号公報、RD17029、及び、米国特許第1,846,300号、米国特許第2,078,233号、米国特許第2,089,129号、米国特許第2,165,338号、米国特許第2,231,658号、米国特許第2,917,516号、米国特許第3,352,857号、米国特許第3,411,916号、米国特許第2,295,276号、米国特許第2,481,698号、米国特許第2,688,545号、米国特許第2,921,067号、米国特許第3,282,933号、米国特許第3,397,060号、米国特許第3,660,103号、米国特許第3,335,010号、米国特許第3,352,680号、米国特許第3,384,486号、米国特許第3,623,881号、米国特許第3,718,470号、米国特許第4,025,349号の各明細書等に記載されている。 Spectral sensitizing dyes can be used in combination with silver halide emulsions. Specific examples are described in JP-A-59-180550, JP-A-60-140335, RD17029, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 1,846,300, 2,078,233, 2,089,129, 2,165,338, 2,231,658, 2,917,516, 3,352,857, 3,411,916, 2,295,276, and U.S. Pat. These are described in the specifications of U.S. Patent Nos. 2,481,698, 2,688,545, 2,921,067, 3,282,933, 3,397,060, 3,660,103, 3,335,010, 3,352,680, 3,384,486, 3,623,881, 3,718,470, and 4,025,349.
(h)感光シートにおける構成
感光シートは、感色性の異なる少なくとも3層のハロゲン化銀乳剤層及び上記ハロゲン化銀乳剤層の間に位置し非拡散性還元剤を有する少なくとも2層の混色防止層を有するものであることが好ましい。
少なくとも3層のハロゲン化銀乳剤層に異なる感色性を付与するためには、異なる吸収波長分布を有する上記の分光増感色素を用いることが有効であり好ましい。
ハロゲン化銀乳剤に異なる感色性を付与する際、互いの分光感度分布がなるべく重ならないことが好ましいが、完全に分離させる必要はない。少なくとも3層存在するハロゲン化銀乳剤層の中で、1層の乳剤層の特定の波長における感度が他の少なくとも2層のハロゲン化銀乳剤層の2倍以上となるような関係が、各々成り立つ場合、感色性が異なると見なすことができる。少なくとも3層存在するハロゲン化銀乳剤層間の感度の関係において、1層の乳剤層の特定の波長における感度が他の少なくとも2層のハロゲン化銀乳剤層の好ましくは5倍以上、より好ましくは10倍以上となる関係となることが望ましい。これらの関係を成立させるための特定の波長に制限は無く、可視域、紫外域、赤外域いずれでもよいが、少なくとも3層のハロゲン化銀乳剤層のハロゲン化銀乳剤は青、緑、赤、赤外のいずれかに感光性を有するハロゲン化銀乳剤から選ばれることが好ましい。
(h) Structure of Photosensitive Sheet The photosensitive sheet preferably has at least three silver halide emulsion layers having different color sensitivities and at least two color-mixing prevention layers each containing a non-diffusible reducing agent and positioned between the silver halide emulsion layers.
In order to impart different color sensitivities to at least three silver halide emulsion layers, it is effective and preferable to use the above-mentioned spectral sensitizing dyes having different absorption wavelength distributions.
When imparting different color sensitivities to silver halide emulsions, it is preferable that the spectral sensitivity distributions of the emulsions do not overlap as much as possible, but they do not need to be completely separated. When at least three silver halide emulsion layers are present, the color sensitivities can be considered to be different when the sensitivity of one emulsion layer at a specific wavelength is at least twice that of at least two other silver halide emulsion layers. It is desirable that the sensitivity of one emulsion layer at a specific wavelength be at least five times, more preferably at least ten times, that of at least two other silver halide emulsion layers. There are no particular restrictions on the specific wavelengths required to achieve this relationship, and any of the visible, ultraviolet, and infrared regions may be used. However, it is preferred that the silver halide emulsions in the at least three silver halide emulsion layers be selected from those sensitive to blue, green, red, or infrared.
乳剤と色素像形成化合物とは別の層としてもよいし、一つの層に乳剤及び色素像形成化合物を含有するようにしてもよい。色素像形成化合物が塗布された状態で、これと組合わされた乳剤の分光感度域に吸収を持つ場合には別層の方が好ましい。 The emulsion and dye image-forming compound may be in separate layers, or the emulsion and dye image-forming compound may be contained in a single layer. If the dye image-forming compound, when coated, has absorption in the spectral sensitivity range of the emulsion with which it is combined, a separate layer is preferred.
乳剤層は異なる感度を有する乳剤からなるものでもよい。また乳剤層と色素像形成化合物層との間には任意の層を有してもよい。例えば特開昭60-173541号公報に記載された造核現像促進剤を含む層や、特公昭60-15267号公報に記載された隔壁層を設けると色像濃度を高めることができるし、反射層を設けると感光シートの感度を高めることが出来る。反射層は白色顔料及び親水性バインダーを含む層であり、好ましい白色顔料は酸化チタン、好ましい親水性バインダーはゼラチンである。酸化チタンの塗布量は0.1g/m2~8g/m2であることが好ましく、0.2g/m2~4g/m2であることがより好ましい。反射層の例は特開昭60-91354号公報に記載されている。 The emulsion layer may be composed of emulsions with different sensitivities. Furthermore, any layer may be provided between the emulsion layer and the dye image-forming compound layer. For example, the density of the color image can be increased by providing a layer containing a nucleating development accelerator, as described in JP-A-60-173541, or a partition wall layer, as described in JP-B-60-15267. The sensitivity of the photosensitive sheet can be increased by providing a reflective layer. The reflective layer is a layer containing a white pigment and a hydrophilic binder, with titanium oxide being preferred as the white pigment and gelatin being preferred as the hydrophilic binder. The coating amount of titanium oxide is preferably 0.1 g/m 2 to 8 g/m 2 , and more preferably 0.2 g/m 2 to 4 g/m 2. Examples of reflective layers are described in JP-A-60-91354.
重層構成の感光層の場合、露光側から青感性乳剤の組合わせ単位、緑感性乳剤の組合わせ単位、赤感性乳剤の組合わせ単位が順次配置されることが好ましい。各乳剤層単位の間には必要に応じて任意の層を設けることができる。 In the case of a multilayer photosensitive layer, it is preferable to arrange a blue-sensitive emulsion combination unit, a green-sensitive emulsion combination unit, and a red-sensitive emulsion combination unit in that order from the exposed side. Optional layers can be provided between each emulsion layer unit as needed.
(i)混色防止層
ある乳剤層の現像の効果が他の乳剤層単位に及ぼす好ましくない影響を防ぐために、乳剤層と乳剤層の間に位置する非拡散性還元剤を有する混色防止層を有することが好ましい。混色防止層はそれぞれの乳剤層の間に少なくとも1層必要となるため、感光シートは少なくとも2層の混色防止層を有することが好ましい。
(i) Color-mixing prevention layer In order to prevent the undesirable influence of the development effect of one emulsion layer on other emulsion layer units, it is preferable to have a color-mixing prevention layer containing a non-diffusible reducing agent located between emulsion layers. At least one color-mixing prevention layer is required between each emulsion layer, so it is preferable that the photosensitive sheet has at least two color-mixing prevention layers.
混色防止層に使用する非拡散性還元剤としては、公知の化合物をいずれも好ましく使用できる。
例えば、特開平5-333501号公報に記載の高分子量のレドックス化合物、国際公開第98/33760号、米国特許第4,923,787号明細書等に記載のフェニドンやヒドラジン系化合物、独国特許出願公開第19618786A1号、欧州特許出願公開第839623A1号、欧州特許出願公開第842975A1号、独国特許出願公開第19806846A1号及び仏国特許出願公開第2760460A1号の各明細書等に記載のレドックス化合物を用いることも好ましい。また特開2000-122243号公報に記載のラクトン類を用いることも好ましい。
混色防止層に使用する非拡散性還元剤として特に好ましくは、非拡散のハイドロキノン誘導体、スルホンアミドフェノール誘導体、スルホンアミドナフトール誘導体、ラクトン類から選ばれる。特に非拡散性のハイドロキノン誘導体が好ましく、中でもジアルキルハイドロキノン誘導体が好ましい。ここでアルキル基としては、置換または無置換アルキル基を含み、置換基としては、化合物の「非拡散性」を阻害しないものであれば特に制限されない。具体例としては、アリール基、アシル基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基が挙げられる。また「ジアルキル基」の総炭素数としては12以上が好ましく、16以上がより好ましい。
As the non-diffusible reducing agent used in the color-mixing prevention layer, any known compound can be preferably used.
For example, it is preferable to use high molecular weight redox compounds described in JP-A-5-333501, phenidone and hydrazine compounds described in WO 98/33760 and U.S. Pat. No. 4,923,787, and redox compounds described in German Patent Application Publication No. 19618786A1, European Patent Application Publication No. 839623A1, European Patent Application Publication No. 842975A1, German Patent Application Publication No. 19806846A1, and French Patent Application Publication No. 2760460A1. It is also preferable to use lactones described in JP-A-2000-122243.
Particularly preferred non-diffusible reducing agents for use in the color-mixing prevention layer are selected from non-diffusible hydroquinone derivatives, sulfonamidophenol derivatives, sulfonamido naphthol derivatives, and lactones. Non-diffusible hydroquinone derivatives are particularly preferred, with dialkylhydroquinone derivatives being particularly preferred. The alkyl group includes substituted or unsubstituted alkyl groups, and the substituents are not particularly limited as long as they do not impair the "non-diffusibility" of the compound. Specific examples include aryl groups, acyl groups, alkoxycarbonyl groups, and aryloxycarbonyl groups. The total number of carbon atoms in the "dialkyl group" is preferably 12 or more, and more preferably 16 or more.
非拡散性還元剤の分子量は、好ましくは350以上、より好ましくは390以上、特に好ましくは500以上である。混色防止剤がポリマーである場合の分子量は、数平均分子量で表される。非拡散性還元剤の分子量の上限は、非拡散性還元剤がポリマーである場合は特に限定されないが、ポリマー以外の化合物である場合には約1,000以下が好ましい。各ハロゲン化銀乳剤層の間に配置される少なくとも二つの混色防止層に含有される非拡散性還元剤の最適量は、用いるハロゲン化銀乳剤の塗布量、形状、粒子サイズ、目標とする最高発色濃度等によって異なるが、非拡散性還元剤の量が多すぎると発色濃度の低下や画像形成時間の遅れをもたらし、少なすぎると発色色相の濁りを生じるため、非拡散性還元剤の量はこれらを考慮して設定すべきである。塗布銀量を削減した場合の発色濃度の低下が、これらの非拡散性還元剤に対するハロゲン化銀の塗布量を特定の比率に設定し、なおかつ、ハロゲン化銀乳剤としてネガ型のハロゲン化銀乳剤を特定の量を用いた場合において有効に抑制し得る。ハロゲン化銀の総塗布モル数は混色防止層に用いる非拡散性還元剤の総塗布モル数の5倍から10倍の範囲である。非拡散性還元剤の総塗布モル数は、好ましくは0.5mmol/m2~1.5mmol/m2の範囲、より好ましくは0.8mmol/m2~1.2mmol/m2の範囲である。
非拡散性還元剤の具体例を以下に例示するが、本開示はこれらに限定されるものではない。
The molecular weight of the non-diffusible reducing agent is preferably 350 or more, more preferably 390 or more, and particularly preferably 500 or more. When the color-mixing inhibitor is a polymer, the molecular weight is expressed as a number-average molecular weight. The upper limit of the molecular weight of the non-diffusible reducing agent is not particularly limited when the non-diffusible reducing agent is a polymer, but when it is a compound other than a polymer, it is preferably about 1,000 or less. The optimal amount of non-diffusible reducing agent contained in at least two color-mixing prevention layers disposed between each silver halide emulsion layer varies depending on the coating amount, shape, grain size, and target maximum color density of the silver halide emulsion used. However, too much non-diffusible reducing agent results in a decrease in color density and a delay in image formation time, while too little results in cloudy color hues. Therefore, the amount of non-diffusible reducing agent should be determined taking these factors into consideration. The decrease in color density resulting from a reduction in the coated silver amount can be effectively suppressed by setting the coating amount of silver halide to the non-diffusible reducing agent at a specific ratio and using a specific amount of negative-working silver halide emulsion as the silver halide emulsion. The total coating molar amount of silver halide is 5 to 10 times the total coating molar amount of the non-diffusible reducing agent used in the color-mixing preventing layer. The total coating molar amount of the non-diffusible reducing agent is preferably in the range of 0.5 to 1.5 mmol/ m2 , more preferably in the range of 0.8 to 1.2 mmol/ m2 .
Specific examples of non-diffusible reducing agents are given below, but the present disclosure is not limited to these.
非拡散性還元剤は、高沸点有機溶剤に溶解され、乳化分散によって得られた微小油滴として混色防止層に存在させることが好ましい。高沸点有機溶剤としては、誘電率が4.0~8.0の範囲の高沸点有機溶剤が好ましい。高沸点有機溶剤は2種以上の混合物であってもよい。好ましい高沸点有機溶剤の例としては、例えば、フタル酸エステル、リン酸エステル等のエステル類、有機酸アミド、ケトン類等である。ここで、誘電率は、変成器ブリッジ法(安藤電気(株)製TRS-10T)で、25℃、10kHzの条件で測定されたものである。高沸点有機溶剤の沸点は140℃以上で、融点が100℃以下であることが好ましく、更には、沸点が160℃以上で融点が70℃以下であることがより好ましい。高沸点有機溶剤は常温で固体のものでもよく、その場合の誘電率とは、液体(過冷却状態)で測定された値である。混色防止層中における非拡散性還元剤に対する高沸点有機溶剤の使用量(質量比)は、いずれも0.3~20であることが好ましく、0.5~10がより好ましく、1~8であることが更に好ましい。 The non-diffusible reducing agent is preferably dissolved in a high-boiling organic solvent and present in the color-mixing prevention layer as fine oil droplets obtained by emulsification and dispersion. The high-boiling organic solvent preferably has a dielectric constant in the range of 4.0 to 8.0. The high-boiling organic solvent may be a mixture of two or more types. Examples of preferred high-boiling organic solvents include esters such as phthalates and phosphates, organic acid amides, and ketones. The dielectric constant was measured using the transformer bridge method (TRS-10T, manufactured by Ando Electric Co., Ltd.) at 25°C and 10 kHz. The high-boiling organic solvent preferably has a boiling point of 140°C or higher and a melting point of 100°C or lower, and more preferably a boiling point of 160°C or higher and a melting point of 70°C or lower. The high-boiling organic solvent may be solid at room temperature; in this case, the dielectric constant is the value measured in liquid form (supercooled state). The amount (mass ratio) of the high-boiling organic solvent to the non-diffusible reducing agent used in the color-mixing prevention layer is preferably 0.3 to 20, more preferably 0.5 to 10, and even more preferably 1 to 8.
十分な色再現能を発揮し、かつ感光シートを厚くし過ぎない範囲であれば、感光層の厚さは、特に制限されるものではない。 There are no particular restrictions on the thickness of the photosensitive layer, as long as it provides sufficient color reproduction and does not make the photosensitive sheet too thick.
(j)その他
感光シートは必要に応じて、イラジエーション防止層、UV吸収剤層、保護層等を有することができる。
感光シートの厚さは、カラー拡散転写フイルムユニットを厚くし過ぎない範囲であれば、特に制限されるものではない。
(j) Others The photosensitive sheet may have an anti-irradiation layer, a UV absorber layer, a protective layer, etc., as required.
The thickness of the photosensitive sheet is not particularly limited as long as it does not make the color diffusion transfer film unit too thick.
〔3〕透明カバーシート
(a)第二の透明支持体
透明カバーシートの支持体は、写真感光材料に通常用いられる平滑な透明支持体なら、いずれでもよい。好ましい支持体として酢酸セルロース、ポリスチレン、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリカーボネート等が挙げられる。支持体は、ライトパイピングを防止するため微量の染料を含有することが好ましい。また支持体上には下塗り層を設けることが好ましい。
[3] Transparent Cover Sheet (a) Second Transparent Support The support for the transparent cover sheet may be any smooth transparent support commonly used in photographic materials. Preferred supports include cellulose acetate, polystyrene, polyethylene terephthalate, polycarbonate, etc. The support preferably contains a trace amount of dye to prevent light piping. It is also preferred to provide an undercoat layer on the support.
(b)中和機能を有する層
中和機能を有する層(中和層)は、アルカリ処理組成物含有体から持込まれるアルカリを中和するのに十分な量の酸性物質を含む層である。必要に応じて、中和速度調節層(中和タイミング層)、密着強化層等の層から成る多層構成でもよい。
(b) Layer with Neutralizing Function The layer with neutralizing function (neutralizing layer) is a layer containing an acidic substance in an amount sufficient to neutralize the alkali introduced from the alkaline processing composition-containing body. If necessary, it may have a multilayer structure comprising layers such as a neutralization rate adjusting layer (neutralization timing layer) and an adhesion enhancing layer.
好ましい酸性物質としてはpKa9以下の酸性基(若しくは加水分解によってpKa9以下の酸性基を生じる前駆体基)を含む物質であり、更に好ましい酸性物質は米国特許第2,983,606号明細書に記載されているオレイン酸のような高級脂肪酸、米国特許第3,362,819号明細書報に開示されているようなアクリル酸、メタアクリル酸若しくはマレイン酸の重合体とその部分エステル又は酸無水物;仏国特許第2,290,699号明細書に開示されているようなアクリル酸とアクリル酸エステルの共重体;米国特許第4,139,383号明細書やRDNo.16102(1977)に開示されているようなラテックス型の酸性ポリマーである。その他、米国特許4,088,493号公報、特開昭52-153739号公報、特開昭53-1023号公報、特開昭53-4540号公報、特開昭53-4541号公報、特開昭53-4542号公報等に開示の酸性物質も好ましい。 Preferred acidic substances are substances containing acidic groups with a pKa of 9 or less (or precursor groups that generate acidic groups with a pKa of 9 or less upon hydrolysis), and more preferred acidic substances are higher fatty acids such as oleic acid as described in U.S. Pat. No. 2,983,606; polymers of acrylic acid, methacrylic acid, or maleic acid and their partial esters or acid anhydrides as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,362,819; copolymers of acrylic acid and acrylic acid esters as disclosed in French Patent No. 2,290,699; and latex-type acidic polymers as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,139,383 and RD No. 16102 (1977). In addition, acidic substances disclosed in U.S. Patent No. 4,088,493, JP-A-52-153739, JP-A-53-1023, JP-A-53-4540, JP-A-53-4541, JP-A-53-4542, etc. are also preferred.
酸性ポリマー(酸性ポリマー)のその他の例としては、エチレン、酢酸ビニル、ビニルメチルエーテル等のビニルモノマーと、無水マレイン酸との共重合体及びそのn-ブチルエステル、ブチルアクリレートとアクリル酸との共重合物、セルロース及びアセテート・ハイドロジエンフタレートを挙げることができる。 Other examples of acidic polymers include copolymers of vinyl monomers such as ethylene, vinyl acetate, and vinyl methyl ether with maleic anhydride and its n-butyl ester, copolymers of butyl acrylate and acrylic acid, cellulose, and acetate hydrogen phthalate.
酸性ポリマーは、親水性ポリマーと混合して用いることができる。親水性ポリマーとしては、ポリアクリルアミド、ポリメチルピロリドン、ポリビニルアルコール(部分ケン化物も含む)、カルボキシメチルセルロース、ヒドロキシメチルセルロース、ヒドロキシエチルセルロース、ポリメチルビニルエーテル等が挙げられる。なかでも、ポリビニルアルコールが好ましい。酸性ポリマーに親水性ポリマー以外のポリマー、例えばセルロースアセテート等を混合してもよい。 Acidic polymers can be used in combination with hydrophilic polymers. Examples of hydrophilic polymers include polyacrylamide, polymethylpyrrolidone, polyvinyl alcohol (including partially saponified products), carboxymethyl cellulose, hydroxymethyl cellulose, hydroxyethyl cellulose, and polymethyl vinyl ether. Of these, polyvinyl alcohol is preferred. Acidic polymers can also be mixed with polymers other than hydrophilic polymers, such as cellulose acetate.
酸性ポリマーの塗布量は、アルカリ処理組成物含有体のアルカリの量によって決まる。単位面積当りの酸性ポリマーとアルカリの当量比は0.9~2.0が好ましい。酸性ポリマーが少なすぎると、転写色素の色相が変化したり、白地部分にステインを生じる。多過ぎる場合にも色相の変化、あるいは耐光性の低下等の不都合を生じる。更に好ましい当量比は1.0~1.3である。混合する親水性ポリマーの量も、多すぎても少なすぎても写真の品質を低下させる。親水性ポリマーの酸性ポリマーに対する質量比は好ましkは0.01~10、より好ましくは0.1~3.0である。 The amount of acidic polymer applied is determined by the amount of alkali in the alkaline processing composition. The equivalent ratio of acidic polymer to alkali per unit area is preferably 0.9 to 2.0. If the amount of acidic polymer is too small, the hue of the transferred dye will change and staining will occur on the white background. If the amount is too large, problems such as changes in hue or reduced lightfastness will occur. A more preferable equivalent ratio is 1.0 to 1.3. If the amount of hydrophilic polymer mixed is too large or too small, photographic quality will be reduced. The mass ratio k of hydrophilic polymer to acidic polymer is preferably 0.01 to 10, more preferably 0.1 to 3.0.
中和層には、種々の目的で添加剤を組込むことができる。例えば中和層の硬膜のために一般的な膜剤を添加しても良いし、膜の脆性を改良するためにポリエチレングリコール、ポリプロピレングリコール、グリセリン等の多価ヒドロキシル化合物を添加してもよい。その他必要に応じて、酸化防止剤、蛍光増白剤、現像抑制剤及びその前駆体等を添加することもできる。 Additives can be incorporated into the neutralization layer for various purposes. For example, common film-hardening agents can be added to the neutralization layer, or polyhydroxyl compounds such as polyethylene glycol, polypropylene glycol, and glycerin can be added to improve the brittleness of the film. Other additives that can be added as needed include antioxidants, fluorescent brighteners, development inhibitors, and their precursors.
中和層と組合わせて用いる中和タイミング層には、例えばゼラチン、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリビニルアルコールの部分アセタール化物、酢酸セルロース、部分的に加水分解されたポリ酢酸ビニル等のようなアルカリ透過性を低くするポリマー;アクリル酸モノマー等の親水性コモノマーが少量共重合したアルカリ透過の活性化エネルギーを高くするラテックスポリマー;ラクトン環を有するポリマー等が有用である。 Neutralization timing layers used in combination with the neutralization layer include, for example, polymers that reduce alkali permeability such as gelatin, polyvinyl alcohol, partially acetalized polyvinyl alcohol, cellulose acetate, and partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl acetate; latex polymers that increase the activation energy of alkali permeation by copolymerizing small amounts of hydrophilic comonomers such as acrylic acid monomers; and polymers with lactone rings.
中でも、特開昭54-136328号公報、米国特許第4,267,262号明細書、米国特許第4,009,030号明細書、米国特許第4,029,849号明細書等に開示されている酢酸セルロースを使用したタイミング層;特開昭54-128335号公報、特開昭56-69629号公報、特開昭57-6843号公報、米国特許第4,056,394号明細書、米国特許第4,061,496号明細書、米国特許第4,199,362号明細書、米国特許第4,250,243号明細書、米国特許第4,256,827号明細書、米国特許第4,268,604号明細書等に開示されているアクリル酸等の親水性コモノマーを少量共重合したラテックスポリマー;特開平11-2890号に開示されている、多価アルコールのモノアクリル酸エステル若しくはモノメタクリル酸エステルを有するポリマー;米国特許第4,229,516号明細書に開示されたラクトン環を有するポリマー;その他特開昭56-25735号公報、特開昭56-97346号公報、特開昭57-6842号公報、ヨーロッパ特許(EP)出願公開第31,957A1号明細書、ヨーロッパ特許出願公開第37,724A1号明細書、ヨーロッパ特許出願公開第48,412A1号明細書等に開示されたポリマーが特に有用である。 Among these, timing layers using cellulose acetate are disclosed in JP-A-54-136328, U.S. Pat. No. 4,267,262, U.S. Pat. No. 4,009,030, U.S. Pat. No. 4,029,849, etc.; acrylic resins are disclosed in JP-A-54-128335, JP-A-56-69629, JP-A-57-6843, U.S. Pat. No. 4,056,394, U.S. Pat. No. 4,061,496, U.S. Pat. No. 4,199,362, U.S. Pat. No. 4,250,243, U.S. Pat. No. 4,256,827, U.S. Pat. No. 4,268,604, etc. Particularly useful polymers include latex polymers copolymerized with small amounts of hydrophilic comonomers such as acids; polymers containing monoacrylates or monomethacrylates of polyhydric alcohols as disclosed in JP-A-11-2890; polymers containing lactone rings as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,229,516; and polymers disclosed in JP-A-56-25735, JP-A-56-97346, JP-A-57-6842, EP-A-31,957-A1, EP-A-37,724-A1, and EP-A-48,412-A1.
その他、以下の文献に記載のものも使用できる。
米国特許第3,421,893号明細書、米国特許第3,455,686号明細書、米国特許第3,575,701号明細書、米国特許第3,778,265号明細書、米国特許第3,785,815号明細書、米国特許第3,847,615号明細書、米国特許第4,088,493号明細書、米国特許第4,123,275号明細書、米国特許第4,148,653号明細書、米国特許第4,201,587号明細書、米国特許第4,288,523号明細書、米国特許第4,297,431号明細書、西独国特許出願公開(OLS)第1,622,936号明細書、西独国特許出願公開第2,162,277号明細書、RD15162,No.151(1976年)など。
In addition, the following documents can also be used:
U.S. Pat. Nos. 3,421,893, 3,455,686, 3,575,701, 3,778,265, 3,785,815, 3,847,615, 4,088,493, 4,123,275, 4,148,653, 4,201,587, 4,288,523, 4,297,431, West German Patent Application Publication (OLS) No. 1,622,936, West German Patent Application Publication No. 2,162,277, RD 15162, No. 151 (1976), and the like.
中和タイミング層は米国特許第4,009,029号明細書、西独特許出願(OLS)第2,913,164号明細書、西独国特許出願公開第3,014,672号明細書、特開昭54-155837号公報、特開昭55-138745号公報等に開示された現像抑制剤及び/又はそのプレカーサーや、米国特許第4,201,578号明細書に開示されているハイドロキノンプレカーサー、その他写真用添加剤若しくはそのプレカーサー等を含有してもよい。また特開昭63-168648号公報、特開昭63-168649号公報に記載の補助中和層を設けると、処理後経時による転写濃度の変化を少なくするのに効果的である。 The neutralization timing layer may contain development inhibitors and/or their precursors as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,009,029, West German Patent Application (OLS) No. 2,913,164, West German Patent Application Publication No. 3,014,672, JP-A Nos. 54-155837 and 55-138745, hydroquinone precursors as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,201,578, other photographic additives or their precursors, etc. Furthermore, providing an auxiliary neutralization layer as described in JP-A Nos. 63-168648 and 63-168649 is effective in minimizing changes in transfer density over time after processing.
中和タイミング層は、これらの素材を複数含有してもよい。複数の素材が一つの層に含まれてもよいし、複数の層にそれぞれ含まれてもよい。 The neutralization timing layer may contain multiple of these materials. Multiple materials may be contained in a single layer, or multiple layers may each contain multiple materials.
(c)その他の層
透明カバーシートは、中和機能を有する層の他に、補助的な機能を持つ層として、バック層、保護層、フィルター染料層等を有してもよい。
(c) Other Layers The transparent cover sheet may have, in addition to the layer having a neutralizing function, layers having auxiliary functions such as a backing layer, a protective layer, and a filter dye layer.
バック層は、カールの調整や、滑り性の付与のために設けられる。バック層はフィルター染料を含有してもよい。保護層は、主としてカバーシートバック面との接着、感光材料とカバーシートとを重ね合わせたときの感光材料保護層との接着を防止するために用いられる。
透明カバーシートが染料を含有するようにすると、感光層の感度調整できる。カバーシートの支持体中や中和機能を有する層、バック層、保護層、捕獲媒染層等にフィルター染料を添加してもよい。またフィルター染料単独の層を設置してもよい。
The backing layer is provided to adjust curl and provide slippage. The backing layer may contain a filter dye. The protective layer is mainly used to prevent adhesion to the back surface of the cover sheet and to the protective layer of the photosensitive material when the photosensitive material and the cover sheet are superimposed.
If the transparent cover sheet contains a dye, the sensitivity of the photosensitive layer can be adjusted. A filter dye may be added to the support of the cover sheet, a layer having a neutralizing function, a backing layer, a protective layer, a capture mordant layer, etc. Alternatively, a layer containing only a filter dye may be provided.
本開示に係る拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、各層において、その他の公知の添加剤を含むことができる。 The diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material according to the present disclosure may contain other known additives in each layer.
以下に実施例を挙げて本開示を更に具体的に説明する。以下の実施例に示す材料、使用量、割合、処理内容、処理手順等は、本開示の趣旨を逸脱しない限り、適宜、変更することができる。したがって、本開示の範囲は以下に示す具体例に限定されるものではない。
また、本実施例において、「%」、「部」とは、特に断りのない限り、それぞれ「質量%」、「質量部」を意味する。
The present disclosure will be described in more detail below with reference to examples. The materials, amounts used, ratios, processing details, processing procedures, etc. shown in the following examples can be appropriately changed without departing from the spirit of the present disclosure. Therefore, the scope of the present disclosure is not limited to the specific examples shown below.
In the examples, "%" and "parts" mean "% by mass" and "parts by mass", respectively, unless otherwise specified.
(実施例S1)
<中間体1の合成>
(Example S1)
<Synthesis of Intermediate 1>
撹拌機、冷却管、窒素導入管、及び、温度計を取り付けた300mL三口フラスコに、フマル酸ジアリル19.62g、2-プロパノール(iPrOH)71.3gを加え、窒素で置換した。ここにイオン交換水24.7gで希釈した亜硫酸水素ナトリウム(NaHSO3)10.4gを加え、90℃のオイルバス中で6時間反応した。
2-プロパノール及び水を減圧留去したのち、酢酸エチル150gを加えて撹拌し、析出した固体をろ過により回収した。得られた固体を酢酸エチル150g中で1時間分散洗浄し、ろ過、乾燥することで中間体1の白色固体20.5gを得た。上記白色固体は中間体1であることを1H-NMRにて確認した。
A 300 mL three-neck flask equipped with a stirrer, a condenser, a nitrogen inlet tube, and a thermometer was charged with 19.62 g of diallyl fumarate and 71.3 g of 2-propanol (iPrOH), and the atmosphere was replaced with nitrogen. 10.4 g of sodium hydrogen sulfite (NaHSO 3 ) diluted with 24.7 g of ion-exchanged water was added thereto, and the mixture was allowed to react in an oil bath at 90°C for 6 hours.
After 2-propanol and water were distilled off under reduced pressure, 150 g of ethyl acetate was added and stirred, and the precipitated solid was collected by filtration. The obtained solid was dispersed and washed in 150 g of ethyl acetate for 1 hour, filtered, and dried to obtain 20.5 g of a white solid of Intermediate 1. The white solid was confirmed to be Intermediate 1 by 1 H-NMR.
<化合物A1-1Naの合成> <Synthesis of Compound A1-1Na>
撹拌機、冷却管、窒素導入管、及び、温度計を取り付けた三ツ口フラスコに、中間体1を2.30g(7.65mmol)、1,5-シクロオクタジエン(cod)162mg(1.50mmol)及びメタノール(MeOH)18mLを秤量し、窒素置換したのちに45℃で10分撹拌した。クロロ(1,5-シクロオクタジエン)イリジウム(I)ダイマー([IrCl(cod)]2)201mg(0.30mmol)を添加し、さらに10分攪拌したのち、1,1,1,3,5,5,5-ヘプタメチルトリシロキサン3.34g(15.0mmol)を10分間かけて滴下した。滴下終了後、45℃で2時間反応を行い、1H-NMRスペクトル測定により1,1,1,3,5,5,5-ヘプタメチルトリシロキサンが完全に消失し、目的物である化合物A1-1Naが生成したことを確認した。溶媒のメタノールを減圧留去したのち、酢酸エチル/メタノールを展開溶媒とするシリカゲルカラムクロマトグラフィーにより精製し、化合物A1-1Naを4.08g(収率73%)で得た。
1H-NMR(MeOD):δ(ppm)=-0.11~0.12ppm(42H)、0.36~0.48ppm(4H)、1.50~1.66ppm(4H)、2.85~3.15ppm(4H)、3.52~4.08ppm(5H)
2.30 g (7.65 mmol) of intermediate 1, 162 mg (1.50 mmol) of 1,5-cyclooctadiene (cod), and 18 mL of methanol (MeOH) were weighed into a three-neck flask equipped with a stirrer, a condenser, a nitrogen inlet tube, and a thermometer, and after purging with nitrogen, the mixture was stirred for 10 minutes at 45° C. 201 mg (0.30 mmol) of chloro(1,5-cyclooctadiene)iridium(I) dimer ([IrCl(cod)] 2 ) was added and the mixture was stirred for an additional 10 minutes, after which 3.34 g (15.0 mmol) of 1,1,1,3,5,5,5-heptamethyltrisiloxane was added dropwise over 10 minutes. After the dropwise addition was completed, the reaction was carried out at 45°C for 2 hours, and 1H -NMR spectroscopy confirmed that 1,1,1,3,5,5,5-heptamethyltrisiloxane had completely disappeared and the target compound A1-1Na had been produced. The methanol solvent was removed by distillation under reduced pressure, and the mixture was purified by silica gel column chromatography using ethyl acetate/methanol as a developing solvent, yielding 4.08g (yield 73%) of compound A1-1Na.
1 H-NMR (MeOD): δ (ppm) = -0.11 ~ 0.12 ppm (42H), 0.36 ~ 0.48 ppm (4H), 1.50 ~ 1.66 ppm (4H), 2.85 ~ 3.15 ppm (4H), 3.52 ~ 4.08 ppm (5H)
(実施例S2)
<化合物A1-2Naの合成>
(Example S2)
<Synthesis of Compound A1-2Na>
1,1,3,5,5,5-ヘプタメチルトリシロキサン3.34gを、1,1,1,3,3,5,5-ヘプタメチルトリシロキサン3.34gに変更した以外は、化合物A1-1Naの合成と同様にして化合物A1-2Naを合成した(収率79%)。
1H-NMR(MeOD):δ(ppm)=-0.10~0.10ppm(42H)、0.42~0.56ppm(4H)、1.54~1.70ppm(4H)、2.85~3.15ppm(4H)、3.90~4.10ppm(5H)
Compound A1-2Na was synthesized (yield 79%) in the same manner as compound A1-1Na, except that 3.34 g of 1,1,3,5,5,5-heptamethyltrisiloxane was used instead.
1 H-NMR (MeOD): δ (ppm) = -0.10 ~ 0.10 ppm (42H), 0.42 ~ 0.56 ppm (4H), 1.54 ~ 1.70 ppm (4H), 2.85 ~ 3.15 ppm (4H), 3.90 ~ 4.10 ppm (5H)
(実施例S3)
<化合物A1-3Naの合成>
(Example S3)
<Synthesis of Compound A1-3Na>
1,1,3,5,5,5-ヘプタメチルトリシロキサン3.34gを、トリス(トリメチルシリルオキシ)シラン4.45gに変更し、60℃で6時間反応を行った以外は、化合物A1-1Naの合成と同様にして化合物A1-3Naを合成した(収率51%)。
1H-NMR(MeOD):δ(ppm)=0.02~0.20ppm(54H)、0.44~0.58ppm(4H)、1.60~1.80ppm(4H)、2.98~3.24ppm(4H)、3.96~4.22ppm(5H)
Compound A1-3Na was synthesized (yield 51%) in the same manner as in the synthesis of compound A1-1Na, except that 3.34 g of 1,1,3,5,5,5-heptamethyltrisiloxane was changed to 4.45 g of tris(trimethylsilyloxy)silane and the reaction was carried out at 60°C for 6 hours.
1 H-NMR (MeOD): δ (ppm) = 0.02 ~ 0.20 ppm (54H), 0.44 ~ 0.58 ppm (4H), 1.60 ~ 1.80 ppm (4H), 2.98 ~ 3.24 ppm (4H), 3.96 ~ 4.22 ppm (5H)
(実施例S4)
<中間体2及び中間体3の合成>
(Example S4)
<Synthesis of Intermediate 2 and Intermediate 3>
撹拌機、冷却管、窒素導入管、及び、温度計を取り付けた1000mL三口フラスコに、酢酸エチル(AcOEt)499.0g、イオン交換水24.30g、及び、パラジウム/炭素(Pd/C、パラジウム5%、約55%水湿潤品)を加え、窒素で置換した。上記三口フラスコを氷浴につけ、1,1,1,3,5,5,5-ヘプタメチルトリシロキサン100.0gを30分かけて滴下した。滴下終了後室温に戻して3時間反応させた。反応後、セライト濾過にてパラジウム炭素を除去したのち、ロータリーエバポレーターにて減圧濃縮し、100.5gの無色透明の液体を得た。上記液体は中間体2であることを1H-NMRにて確認した。
続いて、撹拌機、冷却管、窒素導入管、及び、温度計を取り付けた500mL三口フラスコに、得られた中間体2を99.0g、トルエン(Toluene)285gを加え、三口フラスコを氷浴に漬けた。温度が5℃以下になったことを確認し、ピリジン(Pyridine)を32.5g滴下し、温度が再度5℃以下になるまで撹拌を続けた。別途滴下ロートに、トルエン18.4gとジクロロメチルシラン19.3mLを加え混ぜ合わせた溶液を調液した。調液した溶液を30分かけて上記三口フラスコに滴下した。滴下終了後、反応液を室温に戻し、3時間反応させた。反応後、析出した固体を濾別し、得られた無色透明液体に対し分液操作を実施した。分液操作はイオン交換水350mLを用いて2回実施し、有機層を回収した。有機層に硫酸マグネシウムを加え30分以上脱水操作をしたのち、ロータリーエバポレーターにて減圧濃縮した。得られた液体に対し粉砕状シリカゲル(富士フイルム和光純薬(株)製ワコーゲルC-200)を加え、撹拌したのち、吸引濾過を行い、無色透明液体を得た。上記液体は中間体3であることを1H-NMRにて確認した。
A 1000 mL three-neck flask equipped with a stirrer, condenser, nitrogen inlet tube, and thermometer was charged with 499.0 g of ethyl acetate (AcOEt), 24.30 g of ion-exchanged water, and palladium/carbon (Pd/C, 5% palladium, approximately 55% water-wetted) and purged with nitrogen. The three-neck flask was placed in an ice bath, and 100.0 g of 1,1,1,3,5,5,5-heptamethyltrisiloxane was added dropwise over 30 minutes. After the dropwise addition, the mixture was returned to room temperature and allowed to react for 3 hours. After the reaction, the palladium/carbon was removed by filtration through Celite, and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure using a rotary evaporator to yield 100.5 g of a colorless, transparent liquid. The liquid was confirmed to be Intermediate 2 by 1 H-NMR.
Next, 99.0 g of the obtained intermediate 2 and 285 g of toluene were added to a 500 mL three-neck flask equipped with a stirrer, a condenser, a nitrogen inlet tube, and a thermometer, and the three-neck flask was immersed in an ice bath. After confirming that the temperature had dropped below 5°C, 32.5 g of pyridine was added dropwise, and stirring was continued until the temperature returned to below 5°C. A separate solution was prepared by adding 18.4 g of toluene and 19.3 mL of dichloromethylsilane to a dropping funnel. The prepared solution was added dropwise to the three-neck flask over 30 minutes. After the addition was completed, the reaction solution was returned to room temperature and allowed to react for 3 hours. After the reaction, the precipitated solid was filtered off, and the resulting colorless, transparent liquid was subjected to a separation operation. The separation operation was performed twice using 350 mL of ion-exchanged water, and the organic layer was recovered. Magnesium sulfate was added to the organic layer, and the mixture was dehydrated for 30 minutes or more, followed by vacuum concentration using a rotary evaporator. Pulverized silica gel (Wakogel C-200, Fujifilm Wako Pure Chemical Industries, Ltd.) was added to the resulting liquid, which was then stirred and filtered under suction to obtain a colorless, transparent liquid. The liquid was confirmed to be intermediate 3 by 1H -NMR.
<化合物A1-4Naの合成> <Synthesis of Compound A1-4Na>
1,1,3,5,5,5-ヘプタメチルトリシロキサン3.34gを、中間体3(7.79g)に変更した以外は、化合物A1-1Naの合成と同様にして化合物A1-4Naを合成した(収率74%)。
1H-NMR(MeOD):δ(ppm)=-0.12~0.10ppm(90H)、0.42~0.56ppm(4H)、1.54~1.70ppm(4H)、2.85~3.15ppm(4H)、3.84~4.12ppm(5H)
Compound A1-4Na was synthesized (yield 74%) in the same manner as in the synthesis of Compound A1-1Na, except that 3.34 g of 1,1,3,5,5,5-heptamethyltrisiloxane was replaced with Intermediate 3 (7.79 g).
1 H-NMR (MeOD): δ (ppm) = -0.12 ~ 0.10 ppm (90H), 0.42 ~ 0.56 ppm (4H), 1.54 ~ 1.70 ppm (4H), 2.85 ~ 3.15 ppm (4H), 3.84 ~ 4.12 ppm (5H)
(実施例1-A~1-D、及び、比較例1-A~1-C:水溶液における表面張力評価)
上記で合成した化合物又は比較用化合物0.4質量部、イオン交換水1,000質量部及びメタノール10質量部を混合し、表面張力測定用サンプルを調製した。調製したサンプルを40℃に保ち、協和界面科学株式会社製自動表面張力計DY-300を用いて、プローブとして白金プレートを使用したWilhelmy法によって表面張力を測定した。
測定結果を表2に示す。
(Examples 1-A to 1-D and Comparative Examples 1-A to 1-C: Evaluation of surface tension in aqueous solution)
A sample for surface tension measurement was prepared by mixing 0.4 parts by mass of the compound synthesized above or the comparative compound, 1,000 parts by mass of ion-exchanged water, and 10 parts by mass of methanol. The prepared sample was kept at 40°C, and the surface tension was measured by the Wilhelmy method using an automatic surface tensiometer DY-300 manufactured by Kyowa Interface Science Co., Ltd., with a platinum plate as a probe.
The measurement results are shown in Table 2.
表2に記載の比較化合物C-1及びC-2を以下に示す。 Comparative compounds C-1 and C-2 listed in Table 2 are shown below.
(実施例2-A~2-H、及び、比較例2-A~2-C:画像受像用フィルム用組成物の調製、フィルムの作製及び評価)
基材-第6層用塗布液として、完成塗布液1,000gに対して表3に示す各成分を含有する組成物(P-A)を調製した。なお、組成物(P-A)における残余の成分は、水である。
(Examples 2-A to 2-H and Comparative Examples 2-A to 2-C: Preparation of Compositions for Image-Receiving Films, and Fabrication and Evaluation of Films)
As a coating liquid for the substrate-sixth layer, composition (PA) was prepared containing each component shown in Table 3 per 1,000 g of the finished coating liquid. The remaining component in composition (PA) was water.
なお、表3に記載の上記組成物(P-A)は、表3においてゼラチン塗布量が0.29g/m2になるよう塗布した。 The composition (PA) shown in Table 3 was coated so that the gelatin coating amount in Table 3 was 0.29 g/m 2 .
別途、ポリエチレンテレフタレート支持体に、バック層を積層し、次いで基材-第1層及び基材-第2層を積層した基材を準備した。この基材の上に、基材-第3層から基材-第6層までの4層を同時にギーサーからスライド面上に押し出して、塗布スピード60m/minで塗布した。塗布後の画像受像用フィルムは25℃55%の相対湿度で7日間保管し硬膜させた。このようにして得られた試料を画像受像用フィルム基材101とした。
各層の組成は、下記表4に示す。
なお、上記組成物(A)は、塗布時のハジキに対する安定性を強制的に評価するため、組成物に意図的に直径6μmの粗大粒子を添加している。塗布環境中の異物の混入やバック層からの異物の剥落などは、塗布時にハジキを生ずる原因となり得る。粗大粒子の添加はそのシミュレーションのためである。
Separately, a substrate was prepared by laminating a backing layer on a polyethylene terephthalate support, followed by laminating a substrate-1 layer and a substrate-2 layer. Four layers, from substrate-3 layer to substrate-6 layer, were simultaneously extruded onto the slide surface from a Giesser and coated onto this substrate at a coating speed of 60 m/min. After coating, the image-receiving film was stored at 25°C and 55% relative humidity for 7 days to harden. The sample thus obtained was designated image-receiving film substrate 101.
The composition of each layer is shown in Table 4 below.
In addition, to forcibly evaluate the stability against cissing during application, the composition (A) intentionally contains coarse particles with a diameter of 6 μm. The inclusion of foreign matter in the application environment or the peeling of foreign matter from the backing layer can cause cissing during application. The addition of the coarse particles is for the purpose of simulating this.
基材-第6層用の塗布液である組成物(P-A)に対して、化合物の種類のみを変更した組成物(P-B)~(P-K)を調製した。詳細を後述する表5に示す。また、画像受像用フィルム基材101に対して、基材-第6層用塗布液の種類のみを変更した以外は同様にして、画像受像用フィルム基材102~111をそれぞれ作製した。
得られた試料は、以下の評価を行った。
Compositions (P-B) to (P-K) were prepared by changing only the type of compound in composition (P-A), which is the coating liquid for the substrate-6th layer. Details are shown in Table 5 below. Image receiving film substrates 102 to 111 were also prepared in the same manner as image receiving film substrate 101, except that only the type of the coating liquid for the substrate-6th layer was changed.
The obtained samples were evaluated as follows.
評価1)塗布面状
-ハジキ耐性の評価-
塗布済みの試料を10m2目視で観察してハジキの発生の頻度を評価した。
各試料のハジキの発生頻度は、画像受像用フィルム基材(ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料)101のハジキの個数に対しての100分率で評価した。
Evaluation 1) Coating surface condition - Evaluation of cissing resistance -
The coated sample was visually observed over an area of 10 m 2 to evaluate the frequency of cissing.
The frequency of cissing for each sample was evaluated as a percentage of the number of cissings on the image receiving film substrate (silver halide photographic light-sensitive material) 101.
評価結果を表5に合わせて示す。 The evaluation results are shown in Table 5.
以下に、上述した以外の表3~表5で使用した略称で記載した各成分の詳細を示す。
界面活性剤(1):下記化合物
Details of each component other than those mentioned above, listed by the abbreviations used in Tables 3 to 5, are shown below.
Surfactant (1): the following compound
界面活性剤(3):下記化合物 Surfactant (3): The following compound
界面活性剤(6):下記化合物 Surfactant (6): The following compound
界面活性剤(7):下記化合物 Surfactant (7): The following compound
添加剤(1):下記化合物 Additive (1): The following compound
添加剤(5):下記化合物 Additive (5): The following compound
添加剤(8):カルボキシメチルセルロース(第一工業製薬(株)製CMCセロゲン6A)
添加剤(10):下記化合物
Additive (8): Carboxymethyl cellulose (CMC Cellogen 6A, manufactured by Daiichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd.)
Additive (10): the following compound
添加剤(12):下記化合物 Additive (12): The following compound
添加剤(18):下記化合物 Additive (18): The following compound
マット剤(1):ポリメチルメタクリレート球形ラテックス(平均粒径3μm)
マット剤(2):ポリメチルメタクリレート球形ラテックス(平均粒径6μm)
硬膜剤(1):下記化合物
硬膜剤(2):下記化合物
硬膜剤(4):下記化合物
Matting agent (1): Polymethyl methacrylate spherical latex (average particle size 3 μm)
Matting agent (2): Polymethyl methacrylate spherical latex (average particle size 6 μm)
Hardener (1): the following compound Hardener (2): the following compound Hardener (4): the following compound
ポリマー媒染剤(1):下記化合物 Polymer mordant (1): The following compound
紫外線吸収剤(2):下記化合物
紫外線吸収剤(3):下記化合物
UV absorber (2): the following compound UV absorber (3): the following compound
本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含む組成物を用いて、機能性材料(機能性フィルム)を作製すると、塗布面状に優れる機能性フィルムが得られた。 When a functional material (functional film) was produced using a composition containing the ionic compound disclosed herein, a functional film with excellent coating surface condition was obtained.
上記フィルム基材試料の作製において、基材-第6層の組成物処方から、マット剤及びマット剤により持ち込まれるレベリング剤を除去した組成物を調製し、同様の評価を行った。その結果、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を用いた試料ではハジキの発生が抑制された基材が形成できることが確認された。 In preparing the above film substrate sample, a composition was prepared from the composition formulation of the substrate-sixth layer, with the matting agent and the leveling agent introduced by the matting agent removed, and a similar evaluation was performed. As a result, it was confirmed that a substrate in which the occurrence of cissing was suppressed could be formed using the sample using the ionic compound according to the present disclosure.
(実施例3-A~3-D、及び、比較例3-A~3-C:組成物の調製、ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料の作製及び評価)
<感光材料用基材の作製>
上記実施例2-A~2-H、及び、比較例2-A~2-Cの表3に記載したように、ポリエチレンテレフタレート支持体に、バック層を積層し、次いで基材-第1層から第6層までを積層し、積層体基材(Subs-1)を得た。
この時に基材-第6層の組成は、比較例2-Aの組成物(A)において、マット剤(2)及びマット剤由来界面活性剤(界面活性剤(3)を含まない組成物を用いた。この積層体基材(Subs-1)は、塗布後25℃55%RHの相対湿度の環境条件で7日間保管した。
(Examples 3-A to 3-D and Comparative Examples 3-A to 3-C: Preparation of Compositions, Preparation and Evaluation of Silver Halide Photosensitive Materials)
<Preparation of substrate for photosensitive material>
As described in Table 3 of Examples 2-A to 2-H and Comparative Examples 2-A to 2-C, a back layer was laminated on a polyethylene terephthalate support, and then the substrate-1st layer to the substrate-6th layer were laminated thereon to obtain a laminate substrate (Subs-1).
In this case, the composition of the substrate-sixth layer was the same as that of the composition (A) of Comparative Example 2-A, but not containing the matting agent (2) and the surfactant derived from the matting agent (surfactant (3)). After coating, this laminate substrate (Subs-1) was stored for 7 days under environmental conditions of 25°C and a relative humidity of 55% RH.
<感光材料の作製>
ハロゲン化銀感光材料-第18層用塗布液として、完成塗布液1,000gに対して表6に示す各成分を含有する組成物(Q-A)を調製した。
<Preparation of photosensitive material>
A composition (QA) containing the components shown in Table 6 per 1,000 g of the finished coating solution was prepared as a coating solution for the 18th layer of the silver halide photosensitive material.
なお、上記表6に記載の組成物(Q-A)は、表6においてゼラチン塗布量が0.20g/m2になるよう塗布した。 The composition (QA) shown in Table 6 above was coated so that the gelatin coating amount in Table 6 was 0.20 g/m 2 .
上記の様に作製した基材(Subs-1)の上に、第1層から第18層までの18層を同時にギーサーからスライド面上に押し出して、塗布スピ-ド60m/minで塗布した。塗布後感光材料は25℃55%RHの環境条件下の相対湿度で7日間保管し硬膜反応を進めた。このようにして得られた試料を比較例のハロゲン化銀写真感光材料201とした。
各層の組成は表7~表9に示す。
なお、上記組成物(Q-A)は、塗布時のハジキに対する安定性を強制的に評価するため、組成物に意図的に直径6μmの粗大粒子を添加している。非常に少ない頻度で混入する粗大粒子を意図的に添加することで、狭い塗布面積でハジキの評価をすることができる。
On the substrate (Subs-1) prepared as described above, 18 layers (layers 1 to 18) were simultaneously extruded from a Giesser onto a slide surface and coated at a coating speed of 60 m/min. After coating, the photosensitive material was stored for 7 days under environmental conditions of 25°C and 55% RH relative humidity to allow the hardening reaction to proceed. The sample obtained in this manner was designated as Comparative Silver Halide Photosensitive Material 201.
The composition of each layer is shown in Tables 7 to 9.
In order to forcibly evaluate the stability against cissing during application, the composition (Q-A) intentionally contains coarse particles with a diameter of 6 μm. By intentionally adding coarse particles that are mixed in very rarely, it is possible to evaluate cissing over a small application area.
また、組成物(Q-A)に対して、化合物を後述する表12に示すように変更した組成物(Q-B)~(Q-G)を調製した。ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料201に対して、第18層用塗布液の種類のみを変更した以外は同様にして、ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料202~207をそれぞれ作製した。 Furthermore, compositions (Q-B) to (Q-G) were prepared by changing the compounds in composition (Q-A) as shown in Table 12 below. Silver halide photographic materials 202 to 207 were each prepared in the same manner as silver halide photographic material 201, except that only the type of coating solution for the 18th layer was changed.
得られた感光材料試料は、以下の評価を行った。 The obtained photosensitive material samples were evaluated as follows:
評価)塗布面状
塗布面状の評価に際しては、ハジキの評価、及び、均一性の評価の2つの評価を行った。
Evaluation) Coated Surface Condition The coated surface condition was evaluated based on two criteria: cissing and uniformity.
-ハジキの評価-
塗布済みの試料を10m2目視で観察してハジキの発生の頻度を評価した。
各試料のハジキの発生頻度は、ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料201のハジキの個数に対しての100分率で評価した。
- Evaluation of repelling -
The coated sample was visually observed over an area of 10 m 2 to evaluate the frequency of cissing.
The frequency of cissing in each sample was evaluated as a percentage of the number of cissing in the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material 201.
-均一性の評価-
ギーサーからスライド面上に塗布液を押し出し支持体に塗布する際にスライド面に対して2m/秒程度の風を当てて塗布面状が乱れやすいように強制して塗布を行った。
塗布済みの感光材料に処理後の濃度が0.7程度のグレイとなるように均一な露光を与えて現像処理を行った。幅10cmで長さ1mに渡り画像を目視で観察し、塗布の均一性を評価した。主として筋状のムラに注目して評価した。評価基準を以下に示す。
A:風によるムラが認識できないレベル
B:風によるムラがほぼ認識できないレベル
C:風によるムラがわずかに認識できるが実用上問題ないレベル
D:風による筋状のムラが認識でき、撮影画像が均一なグレイであれば問題であるレベル
E:風による筋状のムラが認識でき、撮影画像が柄を含む均一でないものであっても問題が大きいレベル
-Evaluation of uniformity-
When the coating solution was extruded from the Giesser onto the slide surface and applied to the support, the coating was forced by blowing air at about 2 m/sec against the slide surface to easily disturb the coated surface.
The coated photosensitive material was subjected to a uniform exposure and development process so that the density after processing would be gray, approximately 0.7. The image was visually observed over an area 10 cm wide and 1 m long to evaluate the uniformity of the coating. The evaluation was mainly focused on streaky unevenness. The evaluation criteria are as follows:
A: Unevenness caused by wind is not noticeable B: Unevenness caused by wind is almost not noticeable C: Unevenness caused by wind is slightly noticeable, but not a problem in practical use D: Streaky unevenness caused by wind is noticeable, and is a problem if the captured image is a uniform gray E: Streaky unevenness caused by wind is noticeable, and is a serious problem even if the captured image is not uniform and includes a pattern
なお、上記で作製したハロゲン化銀写真感光材料は、拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料であり、その処理方法は、露光済みのハロゲン化銀写真感光材料(感光シート)と透明カバーシートの間に処理液を薄層展開して現像処理を行う。透明カバーシートはセルロースアセテートと酸ポリマーを有し、処理液のアルカリによりセルロースアセテートの加水分解が進行するとともにアルカリの浸透性が上がり、10分程度の時間は処理液が高pHのままで感光材料中の銀の現像が進行し、その後酸ポリマーにより中和が進むことで15分~20分程度のうちに急激にpHが低下し現像が停止する仕組みである。処理液は圧力で破壊可能な容器に充填し、ローラーで容器を破壊して処理液の展開厚みが55μmになるようにした。
透明カバーシートの組成を表10に示し、また、処理液の組成を表11に示す。
また、評価結果を表12に示す。
The silver halide photographic material prepared above is a diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic material, and its processing method involves spreading a thin layer of processing solution between an exposed silver halide photographic material (photosensitive sheet) and a transparent cover sheet for development. The transparent cover sheet contains cellulose acetate and an acid polymer. The alkali in the processing solution causes hydrolysis of the cellulose acetate and increases the alkali's permeability. For approximately 10 minutes, the processing solution maintains a high pH, allowing development of the silver in the photosensitive material. Thereafter, neutralization by the acid polymer progresses, causing a rapid drop in pH within approximately 15 to 20 minutes, halting development. The processing solution was filled into a pressure-destructible container, and the container was destroyed with a roller to spread the processing solution to a thickness of 55 μm.
The composition of the transparent cover sheet is shown in Table 10, and the composition of the processing solution is shown in Table 11.
The evaluation results are shown in Table 12.
以下に、上述した以外の表6~表12で使用した略称で記載した各成分の詳細を示す。
紫外線吸収剤(1):下記化合物
Details of each component other than those mentioned above, listed by the abbreviations used in Tables 6 to 12, are shown below.
Ultraviolet absorber (1): the following compound
硬膜剤(3):下記化合物 Hardening agent (3): The following compound
硬膜剤(5):下記化合物 Hardening agent (5): The following compound
添加剤(2):下記化合物 Additive (2): The following compound
添加剤(3):下記化合物
添加剤(4):下記化合物
添加剤(6)~(8):下記化合物
添加剤(9):ポリビニルアルコール(クラレ(株)製PVA-220E、重合度約2,000、ケン化度88%)
添加剤(11):下記化合物
添加剤(13):下記化合物
Additive (3): the following compound Additive (4): the following compound Additives (6) to (8): the following compounds Additive (9): polyvinyl alcohol (PVA-220E manufactured by Kuraray Co., Ltd., degree of polymerization approximately 2,000, degree of saponification 88%)
Additive (11): the following compound Additive (13): the following compound
添加剤(14):下記化合物 Additive (14): The following compound
添加剤(20):下記化合物
添加剤(21):下記化合物
Additive (20): the following compound Additive (21): the following compound
添加剤(22):下記化合物 Additive (22): The following compound
添加剤(23):下記化合物 Additive (23): The following compound
造核剤(1):下記化合物 Nucleating agent (1): The following compound
界面活性剤(4):下記化合物 Surfactant (4): The following compound
界面活性剤(5):下記化合物 Surfactant (5): The following compound
化合物(P-8):下記化合物、Mw33,700 Compound (P-8): The following compound, Mw 33,700
高沸点有機溶剤(1):下記化合物
高沸点有機溶剤(2):下記化合物
High boiling point organic solvent (1): the following compound High boiling point organic solvent (2): the following compound
イエロー色素放出化合物(1):下記化合物
マゼンタ色素放出化合物(1):下記化合物
シアン色素放出化合物(1):下記化合物
Yellow dye-releasing compound (1): the following compound Magenta dye-releasing compound (1): the following compound Cyan dye-releasing compound (1): the following compound
シアン色素放出化合物(2):下記化合物 Cyan dye-releasing compound (2): The following compound
温度補償ポリマー(1):下記化合物
温度補償ポリマー(2):下記化合物
Temperature compensation polymer (1): the following compound Temperature compensation polymer (2): the following compound
酸ポリマー(1):下記化合物 Acid polymer (1): The following compound
内潜型直接ポジ乳剤A~I:特開2002-40607号公報の試料101の乳剤に準じて作製した。第4層用乳剤Gは、段落0052~0053、0057~0061に記載の乳剤RM12に準じて作製した。 Latent direct positive emulsions A-I: Prepared in accordance with the emulsion of Sample 101 in JP-A No. 2002-40607. Emulsion G for the fourth layer was prepared in accordance with emulsion RM12 described in paragraphs 0052-0053 and 0057-0061.
増感色素(1)~(9):下記化合物 Sensitizing dyes (1) to (9): The following compounds
表12に示すように、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含む組成物を最表層用塗布液に用いると、塗布面状に優れたハロゲン化銀写真感光材料が得られる。 As shown in Table 12, when a composition containing an ionic compound according to the present disclosure is used in a coating solution for the outermost layer, a silver halide photographic material with excellent coated surface condition is obtained.
(実施例4)
実施例3-Aのハロゲン化銀写真感光材料において用いた基材-第6層の組成物処方を変更した組成物(R)を調製した。機能層付き基材(Subs-1)用の第6層の組成物をそれぞれ組成物(R)に変更した以外は同様にして、本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含有する基材(Subs-2)を作製した。
この基材上に、実施例3-A~実施例3-Dのハロゲン化銀写真感光材料204~207で用いた重層の感光材料用組成物を塗布して、実施例3-Aと同様の評価を行った。その結果、基材及びその上層に積層する感光材料の両方に本開示に係るイオン性化合物を含有する試料は、塗布面状に優れることが分かった。
Example 4
Composition (R) was prepared by changing the composition formulation of the substrate-sixth layer used in the silver halide photographic light-sensitive material of Example 3-A. A substrate (Subs-2) containing an ionic compound according to the present disclosure was prepared in the same manner as in the substrate (Subs-1) with a functional layer, except that the composition of the sixth layer was changed to composition (R).
The multilayer photosensitive material compositions used in the silver halide photographic photosensitive materials 204 to 207 of Examples 3-A to 3-D were coated onto this substrate, and the same evaluations as in Example 3-A were carried out. As a result, it was found that samples containing an ionic compound according to the present disclosure in both the substrate and the photosensitive material laminated thereon exhibited excellent coated surface condition.
なお、組成物(R)は、水性組成物であり、表15に記載の組成物(R)における残余の成分は、水である。 Composition (R) is an aqueous composition, and the remaining component in composition (R) listed in Table 15 is water.
(実施例5:熱現像感光材料)
特開2006-91780号公報に記載の実施例における試料7において、フッ素化合物(F-29)の代わりに10.0mg/m2の化合物A1-1Naに置き換えた試料を作製した。
得られた試料について、500ルックスの明るさの下で反射光を目視にて観察し、以下の評価基準で表面の面状を観察したところ、評価結果はAであり、塗布面状に優れることが分かった。
A:ムラが認識できないレベル。
B:ムラがほぼ認識できないレベル。
C:表面の光沢の低下がわずかに認められるレベル。
D:表面の光沢の低下が明らかに認められるレベル。
(Example 5: Photothermographic material)
A sample was prepared in which the fluorine compound (F-29) in Sample 7 in the examples described in JP-A-2006-91780 was replaced with 10.0 mg/ m2 of the compound A1-1Na.
The resulting sample was visually observed for reflected light under a brightness of 500 lux, and the surface condition was observed according to the following evaluation criteria. The evaluation result was A, indicating that the coated surface condition was excellent.
A: No unevenness is noticeable.
B: The unevenness is barely noticeable.
C: A slight decrease in surface gloss is observed.
D: A level at which a decrease in surface gloss is clearly observed.
(実施例6:熱現像感光材料)
特許第6851389号公報に記載の実施例1において、非感光性バック保護層のフッ素系界面活性剤F-1及びF-2(合計を1質量部とする)を、合わせて化合物A1-1Na(10質量部)に置き換えた。また、表面保護層第2層のフッ素系界面活性剤F-1及びF-2(合計を1質量部とする)を、合わせて化合物A1-1Na(10質量部)に置き換えた。作製した試料について実施例5と同様の基準で面状を評価したところ、評価結果はAであり、塗布面状に優れることが分かった。
(Example 6: Photothermographic material)
In Example 1 described in Japanese Patent No. 6,851,389, the fluorosurfactants F-1 and F-2 (total of 1 part by mass) in the non-photosensitive back protective layer were replaced with a compound A1-1Na (10 parts by mass). Furthermore, the fluorosurfactants F-1 and F-2 (total of 1 part by mass) in the second surface protective layer were replaced with a compound A1-1Na (10 parts by mass). The surface condition of the prepared sample was evaluated using the same criteria as in Example 5, and the evaluation result was A, indicating that the coated surface condition was excellent.
(実施例7:工業用Xレイ感光材料)
特開2009-86332号公報に記載の実施例試料No.14において、表面保護層の塗布助剤-4及び塗布助剤-5(合計を1質量部とする)を、合わせて化合物A1-1Na(10質量部)に置き換えた試料を作製した。得られた試料の面状を実施例5と同様の基準で評価したところ、評価結果はAであり、塗布面状に優れることが分かった。
(Example 7: Industrial X-ray photosensitive material)
A sample was prepared in which the coating aid-4 and coating aid-5 (total of 1 part by mass) in the surface protective layer of Example Sample No. 14 described in JP 2009-86332 A were replaced with a compound A1-1Na (10 parts by mass). The surface condition of the obtained sample was evaluated using the same criteria as in Example 5, and the evaluation result was A, indicating that the coated surface condition was excellent.
(実施例8:感熱記録材料)
国際公開第2016/194915号に記載の比較例4において、BPC層(バック保護層)のN-プロピル-N-ポリオキシエチレン-パーフルオロオクタンスルホン酸アミドブチルスルホン酸ナトリウム及びパーフルオロオクタンスルホン酸カリウム(合計を1質量部とする)を、合わせて化合物A1-1Na(10質量部)に置き換えた。また、保護層のサーフロンS231W(セイミケミカル(株)製)及びプライサーフA217(第一工業製薬(株)製)(合計を1質量部とする)を、合わせて化合物A1-1Na(10質量部)に置き換えた。作製した試料について実施例5と同様の基準で面状を評価したところ、評価結果はAであり、塗布面状に優れることが分かった。
(Example 8: Thermal recording material)
In Comparative Example 4 described in WO 2016/194915, the N-propyl-N-polyoxyethylene-perfluorooctanesulfonic acid amide sodium butylsulfonate and potassium perfluorooctanesulfonate (total of 1 part by mass) in the BPC layer (back protective layer) were replaced with a combined compound A1-1Na (10 parts by mass). Furthermore, Surflon S231W (manufactured by Seimi Chemical Co., Ltd.) and Plysurf A217 (manufactured by Dai-ichi Kogyo Seiyaku Co., Ltd.) (total of 1 part by mass) in the protective layer were replaced with a combined compound A1-1Na (10 parts by mass). The surface condition of the prepared sample was evaluated using the same criteria as in Example 5, and the evaluation result was A, indicating that the coated surface condition was excellent.
2024年3月19日に出願された日本国特許出願第2024-043969号の開示は、その全体が参照により本明細書に取り込まれる。
本明細書に記載された全ての文献、特許出願、及び、技術規格は、個々の文献、特許出願、及び、技術規格が参照により取り込まれることが具体的かつ個々に記された場合と同程度に、本明細書中に参照により取り込まれる。
The disclosure of Japanese Patent Application No. 2024-043969, filed on March 19, 2024, is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
All publications, patent applications, and technical standards mentioned in this specification are herein incorporated by reference to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent application, or technical standard was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference.
Claims (9)
イオン性化合物。
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。 An ionic compound having an anion structure represented by the following formula 1:
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
式2中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表し、
M1は、1価~3価のカチオンを表し、
nはM1の原子価と等しい1~3の整数を表す。 The ionic compound according to claim 1, which is a compound represented by formula 2.
In formula 2,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom;
M1 represents a monovalent to trivalent cation;
n represents an integer of 1 to 3, which is equal to the valence of M1 .
式a-1~式a-3中、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
LAは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、
bは、1又は2を表し、
RBは、水素原子又は炭化水素基を表し、
LBは、単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、複数のLBは同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Lc1単結合又は2価の連結基を表し、複数のLc1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Lc2は、単結合又は2価の連結基を表す。 3. The ionic compound according to claim 1, wherein the anion structure represented by formula 1 is a structure represented by any one of formulas a-1, a-2, and a-3 below:
In formula a-1 to formula a-3,
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
L A represents a single bond or a divalent linking group;
b represents 1 or 2;
R B represents a hydrogen atom or a hydrocarbon group;
L B represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and multiple L Bs may be the same or different;
Lc 1 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and multiple Lc 1s may be the same or different;
Lc2 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
式Si-1~式Si-4中、
R1は、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
yは、2以上の整数を表し、
R2は、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR2は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
zは、2又は3を表し、
R3は、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR3は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
p及びqは、p≧1、q≧1かつp+q≧3を満たす整数を表し、
R4、R4a及びR4bは、炭化水素基を表し、複数のR4、R4a及びR4bは同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
*は、L1との結合位置を表す。 3. The ionic compound according to claim 1, wherein the Sil1 is a group represented by any one of the following formulae Si-1 to Si-4:
In formula Si-1 to formula Si-4,
R 1 represents a hydrocarbon group, and multiple R 1 may be the same or different;
y represents an integer of 2 or more;
R2 represents a hydrocarbon group, and multiple R2s may be the same or different;
z represents 2 or 3;
R3 represents a hydrocarbon group, and multiple R3s may be the same or different;
p and q represent integers satisfying p≧1, q≧1, and p+q≧3;
R 4 , R 4a and R 4b each represent a hydrocarbon group, and a plurality of R 4 s , R 4a and R 4b may be the same or different;
* indicates the bonding position to L1 .
バインダーと、を含む
組成物。
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。 an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1;
A composition comprising: a binder.
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
前記支持体上に、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物を含む層と、を有する
機能性材料。
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。 A support;
A functional material comprising: a layer on the support, the layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
前記支持体上に、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物を含む層と、を有する
ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料。
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。 A support;
a layer on the support, the layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
前記支持体上に、下記式1で表されるアニオン構造を有するイオン性化合物を含む層と、を有する
拡散転写型ハロゲン化銀写真感光材料。
式1中、
wは1以上の整数を表し、
xは2以上の整数を表し、
Sil1は、少なくとも3以上のSi原子を含む置換基を表し、複数のSil1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
L1は、2価の連結基を表し、複数のL1は同じであっても異なっていてもよく、
Rは、炭素原子を含む(x+w)価の有機基を表す。 A support;
a diffusion transfer type silver halide photographic light-sensitive material comprising, on the support, a layer containing an ionic compound having an anionic structure represented by the following formula 1:
In formula 1,
w represents an integer of 1 or more;
x represents an integer of 2 or more;
Sil 1 represents a substituent containing at least three or more Si atoms, and multiple Sil 1s may be the same or different;
L 1 represents a divalent linking group, and multiple L 1 may be the same or different;
R represents an (x+w)-valent organic group containing a carbon atom.
Applications Claiming Priority (2)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| JP2024043969 | 2024-03-19 | ||
| JP2024-043969 | 2024-03-19 |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| WO2025197969A1 true WO2025197969A1 (en) | 2025-09-25 |
Family
ID=97139449
Family Applications (1)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| PCT/JP2025/010737 Pending WO2025197969A1 (en) | 2024-03-19 | 2025-03-19 | Ionic compound, composition, functional material, silver halide photosensitive material, and diffusion-transfer-type silver halide photosensitive material |
Country Status (1)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| WO (1) | WO2025197969A1 (en) |
Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS63243088A (en) * | 1987-03-14 | 1988-10-07 | ダウ・コーニング・リミテッド | Manufacture of sulfonated organosilicone compound |
| US5326890A (en) * | 1992-10-16 | 1994-07-05 | Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute | Sulfonated silicones and methods for their production |
| JPH11209657A (en) * | 1998-01-30 | 1999-08-03 | Nof Corp | Underwater antifouling coating agent |
| JP2015514837A (en) * | 2012-04-03 | 2015-05-21 | ビーエーエスエフ ソシエタス・ヨーロピアBasf Se | Charged colored silsesquioxane |
| JP2020138917A (en) * | 2019-02-27 | 2020-09-03 | 国立大学法人鳥取大学 | Silyl ether-containing sulfonate |
-
2025
- 2025-03-19 WO PCT/JP2025/010737 patent/WO2025197969A1/en active Pending
Patent Citations (5)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JPS63243088A (en) * | 1987-03-14 | 1988-10-07 | ダウ・コーニング・リミテッド | Manufacture of sulfonated organosilicone compound |
| US5326890A (en) * | 1992-10-16 | 1994-07-05 | Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute | Sulfonated silicones and methods for their production |
| JPH11209657A (en) * | 1998-01-30 | 1999-08-03 | Nof Corp | Underwater antifouling coating agent |
| JP2015514837A (en) * | 2012-04-03 | 2015-05-21 | ビーエーエスエフ ソシエタス・ヨーロピアBasf Se | Charged colored silsesquioxane |
| JP2020138917A (en) * | 2019-02-27 | 2020-09-03 | 国立大学法人鳥取大学 | Silyl ether-containing sulfonate |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
| Title |
|---|
| HUANG, YUE ET AL.: "Synthesis and Solution Behavior of Sulfonate-Based Silicone Sulfactants with Specific, Atomically Defined Hydrophobic Tails", LANGMUIR, vol. 35, 2019, pages 9785 - 9793, XP055983217, DOI: 10.1021/acs.langmuir.9b00875 * |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| JPH0260167B2 (en) | ||
| GB2114764A (en) | Silver halide photographic light-sensitive materials | |
| EP0255722B1 (en) | Color photographs and process for making the same | |
| GB2120801A (en) | Silver halide photographic light-sensitive material | |
| JPH08304957A (en) | Photographic element containing ultraviolet absorptive compound | |
| WO2025197969A1 (en) | Ionic compound, composition, functional material, silver halide photosensitive material, and diffusion-transfer-type silver halide photosensitive material | |
| JPS6134662B2 (en) | ||
| WO2025197970A1 (en) | Compound, composition, functional material, photographic photosensitive silver halide material, and diffusion-transfer-type photographic photosensitive silver halide material | |
| JPS5820425B2 (en) | photo coupler | |
| WO2025058077A1 (en) | Compound, composition, functional material, photographic photosensitive silver halide material, and diffusion transfer type photographic photosensitive silver halide material | |
| US5455154A (en) | Photographic recording material | |
| JP2964007B2 (en) | Color image forming method and silver halide photographic material | |
| JPH04166930A (en) | Silver halide photosensitive material | |
| JPH0332058B2 (en) | ||
| DE69203706T2 (en) | Photographic elements containing sulfoxide coupler solvents and additives to reduce sensitizing dye changes. | |
| JPH0497347A (en) | Silver halide photographic sensitive material | |
| JPS62220954A (en) | Silver halide photographic sensitive material | |
| DE69323269T2 (en) | Yellow dye forming couplers and color photographic elements containing these couplers | |
| JPH07119964B2 (en) | Silver halide color photographic light-sensitive material and color photographic print | |
| JPS6015057B2 (en) | Color photographic image forming method | |
| JP4186348B2 (en) | Silver halide photographic material, infrared absorbing element, plasma display panel and dye | |
| JPS58144826A (en) | Silver halide color photosensitive material | |
| JPH02135338A (en) | Silver halide color photographic sensitive material | |
| JPS5924408B2 (en) | photo products | |
| US20060084015A1 (en) | Color diffusion transfer film unit and image-forming method using the color diffusion transfer film unit |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| 121 | Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application |
Ref document number: 25774120 Country of ref document: EP Kind code of ref document: A1 |